Home

User Manual

1. Event Error Log i ajloj xi S Y a gt e e e 10 54 19 SystemManager Cx Supervisor System Start 19 07 2002 10 54 20 OManager Event Ce Server Project opened eee 19 07 2002 10 56 17 RecordManager Event Downloaded recipe 25 19 07 2002 10 56 55 Systemilanager Event Operator logged in to Supervisor 19 07 2002 10 59 32 SystemManager Event User Failed to log in to Cx Supervisor 19 07 2002 10 59 37 Systemillanager Event User Failed to log in to C Supervisor 19 07 2002 10 59 42 Systemilanager Event Supervisor logged in to Ex Superwisor 19 07 2002 11 01 39 RecordManager High Unable to Find recipe al al The events can be sorted based on a designated field type date time reported by priority or associated message By selecting the Date field the events are sorted alphanumerically by date The Time Reported by Pri Event and Message fields react in the same way The Event Error Log display shows the log listed in date order The widths of the alarm fields can be widened or narrowed as required using the mouse to drag the column boundaries z coll Time 09 56 11 09 56 11 There are a number of buttons that aid the use of the Event Error Log The Disable Error Updates button stops further events occurring in E the runtime environment being added to the log The Event Error Log dialog box is still accessible to switch back subsequently The Enable Column Sorting button allows the format of the Erro
2. 11 4 2 2 New Features The basic functionality remains largely the same however the following features are new to version 2 0 of the Data Log Viewer e Modern User Interface The user interface has a modern look and feel e Better Zoom and Pan Control Features include double click to zoom in on a specific point on the graph ability to zoom a specific area of the graph and the ability to grab and move the graph around i e left right up or down e Data Table View A data table view allows instantaneous values to be displayed based on a cursor position on the graph e Improved Cursors Horizontal and Vertical cursors can be used to analyse the data Where a cursor intersects the data the value will be displayed in the Data Table view e Y Offset Ability to quickly and easily scale data to make it easier to read e X Offset Ability to overlay data i e overlay one week on another week e Snapshot as JPEG A screen shot of the Data log Viewer display including all visible trend data can be saved as an image file JPG e Support for Comma Separated Files Ability to open and view data from comma separated files CSV e Support for Database Files Ability to open and view data from database files MDB e Multiple File Support Ability to view large amounts of data spanned across multiple files e g 1 year on the same graph For more details refer to the Data Log Viewer online help 11 4 3 Data Log
3. 3 Drop the point at the position of the target control object An invalid drop is denoted by the mouse pointer changing to a circular symbol For further information of the use of points with objects refer to chapter 4 Objects 3 4 Creating a Point To add a new point select the l button This results in the Add Point dialog box being displayed Add Point Genesal Adnbutes Point Name fwhtevsve Ga Group lt Destalo EAT wi ias Browne Fori Type Pont Alinbautez aan Default State Detaut Text C Integer G Stated fo Real O State 1 fon Tel 140 Type Hemon Aiinbutes Es Memory Anay Size f Input C Diipa T input Dutpu When all the information has been provided for the new point clicking the OK button commits the new point to the points database while the Cancel button aborts the add operation 3 4 1 General Attributes 3 4 2 Point Type The name of the point is entered in the Point Name field The point name can be up to 20 alphanumeric characters and must not begin with a digit or include mathematical operators such as or be identical to a script reserved word such as IF or cos Any invalid characters including spaces generate an audible error or an Invalid Point Name entered message when the OK button is clicked The group to which this point belongs is selected from the Group field A new group can be entered by typing in the Group field A points description detailing the use of
4. Child recordsets are not supported in the Database function dialog box 197 Examples SECTION 12 Databases 12 10 Examples 12 10 1 Simple Relation Hierarchy example SHAPE 4selece Trom customers APPEND select from orders AS rsOrders RELATE customerid TO customerid The parent recordset contains all fields from the Customers table and a field called rsOrders rsOrders provides a reference to the child recordset and contains all the fields from the Orders table The other examples use a similar notation 12 10 2 Compound Relation Hierarchy example This sample illustrates a three level hierarchy of customers orders and order details SHAPE SELECT from customers APPEND SHAPE select from orders APPEND select from order details AS rsDetails RELATE orderid TO orderid AS rsOrders RELATE customerid TO customerid In addition to the Simple Relation Hierarchy example the Order ID is now used to create a recordset containing the order details for the shown order 12 10 3 Hierarchy with Aggregate example SHAPE select from orders APPEND select od orderid od UnitPrice od quantity as ExtendedPrice from order details As od RELATE orderid TO orderid As rsDetails SUM ExtendedPrice AS OrderTotal This example creates a Recordset of all the orders and their details and adds a field called ExtendedPrice to store the total order value for each record and sums all the ExtendedPrice value
5. Point Names theives leanne f llan oun tAvailableMemory 10 ay O Month 1350 ayOlrear 0 emoblode ISDikSpace GDIResources FHioh larms 1 HighE mors Exclude System Points Only viable points can be viewed from a Select Required Item dialog box The list of items in the Point Names field can be refined by selecting an option from the Group field Click the OK button to accept the new point or click the Cancel button to leave the point unchanged Clicking the Add Point button or Add Alias button allows a new point or alias to be created prior to association with the Wizard An existing point can also be associated with the Wizard by dragging a point directly from the Point Editor Refer to chapter 3 Points regarding adding a new point and dragging from the Point Editor Select the Toggle While Pressed field if the value should only be set while the button is pressed i e the mouse button is held down when the toggle button is clicked The value has its state toggled and then set back when the mouse button is released The different styles of toggle button are the same as those for buttons Examples of some of the different styles of toggle button are shown below Blank Coloured In Out Rotary On Off Toggle The colour of the coloured button is red by default but can be changed by using the Palette Click the OK button to accept the new toggle button attributes or click the Cancel button to leave the bu
6. start Audit Trail Stop Audi Trail O ON Oo bb WN Increment Point Generate Alam Clear Alarm Press the Login Designer button Press the Start Audit Trail button Press the Generate Alarm button Acknowledge the Alarm Press the Clear Alarm button Press the Generate Event button Press the Generate Error button Press the Stop Audit trail Button Exit Runtime Generate Event Generate Error 209 Logging Audit Trails to an SQL Database SECTION 13 CFR Title 21 Part 11 Function 13 4 13 Viewing the Alarm Error and Events Data Tables Notice that a new database file will have been created This will be suffixed with a number one greater than the previous database Refer to the section Microsoft Access Database File Management below for an explanation of this function Jp ver 3_1Test Projects CFR Tutorial fuditTrail sets A 4 CFR_Tutorial _20100611_1 mdb ISZKB Microsoft Office Access Application 11 08 2010 13 32 Ips CFR Tutorial 20100811 2 mdb 160 KB Microsoft Office Access Application 11 08 2010 14 54 y utorial Open the new Access database file login as Guest if required and open the Alarms table which will show a set of records similar to those shown below Alarms Table E se Poma te tine nome Prorty PrerousSiate Nestao Users T 11 08 2010 14 39 30 SimpleAlarm Medium Quiescent ma Designer 2 2 11 08 2010 14 39 32 SimpleSlarm Medium Raised Acknowledged D
7. 15 2 Be 1 2 3 2 PA SECTION 6 Projects By default there are four previously defined users listed in the Configured Users field Designer with designer level privileges Manager with manager level privileges Operator with operator level privileges and Supervisor with supervisor level privileges Web access is an additional privilege it allows the user to log on to the Standard Web Pages To add a new user 1 Click the Add button The User Attributes fields and buttons become enabled and the contents of all fields are cleared ready for a new user to be added 2 Type the full name of the new user in the Full Name field 3 Type a login name in the Login Name field 4 Type a user password in the Password field The password must be at least four characters in length 5 Select a level of privilege from the Security Level drop down list 6 Click the Store button to add the new user to the Configured Users list or the Cancel button to abort the operation To modify an existing user 1 Select a user from the Configured Users list and click the Modify button The User Attributes fields and buttons become enabled with the contents of all the fields filled with the attributes of the selected user 2 Amend the full name login name password and level of privilege in the same way as adding a new user 3 Click the Store button to update the user in the Configured Users list or the Cancel butto
8. 1525 Bek Windows XP Service Pack 2 includes a communications Firewall to protect your computer from malicious communications By default this firewall is turned on and so will block all OPC and DCOM communications To allow OPC or DCOM communications through the firewall either e Completely disable the firewall as follows Note can leave your computer vulnerable to attack so consult your computer documentation or IT administrator if you are unsure a Open Control Panel followed by Computers b Right click My Computer and select Security Center c Select Windows Firewall d On the General tab choose option Off e Alternatively on the Exceptions tab you can configure specific programs to permit communications All other required settings are the same as for running standard Windows XP as explained below A 2 Configuring a Client PC running Windows XP 1 2 3 1 Start Component Services e g by running DOOMCNFG EXE by selecting RUN from the start button The default location is CAWINDOWSISYSTEM 2 Select Component Services followed by Computers 3 Right click My Computer and select Properties 4 View the Default Properties tab Ensure that the Enable Distributed COM on this computer is checked A 3 Configuring a Client PC running Windows NT or 2000 1 2 3 1 Start DCOMCNFG EXE e g by selecting RUN from the start button The default location is C WINDOWS SYSTEM 2 View the Default Properties tab
9. If this error occurs in the Runtime is means the point has been deleted or renamed but a script or animation is still using the Point Run the Analyse Application tool to highlight and fix References to non existent points e How do access CX Supervisor Local Points from Omron Graphical components Omron ActiveX Graphical components like the Thumbwheel shipped with CX Supervisor or those shipped with CX Server Lite and CX Server OPC 7 Segment Display Knob Toggle etc can be placed on CX Supervisor pages and linked directly to CX Supervisor points by selecting a data source of CX Supervisor Local Points However note that the default setting for points is to allow reading but to protect against writing from external sources like these controls If this is attempted you will get the following error message OLE Point lt pointname gt has no write access Note however that as a low priority message the default project configuration will not cause the error log to automatically open and you will have to manually view the error log viewer To prevent this error and to allow write access change the OLE Access to Read Write on the Advanced Point Settings dialog box Note Copy Protection must be installed for this function e Which OPC Servers have been tested with CX Supervisor The following third party OPC Server products have been tested with CX Supervisor 283 284 Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions
10. Send IntegerArray to Excel as a column note range and column must be specified DDEPoke chan R1C1 R3C1 column IntegerArray Send TextArray to Excel as a row default only range required DDEPoke chan R1C2 R1C4 TextArray ENDIF Example CX Supervisor Script demonstrating DDERequest with arrays chan DDEInitiate Excel Bookl Sheet 3 IF chan gt 0 TREN Request a row of cells from Excel and copy into Arrayl Arrayl DDERequest chan R1C1 R1C3 314 DDE Appendix F Obsolete Features Note Request a column of cells from Excel and copy INDO Array Using the return flag Array2 DDERequest chan RICZ TRoC2 1 bReturnFlag Request a cell value from Excel and copy into element 2 of Arrayl Arrayl 2 DDERequest chan R3C2 ENDIF All the above points must have DDE Read Write access set F 4 3 3 DDE Server Array Points Note Note Note The value of an array point named ddearray in a CX Supervisor project called ddetest srt can be read from a Microsoft Excel worksheet by entering the following formula format into a cell lt Server gt lt Topic gt lt item gt lt index gt Example SCS Point ddearray 3 access ddearray 3 using Point topie or SCS ddetest srt ddearray 0 access ddearray 0 using Project topic Microsoft Excel accepts the square brackets used in CX Supervisor to reference an array index in a formula use instead The index m
11. These are seen during development when OK is pressed on the Script dialog box when the script type is CX Supervisor script To troubleshoot further 302 Refer to the comprehensive CX Supervisor Script Reference manual or on line help for detailed information including examples on specific script instructions Double check capitalisation and objects names To confirm the line causing the problem temporarily comment it out and see if the syntax error is no longer reported As atest try to simplify complex script lines into 1 or more lines with single instruction to identify which instruction is causing the error As a test simplify complex math formulae into several lines with single operation to identify which operation is causing the error PLC Maintenance dialog box Appendix C Troubleshooting e As atest use hardcoded values for parameters using known valid values C 6 3 Runtime errors If any script has correct syntax but generates an error at runtime e g trying to open a file that does not exist the error is recorded in the Error Log To troubleshoot further e To confirm the line causing the problem temporarily comment it out and see if the error is no longer reported e Display values using MsgBox Message command or using the LogEvent command C 6 4 Design errors The only remaining errors are when the script compiles and runs correctly but do not produce the expected results These are typically errors
12. To preview the page before printing select Print Preview from the File menu Refer to chapter 2 Pages regarding the use of the Print preview display To print the contents of the Recipe Editor select the Print button Refer to chapter 2 Pages regarding the use of the Print dialog box lt is possible to print the details of a recipe including a list of all the ingredients points and expressions which comprise the recipe To do this display the Recipe Editor dialog box as described earlier and then highlight the appropriate recipe from the list of recipes Click the Print Recipe button to send a copy of the recipe to the printer The recipe is formatted similar to the following example 159 Using Recipes in Runtime SECTION 10 Recipes Recipe Coffee British Description Makes weak washy British style coffee Access Level All Users Ingredient Point Expression Editable miik ml milk 50 Yes coffee g coffee 3 Yes sugar sugar 0 Yes water ml water 250 Yes 10 10 Using Recipes in Runtime Recipes defined using the Recipe Editor in the development environment can be accessed in runtime using the Recipe Viewer Recipes may be downloaded using the Recipe Viewer 10 10 1 Recipe Viewer 160 The Recipe Viewer can be displayed in one of two ways in the runtime environment It may be displayed by any CX Supervisor script code attached for example to a button The function call is simply DisplayRecipes The Recipe Vie
13. e Add a Recordset to the connection and select the Named Range which will appear in the list of available tables if the connection is live as the Table name Records in this table can now be added or modified as with any other database table Note If records are added to this type of table the Named Range will increase in size accordingly automatically The example below demonstrates a valid range selection named Customerlnvoice note the name displayed just above column A Microsoft Excel Invdb xls mie Edt view Insert Format Tools Data Window Hep S x OSH 6A I1BBIS o 8 T Tibet ER de Bik Customer Irege Invoice Number Customer Name Invoice Total 105 Alex Homer 22 8 106 David Sussman 66 Edward Julius 307 John Daintith 456 Roger Hatton io E H4 MA Tabler Ready Sum 1160 91 The first row of the range is assumed to contain the Column Headings Configuring Recordsets SECTION 12 Databases Note When updating files the column headings cannot contain numbers or spaces for example Column1 or Invoice Total is invalid Also some words are reserved and can not be used for example a column heading of Number will cause an error These restrictions do not apply when only reading these files Note Make sure that all the cells in a column are of the same data type The Excel ODBC driver cannot correctly interpret which data type the column should be if a column is
14. 12 53 47 12 53 47 12 53 48 12 53 46 125346 125348 a ra rm Eru Notes 1 The UserlD field shows the currently logged in CX Supervisor User Audit dira y Audi Array nad Array dit rAuditAnay Adina y Adi Aura y cdt dra y Audi ray Adra y Designer Designar Designer Designer Designer Designer Designer Designer Designer Designer Designer Designer 2 The Index field shows the array index for the point Creating Running a CFR Application Microsoft Access SECTION 13 CFR Title 21 13 4 9 Audit Trail Configuration Settings Alarms Errors and Events It is not necessary to invoke the Audit Trail Configuration dialog for auditing points but to generate an audit trail for alarms errors and events the default configuration state must be modified Launch the Audit Trail Configuration dialog Check the Log Alarm checkbox to allow logging of Alarms N B Logging of Alarms can be set to log All Alarms or Selected Alarms The attribute to select any individual alarm is applied in the Alarms settings dialog as described in the section below All Alarms when selected overrides the setting applied to individual alarms Selected Alarms setting will log to Audit Trail only those Alarms with the Generate Audit Trail attribute applied in the Alarm Settings dialog Check the Log Errors Events checkbox as shown below to allow Error and Events to be logged into the Audit Trail Press OK to sa
15. An expression based on Real or Integer point must be entered This expression is typed into the Expression field A text string to coincide with the display of a Real or Integer value can be entered in the Displayed Text field this field can be updated using the Graphics Editor The position of the displayed value within the text field is specified by entering a character into the Displayed Text field The value can be displayed in its decimal form in scientific notation or in hexadecimal by selecting a Format settings The number of decimal places displayed can be specified by adding a character for each required place after a decimal point e g indicates 2 decimal places The text can also be left justified by setting the Left Justified setting Note To include a character as part of the text insert it as an escape character For example to display Box 1 type Box Only hashes typed to the left of the required for value display need escape characters since the first hash without an escape character is taken to be the point at which the value should be displayed To abort the Display Value edit click the Cancel button By clicking the Browse button a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions When completed click the OK button If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message opens 9 3 22 Display Value Text Text may be displayed using
16. Associating Points with Actions and Events ooccccooccnncnccnnccncnncnnnonononcnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnrnnnnnenos 125 PATA OM Edda A cada 125 ge VIEW MOOG a o ei 127 9 22 IA od 127 92 ON 127 O24 O PPP 128 92 97 OPANING Me ANIMATION EMO dd le ci n 130 o o en 130 o A A eee er 130 F32 AA O 132 23 3 EXCCUNION ADOS iS 132 IA SCA PEC de td 133 9 3 5 Script COMPISUON msi eii eiii 135 9 3 0 IOFZONEAL MOV ri A A 135 A a aa a a e a sdvinet aval EAT 136 A A A a a 136 9 39 RESIZe eii asian 137 9 3 10 Horizontal Percentage Pla aos 138 93 11 Mertical Percentage Flan 139 3 12 Display Page ui a nidad 139 O A A a a E ea ate 140 A nn A 141 9 3 15 Colour Change Analogue coooiocoiinincciciii eii a dina 141 9 32 16 Colour Change Di a tial hanes e UR ca 142 9 3 17 Enable Disable oooncccccccnnoncccccconccnonnnncnnnncncnononnnnonnnnonononancnnonnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnrnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnananiness 143 9 3 19 Olleria cia 144 319 MIS en en ne eee eee ee ee ee eee 144 9 3 20 Display Value Digital a elect nes ett neil ulna dirs a dt alee a daria A Veluteg 145 923 21 Display Value ANALOGUE itinere noc 146 9 39 22 Display Y allS RO said did tica 146 9 3 23 Edit Point Value Digital ccccccccccsscsscsecsecsessessessessessecsessessessessecsestessssssssessesuessssveaeseeaveesene 147 9 3 24 Edit Point Valle Analo qUe lanar 148 O 3720 EQUIPO Vale e sahncec neni ed head faite e ania 150 93 26 Common Colour
17. CX Supervisor Database facilities provide fast transparent access to many different data sources via a database technology called ADO Database design is not covered here as it is a large subject explained fully in any of the many books available It is assumed that developers using these database facilities have a working knowledge of databases Comprehensive Database Script Functions allow complete database access The data sources which can be accessed depends on the Data Providers installed but may include e MS Access e MS Excel e Visual FoxPro e dBase e ODBC for Oracle e Paradox e SQL Server e Text files in TXT and CSV format Database Connection Editor The Database connection editor in the Development Workspace enables users to create Connections Recordsets Field association Parameter association and Schema objects in a familiar Tree View hierarchical format using the popup menu ca WorkSpace Ie ey cov Fieputg T ables Invoice El Northwind Cr Calegoty if Customers e Employes Sales fi Order Detads fe Order Subtotals Loe Shippers This editor is unique in CX Supervisor in that actual database connections can be tested online in the Development Environment The ability to connect online also has the added benefit of providing assistance in creating objects lower down in the hierarchy This editor has been designed to enable a large proportion of the database functionality to be perfor
18. Copying an Existing Alarm Definition Open the Alarm Editor dialog box as described in chapter 8 Viewing the Contents of the Alarm Database To copy an existing alarm highlight the alarm from the alarm list and then type lt Ctrl gt C This creates a copy of the alarm definition on the Windows clipboard To paste the alarm definition back in to the current project type lt Ctrl gt V The Alarm Editor ensures the name of the alarm is unique by 121 Deleting an Existing Alarm SECTION 8 Alarms 8 8 8 8 1 8 8 2 8 8 3 122 appending a number to the name For example if the original alarm name was Alarm the name of the pasted alarm is Alarm1 All other properties of the pasted alarm remain the same as the original alarm definition It is possible to copy many alarms at once by highlighting all the desired alarms in the alarm list Press and hold the lt Ctrl gt key and use the mouse to select alarm definitions one by one or press and hold the lt Shift gt key and use the mouse to select blocks of alarm definitions When the desired alarms have been highlighted the alarm definitions may be copied and pasted in the usual way Alarm definitions may be pasted into a project other than the original Care should be exercised when attempting this procedure as the alarm expression may contain references to point names which may have different meaning in the new project Deleting an Existing Alarm Open the Alarm Editor dialog
19. Event Date Time Event Open Close Clear Start Stop Events have no associated data 11 3 2 2 Data Records Data records currently consist of the following fields Type Date Time Milliseconds Data Type Normal Error Data Boolean Integer Real 11 4 Data Log Viewer Component v2 0 and v1 8 11 4 1 Invoking the Data Log Viewer The Data Log Viewer can be invoked by e Selecting Data Log Viewer from the popup menu if privileged in the runtime e From script function OpenLogView with the Data Set and Traces to show as arguments and also closed by CloseLogView script function e From an external program 11 4 2 Viewing Logged Files In CX Supervisor 3 0 the Data Log Viewer was significantly enhanced with lots of new features For systems that do not support version 3 5 of the NET Framework like Windows 2000 the old Data Log Viewer can continue to be used 11 4 2 1 Data Log Viewer 2 0 Version 2 0 of Data Log Viewer looks like this 172 Data Log Viewer Component v2 0 and v1 8 SECTION 11 Data Logging AT ioia Fie Vew Curs ora Gptio Heb Saa a let ay 4 beans y a 230 h i i non 155436 19441 155500 155550 000 155736 194 DE F TUUU i tata ia aa ata WI UUU l 155436 194 155500 000 1555350 000 15573614 06 February 2009 Visble Plot Name Type Time Cites Yoa f Bool A Ss Elonbe ari Tis pe py Toot Iris 10 Second gt Oo fo Shure Vi ane Inde E 24 678
20. FulSiee Keep Page in Memory The Page Properties dialog box allows the viewing and editing of various attributes 1 2 3 To 1 set the Page Properties Enter a title for the page in the Page Title field up to a maximum of 32 characters Add a description if required in the Page Description field Enterthe co ordinates for the top left corner of the page in the Top and Left field This value must be in pixels and must be a positive integer between O and 2000 Alternatively click the Full Size button to fill the runtime environment workspace Enter the height and width measurements for the page in the Height and Width fields These values must be in pixels and must be a positive integer between 0 and 2000 click the Centre button to centre the page to the graphics workspace Select the border style for the page from the Border Style settings The default for this is Sizeable as shown on the Page Properties dialog box Changing the selection will update the shown preview To prevent the title from being displayed click the Display Title setting to remove the check mark The following change occurs in the dialog box Printing a Page SECTION 2 Pages 7 To change the display mode select Overlap Replace or Popup in the Display Mode setting Popup pages appear above all other page types Overlap pages can lie on top of other pages and Replace pages closes any pages that overlap 8
21. The object currently on the clipboard is pasted either over the original if the object is to remain on the same page or positioned in a new page Objects can then be re positioned by selecting and dragging using the mouse To delete an object or objects select them and press the lt Delete gt key on the keyboard The Undo button allows the most recent action or actions to be undone To undo the action click the 3 button The number of undo operations stored by CX Supervisor for retrieval can be amended from the Preferences option on the File menu This is especially useful when constructing complex pages 69 Manipulating Objects 4 5 8 Mirror Image 4 5 9 Orientation 4 5 10 Transparency 4 5 11 Group SECTION 4 Objects There are various ways of mirroring objects e Via the ba buttons on the toolbar e By selecting Mirror from the Edit menu and clicking on either Horizontal or Vertical e By clicking on a grab handle and dragging it across the opposite side Some objects like Text and Control Objects cannot be mirrored For further details of mirroring objects refer to chapter 1 Graphics Editor Lines Rectangles Polygons and Polylines can be rotated To rotate an object click the E button The Rotate Object dialog box opens fo hc i Enter the angle of rotation in degrees in the value entry box and click the OK button Solid shapes polygons and text boxes can be filled with col
22. 7 To close the preview screen click the Close button A U N o 2 4 3 Printing To print a page click the Print Page button The Print dialog box opens 30 Saving a Page to a Project SECTION 2 Pages Print RIES Hame TE li Prol E Properties Status Default pitar Ready Type Epson Stylus Pro XL Whee WMHolyuemote_prriter_1 Comment Print bo fie Prat range Copies AN Number of copies ft 4 C Pages from fi E ee ll pl pl C cats E ta 1 2 3 To set the print range 1 Clicking one of the settings in the Print range settings The Selection setting is only enabled when an item or items are selected on the page prior to starting the print process Click the Pages setting and enter a range of pages in the from and to fields 2 To change the number of copies to be printed enter a new value in the Copies field 3 If multiple copies are selected click the Collate setting to instruct the printer to collate the copies as they are printed 4 To print to file click the Print to file setting 5 Click the OK button to activate printing While printing is in progress a dialog box opens showing the status of the print job Clicking the Cancel button at this point aborts the printing When printed the dialog box disappears The final printed version should be similar to that shown in the Print Preview dialog box with a header describing the project and a footer describing the page with a page
23. The Array Size field specifies the number of data values associated with the point A value greater than 1 allows the point to be treated as an array For more detail on array points and their uses see Optimisation of PLC Communications The PLC Attributes dialog box takes on a slightly different appearance if the point type is text showing the number of characters which start at the specified data location Data Locator Characters 1 3 4 9 Data Transfer Actions When Opening a PLC The type of data transfer action for the selected PLC can be specified by selection of the appropriate setting Options for Input and Input Output points are Always Update Point Value and Only Update Point Value When On Display Options for an Output point are Write Value Read Value and No Data Transfer Data Transfer Actions When Dpermg a PLE Write Value To PLC Read Value From PLE Mo Data Transfer 3 4 10 Conversion Attributes The minimum and maximum PLC value and the application of a conversion factor is specified in the Conversion Attributes fields these fields are not applicable for Boolean and text points Conversion Attributes can be used to convert in a linear fashion between a value in a PLC and the point range For example if the possible range in the PLC is 0 to 1000 and the point range is O to 100 then a PLC value of 500 would correspond to a point value of 50 The conversion would be performed just before the data is se
24. Tic eay 2 DDEPoke chan Cells 4 1 LACA Range Cells 2 1 Send individual array element values to Array3 The or format can be used to delimit the array index DDEPoke chan Array3 0 Cells 1 1 DDEPoke chan Array3 1 Cells 1 2 DDEPoke chan Array3 2 Cells i 3 ENA EE End Sub F 4 3 5 Requesting Arrays from CX Supervisor via DDERequest Requesting arrays from CX Supervisor and storing them in Microsoft Excel is a little more complicated than sending in that both CX Supervisor and Microsoft Excel need to know if the array is to be stored in rows or columns CX Supervisor is informed of the row col requirement by specifying either row or column after the array points name The default is row if nothing is specified The following are all valid examples of specifying names for Array1 in a DDERequest Array1 Arrayl Row Arrayl r Valid ways to specify a row Array LlicCcorumn e Arrayl col ArrayliCT Valid ways to specify a column Microsoft Excel is informed of the row col requirement by specifying a Range of cells in either row or column format Both the Microsoft Excel and CX Supervisor specifications must match in order for the call to be successful It is not necessary to specify rows or columns if a single element of an array is required Note DDE Requests are one shot request i e they are not part of a Hot link Example requesting CX Supervisor array values from Mic
25. a constant is a point within the script language that takes only one specific value In CX Supervisor a control object is applied in the development environment and can be a pushbutton a toggle button a slider a trend graph a rotational gauge or a linear gauge Essentially a control object can be a complex graphic object consisting of a number of primitive graphic objects which provides user interaction An advanced communications management system for OMRON PLCs providing facilities for software to maintain PLC device and address information and to communicate with OMRON PLCs and their supported network types CX Server supports CS Series PLCs A Database connection or Connection for short contains the details used to access a data source This can either be via Data Source Name DSN filename or directory A Database Connection Level is a string which determines what level in the database tree hierarchy is to be operated on Some examples are listed below Northwind Connectionlevel CSV Result Recordset level Northwind Order Details OrderlD Field level Invoice Data Types Schema level A Database recordset or Recordset for short is a set of records This could either be an actual Table in the database or a table that has been generated as a consequence of running a Query A Database Schema or Schema for short obtains database schema information from a Provider A Database Server Query or Server Query for sh
26. be used to add or edit the items Note This dialog box cannot be opened until at least one group is added i ITEM ATTRIBUTES Hom A tiriantis The Item Attributes dialog box enables you to define the attributes of each Item data point in the selected group Name This is the client name for an Item i e a point of data 250 Using with Omron s CX Server OPC SECTION 17 Using CX Supervisor as an OPC Cli Item ID This is the OPC Server s name for the data If the server supports OPC item browsing facilities click Browse to browse the OPC Server to list the namespace groups and items to create the OPC Item ID Otherwise type the OPC Item ID in the format specified in the server documentation Access Path This is the full path name for the data point Consult the documentation for the server to determine the correct format Data Type From the drop down menu select the format used to record the data point information Active On Startup Checking this option will ensure the Item is active when the OPC server is started The default is checked 7 Having checked that all the parameters are correct bring control back to the Point Editor window by closing any attributes window that may be open 8 To run the application click the Ba button in the toolbar The CX Supervisor Point will now be connected to the OPC Server and can be used like all other CX Supervisor points i e to drive animations in alarm expressed
27. beta Pass Device Server The products have not passed vor o Omron driver Ignores Read from Device option Seen to lose device values potential control risk OPC Labs Time Monitor Fail Group inactive item active still results in a callback mann Software V1 0a Server only not supported AG aiia V1 0a Server only not supported Contact Siemens to upgrade to V5 0 Siemens Building MK8000 MP1 30 MP1 30 Could not get the Technologies Inc simplest of operations to succeed Softing OPC Toolkit Some support issues reported USDATA Corp Factorylink 7 0 1 beta Single test failed to connect What is the maximum limit of commands in a script 285 286 Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions There is no set limit and some applications have had many hundreds of lines However it is not practical to have too many lines and a limit of 30 lines should be considered not as a system limit but as a warning that the application is not correct What is the maximum limit of ingredients in a recipe There is no limit other than the PC memory What is the maximum limit of number of entries in the Alarm Log The number of lines in the alarm log and the error log is set in the Project Runtime Settings Alarm and Event settings dialog boxs The maximum limit is currently 2000 What is the maximum limit of number of Alarms Theoretically the maximum number of alarm types that can be defined is
28. correctly converted it is vital that the conversion takes place while the computer is configured to correctly display these characters Failure to follow these steps will result in extended characters being substituted for the nearest suitable character which is likely to be incorrect and cause errors Once saved the conversion error cannot be undone so any occurrences will need to be edited manually This can be time consuming and should be avoided These settings are only required temporarily during the conversion process Once converted to Unicode the Operating System can be reconfigured and the Unicode characters will be displayed correctly Windows XP To configure Windows XP to correctly display extended characters to allow conversion to Unicode 1 Open Control Panel and select Regional and Language options 2 Click on the Advanced tab 3 From the Language for non Unicode programs select the language that the application was written for Remember that CX Supervisor 1 25 and earlier was a non Unicode program In some circumstances like Russian or Greek support it has been noted Install files for complex script needs to be selected on the Languages tab Microsoft does not document the reason for this 4 OK all dialogs and install new OS files from CD if requested Reboot if required Windows 2000 To configure Windows 2000 to correctly display extended characters to allow conversion to Unicode 1 Open Control Panel
29. language during development in the above case Espanol Spanish In addition the developer may call the SetLanguage script function see the CX Supervisor Script Language Reference Manual for details for example behind a button to allow the user to automatically switch languages 15 3 2 User Defined Text Note Note Note While the Runtime system is shipped with full translations for all system text any user defined text added by the developer must be translated and these translations incorporated into the application Examples of user defined text are e Button captions like Open Page e Text in Text objects like Value e Default values of Text Points e Chart and Graph titles The system always loads user defined text from files with the file name exactly the same as the language selection and extension UDT The file names for installed languages are English Czech Danish Deutsch Espa ol Finnish French Italiano Nederlands Belgi Norwegian Polish Portugu s Russian Slovenija Srpski and Swedish lUser defined text is specific to each application and therefore is located in the application project directory e in the same folder as the lt project gt SCS file IIn CX Supervisor version 1 25 and earlier the user defined text was stored in files with a USL extension These files are in MBCS format For backwards compatibility if these files still exist they will be loaded as MBCS and con
30. translations to the correct row or just delete the unwanted translation When all columns are corrected you can save and close the Translation Tool When reopened the highlighted rows have been deleted Alternatively you can delete an entire highlighted row by right clicking on the row header with the row number and selecting Delete Selected Row Where older USL files exist they will be loaded if no corresponding UDT file exists and converted to Unicode When saving new Unicode UDT files are always written 229 Translating User Defined Text Manually SECTION 15 Multilingual Features If you need translations for the same text in different contexts Show the Object ID column and select the Add new object ID string button Select the application text for the new translation and the object context for this special case This is in the format PageName followed by a dot followed by ObjectName for example MyPage Push_1 Any text that includes a quote character cannot be stored so is automatically converted to single quote character Translations must also include single quote characters To enter a newline in the edit field hold the lt Ctrl gt key and press the Return key 15 5 Translating User Defined Text Manually 230 112 3 Note Note Note To get the user defined text translated and incorporated follow these steps 1 Develop your application completely lt is easier and more effective to perform these
31. with the additional use of points Firstly using a pre defined action the object can be associated with the Change Colour pre defined action runtime action When a Boolean point s value is 0 the colour is black when the point s value is 1 the colour is white The same result can be achieved using the basic programming language script This time a single command can change the colour from black to white Finally either instance can be initiated by the user in the runtime environment e g the user presses a button to change the object s colour This is a simple example but underlines how quickly and smoothly a runtime application can be built This chapter elaborates on all forms of actions and animations that can be applied to CX Supervisor in the development environment Also refer to the CX Supervisor Script Language Reference Manual for further syntax details for the application of actions and animations 9 2 Animation Editor Actions and animations are created on a project page or object basis using the Animation Editor To use the Animation Editor CX Supervisor must currently have a project open If no project is currently open select Open from the Project menu to open a previously saved project or select New from the Project menu to create a new project To open the Animation Editor click the H button 125 Animation Editor SECTION 9 Animation b gt Edi Port Value Analogue s Edit Pont Vale
32. 1 sec Page n Figure 3 Good grouping example However in Figure 3 we see the PLC Programmer and SCADA developer have reorganised the memory now there are only 3 blocks which would be the same for up to 3000 memory addresses This is clearly far better than just 9 memory addresses with 9 communication requests To achieve this design your application using the following rules 265 Points SECTION 20 Best Practices 1 Group together points that will be configured as Always Update in contiguous PLC memory addresses 2 Group together points that will be configured as Update when On Display grouping for each page 3 Within groups from steps 1 amp 2 create sub groups for each required update rate 4 Within update rate sub groups sort and group data by data format BCD Float etc These points can be defined as 1 or more arrays 20 2 1 1 Use Fins event memory If your communications is using a Fins driver e g Controller Link it is possible to create a responsive application giving the impression of high performance by linking the SCADA to the event memory which the network updates automatically Of course reads and writes actually access the local cache very quickly although this will lag behind actual device values 20 2 1 2 Control communications 20 3 Points 266 Use the On Request update type to give you complete control over when the value of a point is read from the PLC or written to the PLC
33. 6 21 55 Removing Pages FIOM a Pro ius 107 6 21 6 Linking Pages ina Pro eo ds 107 6 21 7 Selecting Pages for Display on RUN sieves en ean aed 107 6 21 8 Changing the View MOde cccccssccccssseeccsesseeccceeceeccsuseeeeceaseeesseeeeesseaseessseageeesseaeeesseas 107 6 29 Viewing Project Detalls a AAA E AS 107 6 21 10 Multiple Sel lO Mesas 108 622 Print TOM Te PrO SCU Ed scada 108 622271 RENO C LUD o ni cada 108 6 22 2 Print PrOVIQW ccccccccsesecccsseeecesseeccuseccsaueecseuseessuecessaeeeceseseeeasenssageessaeeeesseeessaesessagsesseass 108 B22 2 3 PANINO stead cietete rae iets as vavien uaweuae A a N E 108 6 23 Navigating Pages using Workbook MOG cccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeeeaeaaeeeeeesaaaeeeeesesaaaees 108 624 Using ME UII SC KOS IONS Ads 108 SECTION 7 Graphics LID sanidad 109 7 1 A O AN 109 7 2 Graphics Isa tone donc taasanataumines ietinranediulatsiaiatncaigenltuidtoaauetadammansacuaqness 109 2 Greate LID a iaa 109 Taa Openinga EDA ra ia 109 23 Modny LI lo ta oo ib dd e awe 110 Tea DOS HDAV ridad lod 110 7 3 Manipulating ODjCCtS ecesciontoncioc rita 110 Feel PROG OD O eee ee a 110 7 3 2 WOGIFY Library Elements nse eaa fobeanindytuaccumengiohwaudi dune aa A 111 F33 Delete Ope Chaan o a a 111 7 3 4 Using a Graphic Library Object in the Graphics Editor oooccccccconnnccconncnnononcnncnnnnconnos 111 TS ROMS STU MO Mize ct ett oder 112 7 376 Detaull Graphic
34. 96 l2 Ons The Alarm object displays alarm messages in runtime These messages may be optionally filtered by an alarm group and can be formatted to include the date time and status of the alarm lf there are more alarms to view than the space provided then you can scroll the alarm view To edit an Alarm object double click on it The Alarm Wizard dialog box opens Alarma Wizard x Display Alanne From Selected Groups gt p Acknowledge On Click Group Fiter lt A Groups fan Users Cancel p Display Alaenss From Selected Priorities ee From Priority Lowest To Highest E Alam Status Colours gt Alam Window Colours inoan B eink MN peckoround Colour i o Alam Ack M Bink TD Tite Colour Alam Cleared PF Cink I Frame Colour Cc F Display Date 7 Display Time 7 Display Alam Status EZ Display Column Titles E 3 0 Frame I Highest Prcety at Top F Display Group Display Priority Width Date 9 Tene 3 Group 10 Pimy 10 Status 20 Mes Sage Group Priori ty 5 atu 5 Message Group Priority Cleared Message Group Priority Acknowledged Message Group Priority Alarm Alarms are defined using the Alarm Editor refer to chapter 8 Alarms for information on using the Alarm Editor The Alarm Wizard allows entry of the alarm group filter alarm status colour codes and various style attributes The Alarm Wizard presents a preview of the alarm object which immediately updates to show the
35. Analogue from the animation list and click the Modify Action button For a list of the objects to which this action is applicable refer to chapter 9 Objects On selection of the Edit Point Value Analogue action the dialog box opens 148 Runtime Actions SECTION 9 Animation Edit Point Yalue Analogue Tx Integer A eal Point OK User Input Limits Minimum Value lo Maximum Value fioo Runtime Display Attributes Cancel Browse ile Caption Enter a new value T Display Numeric Keypad In Place Edit A Real or Integer point must be entered This is typed into the Integer Real Point field A text string for the caption of a user dialog box can be entered in the Runtime Display Attributes field The limits imposed on the user for the value of the input are specified in the User Input Limits fields The Display Numeric Keypad option is useful if the runtime system does not have a keyboard i e it is controlled by a touch screen or tracker ball When a value is edited a Numeric Keypad dialog box opens which allows editing by clicking on screen Humence keypad elele Aone See Sel If the In Place Edit option is checked instead of the popup editing dialog box the value can be edited on the page in a standard Windows edit box To abort the Edit Point Value Analogue edit click the Cancel button By clicking the Browse button a point may be directly specified as described in
36. Dagia l5 Edi Point Value T ext Ta EnableDuable A Mowe Horzontal 4 4 Mowe Vertical de t Percentage Fil Honzonta rh x x t Pescertaga FA velica t Peste Hegh 7 2 Renge ah EN Ta Vebi The Animation Editor dialog box lists all possible animation actions in the Runtime Actions column Attributable objects for the Runtime Actions are listed in the Trigger Event Expression column Animations can be instigated on a Project Page or Object basis by selecting Object Actions Page Actions or Project Actions from the Actions field When opening the Animation Editor while an object within a page is selected the Actions field defaults to Object Actions and the selected object is shown in the Animation Editor When accessing the Animation Editor with a page selected this field defaults to Page Actions When opening the Animation Editor while no selection is made the Actions field defaults to Project Actions The actions that may be applied to an object are dependant on the type of object selected Only one type of action Execute Script can be applied to a Page or Project script The Users field allows selection of which users can use the selected page in the Runtime environment This is used in conjunction with allocating users and allowing them permission to perform tasks for further information on allocating users refer to chapter 6 Projects If Object Actions is the current selection for the Actions field an
37. GenerateReport had been called again e g On Condition when the data changes To an existing HTML page add the following line This must be inserted between the lt head gt and lt head gt markers lt meta http equiv refresh content 5 url Report htm gt This will force the page to be reloaded every 5 seconds The value after the content e g 5 is the refresh rate in seconds Be aware that 5 seconds may practically be the fastest update as some pages may take Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions several seconds to download Also the value after the url is the name of the page to refresh Can CX Supervisor be used with Industrial Touchscreen PCs IPCs Absolutely CX Supervisor is designed for use with Omron s DyaloX Touchscreen IPC but can be used with other manufacturers It has special features especially for Touchscreen PCs e Edit animations have option to enter data from a popup keyboard to allow typing direct on the screen e CX Supervisor Login dialog box has a popup keyboard e Project setting for Large dialog boxs to increase font size on high resolution touchscreens giving a larger contact area Projects can be built on a development machine and deployed using Create Runtime Install Disk to copy required files to a shared drive or USB memory stick It is also commonplace to copy a shortcut to the SR2 application to the Stantup folder If the keyboard is to be detached see also How To Enable Aut
38. IP ii N 191 12 5 4 Use point to hold parameter ValU8 ooooonccccccnnonncnnnccnnnonconnnnnnnnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnanennnnns 191 PESE O AAA Pu he wean ee ee ean eis inept neat 191 122520 Vallina suena pat ad a a io ten 191 OM MTIG TG SCA ANS e TO 192 1261 Names ada 192 pA 3 a A een ere ees SE cee eee eee TEE 192 12203 VOC Sid ca 192 12 64 Citas ita 192 12 037 EMO dd SANA 192 126 6 Read ON GOMMECHON msi a 192 12267 ETSII tana a tbc dida ds 192 12 0 8 Database Schema IPS iia ai an 193 Using TAS ACOSO 195 12 74 Nested Transactions aia aia 196 SAVING hecorasets as Misco iva 196 ALAS IAD I ING A A A Ged 197 EXAM MOIS Sd ito il iii 198 12 10 1 Simple Relation Hierarchy example ccccccccsssceeceesseeeenseeeeeceesseeenseaeeeessneeeseneseeensanes 198 12 10 2 Compound Relation Hierarchy example ccccccccseseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeessaeeees 198 12 10 3 Hierarchy with Aggregate example ccccsessccccssseeeceseseeenseeeeeeceaseeeeesaseeesseaeeeeneaeeeeenaaees 198 12 10 4 Group Hierarchy example aria 198 12 10 5 Group Hierarchy with Aggregate example ccccccccsseeeeeessseeensseeeeessaeeeeesenseeensnseeesseaes 198 12 106 Multiple Groupings examples iria aa E 199 12 10 7 Grand Total example cccccccecessececeeeeeeenseseeeesaseeeeeseneeeessaseeeeseaaeeeessaseeesseaaeeensanserensnages 199 12 10 8 Grouped Parent Related to Grouped Child example cocco
39. Moreover because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high quality products the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual Nevertheless OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication Copyright Notice Table of Contents NOCO E E CO OOO O O a a Trademarks and CODYN a didas 1 CODY IG Esas iia 1 SECTION 1 Graphics Ed O Pess 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 6 1 7 1 8 About the Graphics Editor sisi ii 17 A A a AEA N 17 1 2 1 Foreground Colour and Background Colour ccccccseecceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeseeeessaaeeees 18 222 CUSTOM COOS Uan A a 18 A Hla ces en conten ses eeeaneeeeeeeniae 19 1224s TIP ARORA PAETE taria e mtea nance senda cecamunts 19 1210 gles 9 51610 1 coro CARO treet are Sar ree cet enn ee ne en em eae eee 19 OU Oe ea Fe etc Sanita a oath Se stab te erage beau on sete ca teat ncGeaa id atecameeameeet et aieraaemmansebcend 19 tA TObec Identidad citanoeivaresdaledeteds 20 1422 TR AISS Os Oe nostros 21 TES OWED OWI ONG oa A eee ea a ae ee Rese 21 Vee RO LU iai aa a a a a 21 ea SIOKIZOMPAVIVIIBFOL o a a a REE 22 AG veica MNO snra ci a TETO 22 14 7 Transparency o AA A a a 22 SAUS DD a 23 TAB e o do do o e ld ed ad de 23 Cr Fom NaMe ta a ee aa Mia Me
40. Number of active medium priority alarms LowAlarms Integer 0 2 147 483 647 Number of active low priority alarms LowestAlarms Integer 0 2 147 483 647 Number of active lowest priority alarms Unacknowledged Integer 0 2 147 483 647 Number of alarms currently unacknowledged 3 11 7 Error Logger Points The following table describes system points for use with CX Supervisor errors System point Point type HighErrors Integer 0 2 147 483 647 Number of high priority errors logged LowErrors Integer 0 2 147 483 647 Number of low priority errors logged MediumErrors Integer 0 2 147 483 647 Number of medium priority errors logged 3 11 8 PLC Communications Points The following table describes system points for use in the communication between CX Supervisor and a PLC 49 Printing Points SECTION 3 Points InputsActual Reports average number of PLC input points read per second since PLCBusy Boolean Indicates if PLC communications are busy PLCFailures Integer 0 2 147 483 647 Total number of PLC failures 3 11 9 Security Points 3 12 3 12 1 3 12 2 3 12 3 3 13 50 The following table describes system points for use with user login logout and user privileges in the runtime environment System point Point type SecurityLevel Integer 0 4 ranman user s security level SecurityName Text Current user s security name UserName Text User currently logged on Printing
41. Object s popup menu z Tooltip Test E T a o o z OMRON Es eement Control biect cee Properbes o About R Convert 5 4 Reading and Writing Properties at Runtime ActiveX properties can be read and written at runtime for example to change values or colours as required This can be achieved using the CX Supervisor script functions GetProperty and PutProperty or alternatively in VBScript using the normal dot syntax for example VBSCRIPT Displayl Value 100 ENDIF For more details see the CX Supervisor Script Language Reference Manual 76 Calling Methods at Runtime SECTION 5 ActiveX Objects 5 5 Calling Methods at Runtime ActiveX methods can also be called at runtime This is achieved by using the Supervisor script function Execute or alternatively in VBScript using the normal dot syntax for example VBSCRIPT CommonDialogl ShowOpen ENDIF For more details see the CX Supervisor Script Language Reference Manual 5 6 Responding to Events Some ActiveX components are written to generate events on certain conditions like mouse clicking or user input or error conditions You can write a script to execute whenever any event occurs These scripts are defined as subroutines in the page initialisation script as they may be called any time the page is open To easily add these subroutines from the ActiveX property browser click the Events tab This shows all the event types for this control
42. POpup Keyboara Layout ai dal cciis 234 SECTION 16 Application Analysis Performance Monitor ooocoocooccooo o 235 1641 Application Analys st od 235 6 14 Dala PAY SCO cue tcc et ic ele Get adil ad io 236 672 PeMOrnmanCe MOMO o dd 239 SECTION 17 Using CX Supervisor as an OPC CliedMt ooccoccconcconcconcconcconcconnnas 243 Wak ArOVe new o OP tac ice dais 243 171 1 A Brief History of OPC Data Accord 243 17 122 Other OPC Speciation S snno AS 244 17 1 3 Key Technologies used by OPC ccccccccssseeccceeseecceeeeeeeeseuseecsseaeeeeseaeeeesegseeeesenseeessages 245 17 2 Using CX Supervisor with OPC ServelS oocoooocccccccconccccnconncnnancnnnononnnncnnnncnnonnnnnnnnnnnncnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnas 247 17 3 Using with Omron s CX Server OPC cccccccsseccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeseaeeeseeeeseeessageeessaeeeeesneeesssaaaes 251 SECTION 18 Connecting to a remote CX Supervisor application 253 18 1 Two Tier Client Server or Master SlavVe ccocoooccccconccccccnncconnnnonncnononnnnnnnnnonononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnoncnnnnos 253 182 PESO PEO unna cil 253 183 JIDISWIDUIEC SCV e o ade 254 12 139 4 REUS AN e eo 254 18 5 Creating a CX Supervisor Server application cccccconccnnoccnncncoconcnnnononnononnnannnnnnnnnnnnonnannncnnnnnonos 255 18 6 Creating a CX Supervisor Client application occccccconccnnoccnncnnocannnnnononnnncnnnanonnnnnnronnnnnnnnnenonnronos 255 SECTION 19 Conn
43. Points Print Setup The Point Editor can be printed in the same way pages can Before printing ensure that the printer has been set up correctly To check the printer settings refer to chapter 2 Pages Print Preview To preview the page before printing select Print Preview from the File menu Refer to chapter 2 Pages regarding the use of the Print Preview display Printing To print the contents of the Point Editor click the button Refer to chapter 2 Pages regarding the use of the Print dialog box Embedding Point Values in Text As well as using point names in expressions in many cases where text is entered this can be made dynamic by replacing a placeholder in the text with the value of a point Part or all of the text may be a point name enclosed in the Point Substitution characters double round brackets by default Examples of the way in which text is changed The shift foreman was ShiftForeman becomes Embedding Point Values in Text SECTION 3 Points and The shift foreman was Fred Smith The shift output was ShiftOutput litres becomes The shift output was 5000 litres 3 13 1 Using Format specifiers Format specifiers can be used similar to the Format script command 6s for text string points 6d for integer points f for real floating points Where My Textpoint Hello The text of My text point is s Mypoint becomes The text of My text point is Hello Where MyR
44. Project for more details Omron s CX Simulator virtual PLC can also be manually configured for use with CX Supervisor To achieve this follow these steps 1 Start CX Simulator from the windows Start menu 2 Select Create New PLC 3 Select the required PLC Type 4 No need to register I O gt Next 5 Keep default Virtual Comms Unit gt Next 6 Keep default Comm Port gt Next Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions 7 Create the data folder gt Finish 8 In the work CX Simulator dialog box connect to the virtual PLC 9 Start the virtual PLC It must be started first for CX Supervisor to be able to open the device 10 In CX Supervisor project set the PLC type as per CX Simulator or FinsGateway 11 Set the communication type as per CX Simulator setup e g default is Controller Link Network 1 Node 10 Unit 0 When the CX Supervisor project is run communication with the virtual PLC will be established All PLC aspects of CX Supervisor will work with CX Simulator as if it were a real PLC e Why do get Invalid Point error If this occurs on startup of the developer it can be due to a corrupt point definition Usually editing the Point and pressing OK is enough to correct the corruption lf there are too many points select a large group and use the Multiple Edit function to assign some common attribute to them all e g OLE Access is Read Only This in effect edits each point also correcting the corruption
45. ServerName Name Product Version Version Alstom 4 a 30a Pass aona Technology noted not OPC compliant Amersham UNICORN Zappa build 313 Pass Biosciences AXEDA Systems OPC DA Server 1 0 0 2 CimQuest OPC Server for 2 25 00 01 Pass Allen Bradley reported as 2 25 CimQuest OPC Server for 2 25 00 01 Pass Allen Bradley Cyberlogic MBX OPC Server 5 00 02 Pass although Technologies Inc noted not OPC compliant KW Software KW Software Pro 2 0 Pass GmbH ConOS OPC Server ICONICS Inc Modbus OPC o m Server ICONICS Inc DataStore OPC aa a Server 3 10 INAT GmbH INAT OPC Server 2 05 37 Pass oe S5 and NAT GmbH OPC Server MPI 2 05 37 Pass PPI Invensys Systems DASS7 Pass Wonderware Matrikon OPC Server for 1 1 3 230 Pass Simulation amp Test National 4 5 3 beta Pass Instruments Northern Dynamic OPC Server Pass Toolkit OSI Software Inc OPC Data Access 1 0 0 14 Pass although amp Historical Data noted not OPC Access Server for compliant the PI System Phoenix Contact Interous OPC 2 12 Pass GmbH amp Co KG Server Rockwell Software 2 30 00 beta Pass SMAR OPC 4 Conf 3 3 0 0 ee Server for DFI302 Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions Server Name Product Version SST DH OPC Server 1 6 16 Pass ControlNet OPC 1 3 0 coc SE Server A O Pam Siemens AG Simatic WinCC V6 0 SP2 Beta Pass although noted not OPC compliant Siemens Moore APACS OPC 1 00 K
46. Set MyData Set and Items 11 I3 amp 16 share intervals and 12 and 15 share a different interval then the following files will be generated MyData Set19990112106roupl esv contains Ll 13 6 Ig MyData Set1999011210Group1_1 csvcontains 12 I5 MyData Set199901121014 csvcontains 14 11 6 4 1 On Change ltems 176 All on change items will have their own filename generated regardless of any multiple selections made because it is not possible to determine any common time interval with these type of ltems If a multiple selection of On Interval and On Change Items is made then the above conventions still apply Data Logging SECTION 11 Data Logging 11 6 5 Generation of Text Files Whereas CSV files only contain limited information e g Breaks Date Time Milliseconds and Value Text files contains all the information stored on selected Items Groups i e the expression label deadband etc The multiple selection rules apply as described in the previous paragraph with the exception that On Change items can be grouped together 11 7 Data Logging As well as the inbuilt datalogging features it is also possible to log data directly to an existing Database This provides direct storage of data in third party format allowing for easy analysis using familiar tools and there is no need for scripts to export data However slower speed means logging to a database may be unsuitable for tasks with large data th
47. The InputPoint script function is used to input the value of a specified point and the OutputPoint script function is used to output the value of a specified point This section covers some good practices with the Points for quicker development and smoother running e Define as few points as possible Keep the Points database as slim and manageable as possible by e Using arrays where possible especially for PLC points e If memory points are defined for scripting try to reuse general purpose points like nLoopCounter bReturnValue nTemp e Use expressions in animations instead of calculating new values e g using TemperatureK 273 rather than creating a new TemperatureCelsius memory point e For memory areas that are bit and word addressable access as words If you want the bits use expressions with amp and operators e g Display Digital animation expression MyW100 amp 0x80 and MyW100 amp 0x40 instead of MyW100bit8 etc e Reduce the number of active points Aim to reduce the number of active points that are currently communicating where possible e Automatically by setting Update when on Display option e Manually using script EnablePoint DisablePoint OpenPLC ClosePLC etc Have a minimum of Input Output points Double check the use of all Input Output points Don t forget that Output points can actually have Data Transfer set to input the value only once on start up e Use Standard
48. Viewer 1 8 Data Log Viewer 1 8 looks like this 173 Data Log Viewer Component v2 0 and v1 8 SECTION 11 Data Logging 11 4 3 1 Features 174 EN Data Log Viewer Balloon 1999020314 dlw Ait ude 100 00 ual Eos Meters Bourmeng SS TO 14 05 54 ee ee For Holp peoss Fi aww 14 06 32 000 NUM E e The Data Set viewed is the name passed as an argument with the script function or a user selected Data Set e On start up a dialog box allowing selection of traces to view from the Data Set will be shown Up to 10 analogue traces and 50 digital traces may be shown at once Alternatively script parameters can be used to automatically select the traces to show e On display the viewer displays e the latest data file for this Data Set e the X axis set to the Data Set s period e Y Axis set to full scale for the first trace e The selected analogue traces are shown overlaid e Boolean points are displayed in a separate view e The X Axis shows true Date and Time as the local time on the logging system Remote analysis within different time zones will show the same dates and times Logging of local time means adjustment of PC time and daylight saving are handled e Key shows trace colour name and value at the cursor Selected trace has a gt before the name Clicking on other trace details selects other traces e Scale shows Minimum value Maximum value and scale label of selected t
49. XML Interface Definition OPC Alarms amp Events OPC Historical Data Interface Access Interface OPC Batch Interface Figure 1 OPC Interface Specifications 17 1 3 Key Technologies used by OPC This section provides for convenience a brief introduction to some key technologies that are used by or that form part of OPC Some of these are described in more detail in the appendices plentiful reference books are available elsewhere describing all of them in any required level of detail 17 1 3 1 A Brief Introduction to DCOM Microsoft describes DCOM as The Distributed Component Object Model DCOM is a protocol that enables software components to communicate directly over a network in a reliable secure and efficient manner Previously called Network OLE DCOM is designed for use across multiple network transports including Internet protocols such as HTTP DCOM is based on the Open Software Foundation s DCE RPC spec and will work with both Java applets and ActiveX components through its use of the Component Object Model COM In other words DCOM is an object programming model for the implementation of distributed applications using a client server pattern A client can use several servers at the same time and a server can provide functionality to multiple clients simultaneously Translating that into plainer English COM basically allows software components to be written in such a way that they can be used by all CO
50. a default connection string will be built for you as shown below Audit Database Setup B atabase OK Audi Cancel Connection string Criver SOL Server Server locall Trusted Connecton T rue Databaze 4udit NOTE The default connection string assumes that the SQL Server is local if this is not the case for your system replace local with your lt server address gt When you have the required connection string press the Ok button to save the new settings If an error message indicating that the connection string is invalid is displayed press No to go back and correct the error If the message still appears but you are happy that the connection string is valid for your system then press the Yes button to save your connection string Press Ok on the Audit Configuration Dialog to complete the process and re build the project after a successful build the project is now ready to log to SQL Server 212 Further Settings and Configuration SECTION 13 CFR Title 21 Part 11 Functionality 13 5 4 Running an SQL Server Test Project Build and run the modified project and carry out the following actions EA CFR Audit Trail Test Login Designer Stan Audit Trail Increment Foint Generate Alarm Generate Event Logout Stop Audit Trail Clear Alarm Generate Emor 1 Press the Login Designer button 2 Press the Start Audit Trail button 3 Press the Increment Point button several times 4 Pres
51. a selection R Multiple objects can be selected by holding the lt Shift gt key down and clicking on each object in turn Objects can also be de selected in similar fashion Grab handles are displayed for each selected object The most recent object to be selected from the group is denoted by its green grab handles all other grab handles are cyan The co ordinates of the most recent selection are displayed in the status bar All objects can be selected by clicking Select All from the Edit menu To move an object or a number of objects select them and click and hold the left mouse button within the selection the object s can now be dragged to their new location Where objects are to be moved between pages it is often useful to cut them without having to insert a new object CX Supervisor has the ability to cut and paste objects Objects which are cut and pasted retain the properties assigned to them for example animation or alarms To cut an object from the current page select it and click the button The object is removed from the page and is held on the clipboard until a new object is cut or copied An object which is to appear on a number of pages can be copied from an original To copy an object select it then click the Ea button A copy of the object is held on the clipboard overwriting the previously copied or cut object To paste an object which has been cut or copied to the clipboard click the El button
52. a summary of error information including a detailed count of errors and PLC communication information Click the Close button to remove this Error Information Low Prony Errors o Medium Priority Enors O High Hali Errors 7 65 M PLC Communications Status Comnmunicabons Busy Ne Communication Enors 6 10 2 8 Language Settings The language for user defined text can be set via the Language Settings dialog box Select Runtime Settings from the Projects menu followed by Language Settings Language Settings Default Danish Deutsch English Espa ol Finnish French Italiana Nederlands Belgie Norwegian El Select a language from the Language for User Defined Text field Click the OK button to accept the settings or the Cancel button to abort the operation 96 Settings SECTION 6 Projects 6 10 2 9 Point Substitution Settings The enclosing characters associated with a report can be changed via the Point Substitution Settings dialog box When set these characters must be fixed for all reports generated by the project Select Runtime Settings from the Projects menu followed by Point Substitution Settings the Point Substitution Settings dialog box opens Point Substitution ettings Point Enclosing Characters Opening Characters f Cancel Closing Characters fii Supply enclosing characters in th
53. accidentally overwritten or destroyed in the runtime environment The two buttons unique to the Runtime of the dialog box are Modify Target and Save Recipe As With the appropriate ingredient selected from the list clicking the Modify Target button allows the target value to be modified by means of the Modify Ingredient dialog box shown below Modify Ingredient Quantity ngredient Attributes Ingredient Mame kilk Cancel Mew Quantity E kepboard The target value for this ingredient may be changed by entering the new value in the New Target field Selecting the OK button accepts the change choosing the Cancel button aborts the change The new target value is applied only to this recipe download No permanent change is made to the recipe definition itself The Save Recipe As button displays a simple dialog box prompting for a name to use for the new recipe Save Recipe Az Clicking the OK button creates a new recipe with the name specified Choosing the Cancel button aborts the save operation A recipe created using this dialog box is added to the available list of entries displayed in the recipe dialog box The newly saved recipe is also available in the development environment using the Recipe Editor 161 Using Recipes in Runtime SECTION 10 Recipes Note that it is possible to change the name of an existing recipe in runtime simply by typing a new name in the Recipe Name field of the Modify Recipe dial
54. and Auto Fit Bars fields as desired The Project Colours option allows the user to change the colour of the axis using the toolbox The 3 D Frame option enables the chart to appear with a 3 D frame The Auto Fit Bars option forces the configured bars to resize themselves to occupy all of the available chart area 5 Change the fonts used for the chart via the Font button The font size used for the chart can be automatically calculated by selecting the Auto Size Font option 6 Enter an arithmetic trace expression for each point or select one by clicking on a Browse button An existing point can also be associated with the Wizard by dragging a point directly from the Point Editor Refer to chapter 3 Points regarding adding a new point and dragging from the Point Editor 7 Exit the Wizard by clicking the OK button to accept the new chart attributes or click the Cancel button to leave the chart unchanged To select the chart scaling click the Scaling button the Axis Scaling dialog box opens Axis Scaling Ea Conhguraton Attributes i OK Minimum Scale Value fi Cancel Massmum Scale Value 100 paie Atnbutes 7 Minor Display Unts to a sais ha E Major Display Units 20 Display Minor Units Scale Units Units M Display Major Units I Keep Ticks On Axis Bue Tick Colour 7 Keep Units On Axis FF Scale Units Colour MN T Display Grd The Configuration Attributes fields can be altered by typing over the existing en
55. and Delete Ingredient buttons on this dialog box respectively allow the highlighted ingredient to be modified or deleted following confirmation When all the information has been provided for the updated recipe clicking the OK button saves the recipe details while the Cancel button aborts this modify operation 10 6 Copying an Existing Recipe Definition 158 Open the Recipe Editor dialog box as described in chapter 10 Viewing Recipes in the Recipe Editor To copy an existing recipe highlight the recipe from the recipe list and then type lt Ctrl gt C This creates a copy of the recipe definition on the clipboard To paste the recipe definition back in to the current project type lt Ctrl gt V The cut copy and paste operations in the Edit menu may also be used The Recipe Editor ensures the name of the recipe is unique by appending a number to the name For example if the original recipe name was Recipe the name of the pasted recipe is Recipe1 All other properties of the pasted recipe remain the same as the original recipe definition It is possible to copy many recipes at once by highlighting all the desired recipes in the recipe list Press and hold the lt Ctrl gt key and use the mouse to select recipe definitions one by one or press and hold the lt Shift gt key and use the mouse to select blocks of recipe definitions When the desired recipes have been highlighted the recipe definitions may be copied and pasted in t
56. and any parameters the event may pass for example the code number of the key pressed Select the event name to add or edit the script for and click the square edit button Activex Property Browser ScrollBar Froperties Events Name Parameters BeforeDragl ver Cancel Data 5 1 Drag BeforeDropOrPaste Cancel Action Data Change Error Number Description SC S KeyDown KeyCode Shift S KeyPress KenAsci Kepp KeyCode Shift oe Note In previous versions Event scripts could be added from the Animation Editor but the method above provides more efficiency as all event scripts are loaded just once on page initialisation 717 Responding to Events 78 SECTION 5 ActiveX Objects Overview SECTION 6 Projects SECTION 6 Projects This chapter describes the concept of projects It details procedures for creating and amending projects and the process of associating users with projects It also deals with the process of compiling a project 6 1 Overview A CX Supervisor application consists of a number of pages linked together The pages may contain passive or active graphics text or animations and may be grouped together logically to form a project A project may consist of many pages or simply a single page Projects may be built and tested within the CX Supervisor development environment and run stand alone under the CX Supervisor run time environment Only one project at a time
57. and select Regional Options 2 On the General tab select the original application language in the Language settings for the system section In some circumstances like Russian or Greek support it has been noted Thai language also needs to be selected Microsoft does not document the reason for this 3 Change the default System Locale to the original application language Click the Set Default button and select the required language Data Log Viewer SECTION 15 Multilingual Features 4 OK all dialogs and install new OS files from CD if requested Reboot if required Once configured follow these steps to convert the application 1 It can be worth checking the language configuration by running the old application under the old CX Supervisor version and confirming all characters are correctly shown 2 Install the new CX Supervisor version and load the old project 3 Open each page and select File menu Save Page to force the pages to be written in the new Unicode format 4 Select Project menu Save to force the project to be written in the new Unicode format and then run the project to recompile the application 5 Test the application fully in all supported languages and by entering text from different Locales 15 7 Data Log Viewer The Data Log Viewer also supports the 16 runtime languages defined above The selected language can be dynamically changed from the Data Log Viewer options menu 15 8 Standard Web Page
58. application in another language e How non English runtime applications can be developed e How applications can be developed where the end users with different nationalities can switch between 2 languages i e Bilingual or more i e Multilingual e How applications can be developed for export where the developers can work in their native language and switch language before export and visiting maintenance engineers onsite can switch back to the development language Note Projects created in CX Supervisor versions 1 25 and earlier use Microsoft s Multi Byte Character Sets known as MBCS or sometimes DBCS for Double Byte Character Sets for multilingual features The formatting of character tables in MBCS is not the same as Unicode However old projects are automatically converted to Unicode when they are loaded and will then be saved in Unicode See the section Loading old projects for important information before you start Multilingual issues can be very complex but like most areas CX Supervisor provides this functionality in an easy to use way with a few simple dialogs The CX Supervisor Multilingual features can easily be divided into two clear sections Development and Runtime Users of each section have different needs and so these sections function completely separately For example it is possible to develop an application in any language but this does not affect which language the user must use at runtime in any way Not
59. are listed in the Point Names field Select the desired point from the Point Names list and click the OK button Clicking the Cancel button aborts the selection To add a new point click the Add Point button for details on adding a point refer to chapter 3 Points Use the Simple Expression Entry dialog box to assign an expression to an action lt is accessed from an entry in the script code This results in the Simple Expression Entry dialog box being displayed Enter Sin Expression Enter the expression in the Expression field The Browse button can be used to pick a valid point Click the OK button to proceed or the Cancel button to abort Use the Select Required Object dialog box to assign an object to an action It is accessed from an entry in the script code This results in the Select Required Object dialog box being displayed Select Required Object Select an object from the Object Names field Click the OK button to proceed or the Cancel button to abort Note The short cut keyboard combinations for Cut Copy and Paste operations are valid within the Script Editor Highlight part or all of a field and type lt Ctrl gt X to cut the text or lt Ctrl gt C to copy the text insert the cursor at the desired field and type lt Ctrl gt V to paste the text Since the cut and copy operations store the information in the Windows Clipboard it may be pasted to another dialog box or application 9 3 2 Aliases An alias de
60. be displayed to the left of the required for value display need escape characters as the first hash without a meta character is taken to be the point at which the value should be displayed Text for Boolean State 0 and Boolean State 1 are entered in the State O Text field and State 1 Text field 145 Runtime Actions SECTION 9 Animation To abort the Display Status Text edit click the Cancel button By clicking the Browse button a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions When completed click the OK button If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message opens 9 3 21 Display Value Analogue The state of a Real or Integer point may be displayed using the Display Value Analogue dialog box To access the Display Value Analogue dialog box to add an action select Display Value from the animation list and click the Add Action button To access the Display Value Analogue dialog box to modify an action select Display Value from the animation list and click the Modify Action button For a list of the objects to which this action is applicable refer to chapter 9 Objects On selection of the Display Value action the Display Value Analogue dialog box opens Display Value Analogue SN ss econd Displayed Text N umber of seconds H Formal Browse F Left Justified Standard M Leading Zeros Scientific C Hexadecimal
61. be used for the Audit Trail NOTE Once the SQL Server database exists CX Supervisor will create the required tables in the specified database if they do not already exist namely Points Alarms Events and Errors The same tables as are created for the Microsoft Access database 4 The database name has been correctly specified in the Audit Trail Configuration settings 5 The connection string has been specified correctly 13 5 2 Creating an SQL Server Test Project To create a test application convert the test project described in the sections above Or Create a test project as described in the sections Creating and Running a CFR Application using Microsoft Access Then select the SQL Server option in the Audit trail Configuration settings dialog 211 Logging Audit Trails to an SQL Database SECTION 13 CFR Title 21 Part 11 Function 13 5 3 Connection String for an SQL Database Invoke the Audit Trail Configuration dialog select the SQL Server radio button in the Database group and press the Setup button this will display the Audit Database Setup dialog as shown below Audit Database Setup Database Connection Sting Build Connection String NOTE The connection string will be empty initially In the Database text box type in the name of your chosen database for the test application we created a database called Audit and then press the Build Connection String
62. below ES Microsoft Excel Book e File Insert Format Tools Data Window Help Edit view ointld iDate Time Name Index PreviousValue NewValue Userld 20092070 14 59 27 Audit 00 i User Unknown 42 20092010 14 59 27 Audit 0 0 000000 O 530000 User Unknown 3 20092010 14 53 27 Array UU 1 User Unknown 4 20 09 4010 14 55 27 Array 10 2 User Unknown 5 20092010 14 53 27 Array UL J User Unknown 220 Limitations SECTION 13 CFR Title 21 Part 11 Functionality Microsoft Excel 2007 and 2010 e Within Excel select the Data tab and then click the Get External Data button F F i 2 E Bookl Microsoft Excel Home Insert Page Layout Formulas Data Review View A Ea Connections ay Palz r x C lar HEY y Get External Refresh El Sort Filter b Text to Data Alu 22 Edit Lir g Advanced Columns E _ Connections sort amp Filter Da H gt a pE i El ig 5 m From From From Other Existing Web Text sources Connections Get External Data e This will invoke the Select Data Source dialog Select the desired CFR audit database file mdb and click Open e This will display the Data Link Properties dialog which can then be filled in the same way as described in the Excel 2003 example 13 8 Limitations Microsoft Access There is a 2GB files size lim
63. between pages and speed up development by creating libraries of commonly used objects e g displays or buttons These can also be reused in later projects Use Copy and Paste Making good use of Copy and Paste to duplicate similar objects can reduce development time Use Alignment functions Create professional looking applications by prevent unsightly errors quickly using Align Top Left and Make Same Width Height Draw perfect circles Quickly draw perfect circles by holding lt Ctrl gt while drawing an Ellipse Use meaningful object names Instead of accepting the default object and group names rename them to something more helpful e g Conveyor1 InstrumentPanel StartButton etc This section covers some good practices for writing scripts Never use On Regular Interval scripts You should almost never need to use On Regular Interval scripts Always question e If it is used for logging use the logging facilities instead e If it is used for timing use PLC ladder instead as this is much more reliable e When they start with or contain IF lt condition gt THEN you should probably be using an On Condition script using lt condition gt from the IF statement e When they perform calculations on PLC or memory points e g Z X Y use On Condition to recalculate when the source data changes e g with a condition X Y TRUE which forces execution even if value changes to value 0 This w
64. box as described in chapter 8 Viewing the Contents of the Alarm Database To remove an existing alarm highlight the alarm from the alarm list and select the button A confirmation dialog box opens Click the Yes button to remove the alarm from the alarms database or No button to abort the delete operation Printing Alarms Print Setup The Alarm Editor can be printed in the same way pages can Before printing ensure that the printer has been set up correctly To check the printer settings refer to chapter 2 Pages Print Preview To preview the page before printing select Print Preview from the File menu Refer to chapter 2 Pages regarding the use of the Print Preview display Printing To print the contents of the Alarm Editor click the Print button Refer to chapter 2 Pages regarding the use of the Print dialog box Alarm Reporting In Runtime An alarm condition which occurs during runtime is brought to the attention of the operator There are a variety of options available in the way alarms are reported These options are configured in the development environment During runtime there are essentially four ways of examining alarm messages the Alarm Acknowledge dialog box the Current Alarm dialog box the Alarm History dialog box and the Alarm Object The Alarm Object is a graphical object which displays alarm messages in a similar way to the alarm status viewer Refer to chapter 4 Objects for an explanation of how to c
65. can detach from specialised user privileges by logging out Access is again dependant on the application There is no dialog box associated with logout once logout Is activated privileges are immediately discontinued While one user is logged in it is possible for a different user to log in as prior to login the current user is automatically logged out by CX Supervisor A user with the designer privilege can further amend the user configuration in the runtime environment using a similar dialog box to the development environment s Configured Users dialog box As well as typing a password verification of the password is required and both fields are disguised by a symbol This is so that a new user can apply their own password and that only they know the password Verification is required to ensure the password was typed correctly in the first instance 6 11 2 Linking CX Supervisor Users With Windows Users In CX Supervisor v3 1 a new feature was added to the Security System that allows CX Supervisor users to be linked with Windows users using the Use Windows Login Credentials option shown in the Configured Users dialog above This functionality is associated with the CFR functionality and provides a greater level of security protection including password expiration etc by making use of the Windows security features 6 11 3 Menu Option Access Levels 100 To open the Menu Option Access Levels dialog box select Menu Opti
66. code if required in a number of ways e Placing the l beam cursor at the desired point in the script code field followed by Tab from the Edit menu e Placing the l beam cursor at the desired point in the script code field and then pressing lt Ctrl gt lt Tab gt 9 3 4 7 Finding and Replacing Text Text can be found and replaced within the current script as follows Select Find Replace from the Edit menu and type appropriate text in the Find what and Replace with fields Click the Find button to initiate the search and lt Return gt to execute text replacement 9 3 4 8 Clear Script Code Field The script code field can be cleared if required Select Clear All from the Edit menu 134 Runtime Actions SECTION 9 Animation 9 3 5 Script Completion When script entry or script modification is complete click the OK button To abort the Script Editor prior to completing the task click the Cancel button If there is an error in the script the Compilation Error s dialog box opens Compilation Enos Ct Superssor Balloon Demonstration Toh array Ae Fishlump FALSE Feh visible FALSE ENDIF Syntax eng 1 compdaton emale In this example the error is caused by a spurious ENDIF This dialog box informs the user where an error has occurred and its type If necessary use the scroll bars to see the whole error message Click the OK button to remove the Compilation Error s dialog box and return to the Scr
67. created on a workstation with the CX Supervisor Full Package installed and then saved to a network drive solid state flash disk or USB key and transferred to the IPC Right mouse clicks can be simulated using the Event Selector mouse icon on the System Tray When clicked the next touch screen press is a right click This is sometimes required for accessing context menus Windows Explorer has Folder Options to allow a single icon click to open the item This can enhance usability The touch screen confirmation sound can be controlled and turned off from the Advanced tab on the Pointer Devices settings in the Control Panel Running the CX Supervisor Runtime Only package on the DyaloX IPC is recommended CX Supervisor Developer Package can be run although some features are easier to use with an external keyboard and mouse be fitted The Full developer package also requires more disk space E 1 1 Installing CX Supervisor Note To install CX Supervisor Runtime only package manually 1 First install CX Server manually by launching Setup exe from the CX Server folder on the installation CD If required for space reasons change the install folder from the default e g to drive D 2 Install CX Supervisor Runtime Only package If required for space reasons change the install folder from the default e g to drive D and choose NOT to install CX Server as part of the installation as it has already been done in s
68. currently selected by the cursor This is achieved by tooltips that can be applied to all objects 1 2 Ouse 1 Inthe development environment select the object to apply a tooltip 2 Click on Tooltip Text from the Edit menu The Tooltip Text opens T ooltip T ext Select the Burnes pushbutton to go 3 Type the help text in the Tooltip text field or select the Browse button to apply the value of a point 4 Click the OK button to accept the settings or the Cancel button to abort the operation An example of a tooltip in the runtime environment is as follows 73 74 Using the Floating Menu SECTION 4 Objects Using the Floating Menu Clicking the right mouse button within CX Supervisor brings up a context sensitive menu known as the Floating menu There are two such menus one in the development environment and one in the runtime environment The development environment Floating menu contains short cuts for many operations discussed in this chapter Overview SECTION 5 ActiveX Objects SECTION 5 ActiveX Objects This chapter describes the process of using ActiveX objects within CX Supervisor applications 5 1 Overview The Microsoft Windows ActiveX technology allows objects called components to be developed and are used by inserting them into an ActiveX container like CX Supervisor ActiveX components may perform many different functions which can be graphical or non graphical but they follow standa
69. give a more meaningful description if required 11 7 2 2 Field Link Select the Field to link to from the list showing fields configured in the chosen Recordset 11 7 2 3 Expression Enter the point name or expression that will be logged The Browse button allows easy point selection 11 7 2 4 Data Type Set the type of the data to be stored For a point this is automatically set to the same as the point type when selected using the Browse button However for an expression this must be specified for example an expression Second 3 will create a Real value but the required data may be just the integer part so the Data Type would be set to Integer 178 Data Logging 11 7 2 5 Deadband SECTION 11 Data Logging This allows the value of the expression to change within the percentage limit without being logged This is particularly useful when logging analogue values that are subject to noise Each sample is checked when the value changes for On Change sampling or every log period for On Interval against the last logged value While the value varies within the deadband the values are ignored When the value exceeds the deadband limits the new value will be logged This may dramatically reduce file size and ease analysis Entering a value of 0 e no dead band will cause every sample to be logged 11 7 2 6 Trigger on change of value Note This option is only used when the Sample Rate is set to On Change Whe
70. graphical representation on the page either a true representation of the object or an icon If the object is a document or image Windows activates the application that created the object and places it ready to be edited In the following example the bitmap image when activated launches the Format Chart Area application to allow editing a E E E EEA 10 eH y 4 En to P oe ae i i el E A ooo ne A e NOAA Be AAN 1 BA Ano aa adonde Doo Ooo mh im bee be BE UB BES GLN E e When editing is complete select Update and Exit from the application s File menu to return to CX Supervisor Note The Update and Exit command varies from application to application 321 Object Packager Appendix F Obsolete Features If the object is an animation or sound file when activated it is played through until it ends at which point control is returned to CX Supervisor Note If the application which created the object no longer be available CX Supervisor reports an error F 7 4 Converting a Package Object Certain types of object may be converted from one form to another To initiate conversion 1 2 3 1 Select the object on the page 2 Activate the Edit menu and select Package Object displayed as the last item on the Edit menu 3 Select Convert from the sub menu displayed Note The menu item name varies from application to application but alw
71. in preference to older messages The Alarm Sound button allows the selection of an audible warning which are heard when an alarm is raised The Open Waveform File dialog box is shown below Open Waveform File Ea fie Nane pro rwa c scev20betal demos Cancel List Fides of Type Dunyes waveform file wav Network Choosing a waveform file with this dialog box does not in itself cause the warning sound to be heard when an alarm is raised To hear the audible warning for any alarm the Play Sound setting in the alarm definition must be ticked Also the PC on which CX Supervisor is running must be equipped with a suitable sound card and audio capability 8 3 Viewing the Contents of the Alarm Database To open the Alarm Editor dialog box click the B button An example of the Alarm Editor dialog box is as follows 116 Creating a New Alarm SECTION 8 Alarms Alarm Editor 15 FlourLow Deadband Flour ank lt 60 Madu Flour getting biem baay fo OvenTempHigh Simple OvenTemp gt 200 Medum OvenTemplow Simple OvenTemp lt 100 Medam ES WwaterLow Desdband Waters 40 Meda Alarms may be segregated into groups To select a group pick an entry from the Group field All alarm definitions can be displayed by selecting lt All Groups gt from this list Individual listed alarms are sorted based on a designated field type name type or description By selecting the Name field the alarms are sorte
72. indicates the Palette is currently displayed CX Supervisor saves the settings when it is exited and restores them when it is next run Each of the buttons on the palette is discussed in more detail in the following paragraphs 17 Palette Bar SECTION 1 Graphics Editor 1 2 1 Foreground Colour and Background Colour Note Note To create an object in a particular colour before selecting the object s tool from the Graphic Object bar first select the colour by clicking one of the colour buttons to drop down the colour picker a ae Brrr E Eee QODODOOA Other It is not strictly necessary to select a colour for an object before creating it however if no colour selection is made the object retains the same colour as the last object To apply a colour to a previously created object select the object on the page and select a colour using the same method as before Colour may only be applied to some graphic objects It cannot be applied to embedded objects or bitmap graphics 1 2 2 Custom Colours 18 The colour picker displays 48 common colours along with a further 16 user defined custom colours A colour can be chosen from the common colours or the Other button can used to create a custom colour Clicking OK on the Custom Colour dialog box will apply the current colour to the selected Graphic Object Clicking Add to Custom Colours will add the current colour to the custom colours list for easy re use l
73. may be open for editing within the CX Supervisor development environment An attempt to open a second project forces CX Supervisor to close the current project prompting to save changes where there is unsaved information and open the second project 6 2 Runtime Editions The Development package can create applications for different Runtime platforms The target system uses the same CX Supervisor Runtime software but needs a USB Dongle that matches the chosen target The type of project is either chosen on creation or changed from the Target Settings dialog box CX Supervisor Machine Edition For most HMI and visulisation projects These projects only require a Machine Edition USB dongle for the Runtime CX Supervisor PLUS Where features additional to the Machine Edition are required These projects require a PLUS USB dongle for the Runtime Fore Maotine Eaton ps CI O E CI IN O IO IN AE Animations Max no Devices PLCs a etc Max user defined Points user defined Points 500 r kaiaia Regular Interval r A Scripts Miro Pages OOO Supported Databases MS Access SQL ODBC MS Access MS Excel dBase CSV 79 Creating a Project 6 3 6 6 80 Note SECTION 6 Projects When the limits shown are reached no more of those objects can be created Remember that although either target can be chosen easily you must purchase the correct USB Dongle in order to run The CX Supervisor Runtime no longer recogni
74. nes decos uan 35 ADOUL Ine OM EA do a cal 35 VIEWING Points in the Point Editada aaa 35 3 3 1 Filtering the Points in the View by Group cccoccccccccncccccncccncnnnoncnnnoncncnnonnnonnnnnnonnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnonons 36 3 3 2 Filtering the Points in the View by Point Type ooccccocnccccnccccncoccnconcnononoconononnnonanncnanncnnnnnnos 36 3 3 3 Sorting the Points in the View by I O Typ oocccccoccnncccccnccoccnccocccnnonnncononcnononcnnnonnnononnnononennns 36 3 3 4 Sorting the Points in the View ta ba 36 3 3 5 Changing the Viewing MODE coooccccoccccccoccncccnccoconcnononnnconnnnnonncnononnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnonnnnonanenes 36 3 3 6 Summary of Point Into Malo id 36 3 3 7 Drag and Drop of Points onto Control Objects oocccccooccnncccnnccncnnooncnnnnnnconncnnanennnnnaronnnnnos 37 CPE AUMNG a ROMs a OS 38 3 471 General AMADA oca 38 A e A 38 429 POMEA RADIOS AAA A A a 38 A An 39 34 5 Memor AMIDES tt rd 40 246 MOIE Rasta dia 40 347 WO AMM DUES ara a aus a aa 40 3 4 8 APLO 271 10 id 41 3 4 9 Data Transfer Actions When Opening a PLC ooccccccnccccccccccnncccnoncncconnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnannnnononcnnncnnos 42 324 10 Conversion ANIMES seo 42 341 Advanced POMO St o o idol 42 Amending an Existing POINT ccccccccccseeceeseeeeceeeeeseeeesseeeeessueeesaeeeeseeeesseeessaeeessaeeesegeeessuseessaeeeeas 43 Deleting Anm EXISTO ROM ANA A AAA 43 Quek creation ol many DOMS tad iia 44 RUNTIME Point Maintenant isren
75. object becomes active in the Object left most field An object within the current page can be selected from the Object field The Runtime Actions list is dependant on the object selected from this box The Object field is disabled for Page or Project actions Individual listed Runtime Actions are sorted based on a designated field type either Runtime Actions or Trigger Event Expression By clicking on the Runtime Actions button the points are sorted alphanumerically by Runtime Actions The Trigger Event Expression button once selected reacts in the same way The Animation Editor dialog box shows the actions associated with Polygon_1 sorted in runtime action order The typeface of the editor can be amended by selecting Preferences from the File menu This is especially useful when printing Tigger The widths of the animation fields can be widened or narrowed as required using the mouse to drag the column boundaries 126 Animation Editor SECTION 9 Animation Note 9 2 1 View Mode 9 2 2 Project 9 2 3 Page A new action can be added to the list of current actions by clicking the F button in the toolbar An existing action can be removed from the current actions by clicking the Delete Action button in the toolbar whereupon a confirmation dialog box opens Click the OK button to delete the action or click the Cancel button to abort the delete operation An existing action can be modified from the cu
76. of Title 21 of the Code of Federal Regulations CFR CX Supervisor supports compliance with CFR requirements by allowing generation of Audit Trail events and reporting those selected events as database records A CX Supervisor Audit Trail event can be one of three different types e A CX Supervisor Point An Audit Trail event is triggered by a change in value of a CX Supervisor point e A CX Supervisor Alarm An Audit Trail event is triggered by a change in state of a CX Supervisor alarm e A CX Supervisor Event or Error An Audit Trail event is triggered by any event error that is reported into the CX Supervisor Event Error Log An Audit Trail project may be configured to record any of these events individually or in combination When configured to generate an Audit Trail CX Supervisor will automatically create an Audit Trail database file including 4 database tables One table each for Points Alarms Events and Errors When configured to create Audit Trail records CX Supervisor runtime will add a record into the Audit Trail database tables as each Audit Trail event condition is triggered 13 2 Supported Databases CX Supervisor supports two types of database for Audit Trails e Microsoft Access mdb database files SQL Server 13 3 CX Supervisor Runtime User and Audit Trail UserID Each record logged into the Audit Trail database tables includes a UserID property The UserID is always the currently logged
77. of the database is that the DSN file remains unchanged while its contents can be re configured to reflect any changes in directory or database file name etc 12 2 5 1 Creating a New DSN For Windows 98 ME and NT From your Windows Control Panel select the ODBC Data Sources icon This will show the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box For Windows 2000 and XP From the Programs folder select Administrative tools and Data Sources ODBC icon note this is only available if the logged in user has administrative rights and the Taskbar properties Display Administrative Tools option is checked This will show the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box Click the File DSN tab Any Data Source Names already defined are listed Click on Add to create a new Data Source Name file This will invoke the Create New Data Source dialog box with a list of available drivers only drivers that are installed on your machine will be shown Choose the driver to access the data source and select Next gt You will then be prompted to name your Data Source Type a suitable name and select Next gt Verify the information shown and select Finish to complete this part of the operation Depending on the driver selected you may be prompted for details of the database you wish to connect to A new DSN file will now exist which can be used by CX Supervisor to Create a Connection 185 Configuring a Connection SECTION 12 Da
78. of the object or centrally to the object by selecting the appropriate Justification setting To abort the Resize Height definition click the Cancel button By clicking the Browse button a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions When completed click the OK button If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message opens 9 3 10 Horizontal Percentage Fill Closed objects can be flood filled along a horizontal axis This can be specified via the Percentage Fill Horizontal dialog box To access the Percentage Fill Horizontal dialog box to add an action select Percentage Fill Horizontal from the animation list and click the Add Action button To access the Percentage Fill Horizontal dialog box to modify an action select Percentage Fill Horizontal from the animation list and click the Modify Action button Refer to chapter 9 Objects for a list of the objects to which this action is applicable On selection of the Percentage Fill Horizontal action the Percentage Fill Horizontal dialog box opens Percentage Fill Horizontal Expression ctrre Expression Range Required Percentage Fill Minimum Value lo 2 Filed lo Masaru ale 1100 Filed fioo Fa Diector f Left to Right C Right to Left To define the animation an expression consisting of a number of operators and operands which may be based on the status of a point must be entered in t
79. on an option from the appropriate field To select an Expression Attribute click the Browse button and select a point from the displayed list The Select Required Item dialog box opens click the OK button to accept the point or click the Cancel button to leave the point unselected Clicking the Add Point button allows a new point to be created prior to association with the Gauge Wizard An existing point can also be Creating and Editing Control Objects SECTION 4 Objects 4 4 5 Pushbutton 4 4 6 Rotary Gauge associated with the Gauge Wizard by dragging a point directly from the Point Editor Refer to chapter 3 Points regarding adding a new point and dragging from the Point Editor To enter gauge values or display units type over the existing field entries The Gauge can be displayed in linear or rotary format either with or without ticks The text font used for the gauge title can be changed via the Title Font button The text font used for the gauge scale can be changed via the Scale Font button The font size used by the gauge can be automatically calculated for the user by selecting the Auto Size Fonts field Exit the Gauge Wizard by clicking the OK button to accept the new gauge attributes or click the Cancel button to leave the gauge unchanged Pushbuttons provide a simple means to start a set of actions Click the 4 button then click or click and drag on the page to insert a button To edit the button double click on it T
80. opens Close Page OK Cancel Available Pages Pages to be Closed BALLDIE BALLHELP BALL ELL lt Remove To specify a page for removal select a page from the Available Pages list and click the Add button The page now appears in the Pages to be Closed list Multiple pages can be selected for removal If a selected page for removal is no longer required for that purpose select the page from the Pages to be Closed list and click the Remove button When completed click the OK button To abort the Close Page edit click the Cancel button Runtime Actions SECTION 9 Animation 9 3 14 Blink Objects can be animated so that they blink This is achieved using the Blink dialog box To access the Blink dialog box to add an action select Blink from the animation list and click the Add Action button To access Blink dialog box to modify an action select Blink from the animation list and click the Modify Action button Refer to chapter 9 Objects for a list of the objects to which this action is applicable On selection of the Blink action the Blink dialog box opens Digital Expression o Cancel Colour Attributes Browse Blink Colour MN Enter a Boolean expression in the Digital Expression field Arithmetic logical and relational expressions may also be entered as long as the result of the expression is zero or non zero i e the result equates to TRUE or FALSE W
81. overwrite to replace old point settings simple delete not Cut the old points from the Point Editor before pasting All pasted points will pasted into the group on view 3 8 Runtime Point Maintenance It is possible to reconfigure points at runtime via the right mouse button floating menu option Points Maintenance The Point Maintenance dialog box opens Point Maintenance Point Mame op Filter Options All v Point Values Tert M Boolean le Integer Continuous Monitoring e Peal Get Value Cet alue 4 Text Diagnostics To monitor and change the value of a point in runtime select a point from the Point Name field The Filter Options field and settings refines the points listed in the Point Name field Select the Get Value button to retrieve the current value of the selected point Specify a new point value in the Point Value Text field and click the Set Value button The Diagnostics button shows details including communications statistics useful for diagnosing communication problems Note this button is only available when a user with Designer privileges is logged in Select the Close button to complete the operation 3 9 Optimisation of PLC Communications PLC communication speeds can be increased by creating array points which contain several elements of the same type rather than creating a large number of individual points For instance the time taken to update an array point containing 50 e
82. prevent the project directory from becoming cluttered with data files For example if the CX Supervisor project is in a directory called CACX Supervisor Project then when the project runs for the first time a new directory called C CX Supervisor Project Data Logging will be created to hold the data log files 11 3 1 2 Data Logging Files Each Data Set has its own set of files The following conventions have been adopted in order to identify the various files and add time and date information Data Log files are assigned the file extension dlv Data Log Values and the format of the filename is lt Data Set Name gt lt Time Stamp gt dlv The Time Stamp is in the format YYYY MM DD HH where YYYY Year in the form 1999 MM Month in the form 01 January DD Day of the month in the form 01 31 HH Hours in the form 00 23 Daylight time saving is automatic For example Data Set 1 Miller 1999012015 dlv A new log file is automatically created when the preceding file has expired the timestamp The timestamp is also used to distinguish between files in the same Data Set The time period for each file is determined by the options selected when the Data Set was created The minimum time period for a Data Set file is one hour commencing on the hour Note Do not rename any log files while they are in the Data Logging directory or the File Management System will not work correctly The File Management system relies on the strict
83. same location even if the object moves To abort the Rotate edit click the Cancel button By clicking the Browse button a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions completed click the OK button If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message opens Objects can be rendered visible or invisible Specify this using the Visibility dialog box To access the Visibility dialog box to add an action select Visibility from the animation list and click the Add Action button To access the Visibility dialog box to modify an action select Visibility from the animation list and click the Modify Action button For a list of the objects to which this action is applicable refer to chapter 9 Objects On execution of the Visibility action the Visibility dialog box opens Runtime Actions SECTION 9 Animation A x Cancel Winbdiy Slate a Brows f inibe whe TRUE Visible while FALSE Visible whie TRUE Invisible while FALSE To specify a change in an objects visibility enter a Boolean expression in the Digital Expression field Non Boolean expressions may be entered as long as the result is TRUE or FALSE Whether the object is rendered visible or invisible when the expression is TRUE is specified with the Visibility State settings To abort the Visibility edit click the Cancel button By clicking the Browse button a point may be directly specified a
84. scripting engine supplied by Microsoft to run VBScript or JScript See http msdn microsoft com scripting 329 Appendix G Glossary of Terms Wizard Wizards are dialogs used by the CX Supervisor development environment to take the user through complex operations in a simplified step by step process 330 Revision history Revision history A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual Cat No W10E EN 01 The following table lists the changes made to the manual during each revision The page numbers of a revision refer to the previous version Revision Revised content code First version in the standard Omron format 331 Revision history 332 OMRON Authorized Distributor Cat No W10E EN 01 Note Specif cations subject to change without notice Printed in Europe
85. steps just once However if further development is required repeat these steps and use a development tool like WinGrep Visual Sourcesafe or other version control software which should easily show the changes that have been made 2 Export the user defined text by selecting menu Project Create User Language File This will create a file in the project directory called default udt 3 Copy this file for as many translations as are required Name each copy lt language gt udt using exactly the same text particularly the accents as appears in the Language Settings dialog If the filename prefix is not exactly the same the file will not be loaded The format of these files is development text translated text optional object ID The object ID e g Text_1 is optional but can be supplied if specific text requires different translations for different objects For example Run in English could be used as a verb on a button and as static text for a run number In this case different translations can be supplied depending on the object 4 Get these files translated An editor like Notepad can be used to enter the translated text in the second column i e in between the quotes after the first comma 5 Copy the translated files back to the application directory The runtime should now automatically use these files Titles of pages cannot be translated If necessary the page title can be hidden in the Page Properties dialog and cus
86. superior products and solutions to maintain their customers Besides freedom of choice the user also has vendor independence or freedom from a proprietary lock If the implemented control system is comprised of modules with proprietary interfaces any customer who desires to upgrade any component function of the integrated whole is entirely dependent on the vendor With OPC components only the module of interest must be upgraded and not the entire system The requirement to use the original vendor is eliminated High priced proprietary solutions and their expensive after sale support contracts will yield to lower cost OPC enabled alternatives 17 1 3 4 Time Reduction through Lower System Integration Costs OPC eliminates the need for costly custom software integration OPC provides plug and play software and hardware components from a variety of automation software device and system suppliers Process and manufacturing companies can easily integrate applications into corporate wide automation and business systems something that has been virtually unachievable in the past OPC compatible components greatly reduce system integration costs because all software and hardware components adhere to a single standard interface that s being adopted around the world Automation suppliers are providing hardware devices with integrated OPC servers that are replacing proprietary device driver software The driver connection between hardware and software
87. the lt Shift gt key down while clicking The buttons can then be used to apply to all the selected lines at the same time Printing from the Project Editor Print Setup Print Preview Printing The Project Editor can be printed in the same way pages can Before printing ensure that the printer has been set up correctly To check the printer settings refer to chapter 2 Pages To preview the page before printing ensure that the Project Editor dialog box opens and currently selected and then select Print Preview from the File menu Refer to chapter 2 Pages regarding the use of the Print Preview display To print the contents of the Project Editor select the button Refer to chapter 2 Pages regarding the use of the Print dialog box Navigating Pages using Workbook mode Open pages can be easily viewed with the page Workbook tabs shown at the bottom of the Pages area There is a tab for each page currently open and a single click shows the selected page The Workbook mode can be turned off and on from the View menu Using Full Screen mode With many windows docked there may be times when all graphics objects or the screen layout of the whole application cannot be seen Selecting Full Screen from the View menu shows the Pages area using the full area of the screen The normal menu appears when the mouse is at the top of the screen or click the Close Full Screen to revert to normal editing Overview SECTION 7 Graphics Li
88. the Audit Trail database files 2 f Log Erors E vents into the Audit Trail database files No changes to the default state are required to enable the points Audit trail logging function of the test project 13 4 4 Default Connection String Clicking the Setup button on the Audit Trail Configuration dialog launches the Audit Database Setup dialog In this dialog the connection sting can be viewed and edited For the default Microsoft Access database a default connection string is provided Audit Database Setup Cancel Connection String Provider MicrasotLJET OLEDE 4 0 Build Connection String 204 Creating Running a CFR Application Microsoft Access SECTION 13 CFR Title 21 The Connection String may be modified as required pressing the Build Connection String button will return the string to its default state Press Ok to save your modifications For further information about connection strings refer to the section Configuring the Connection String below 13 4 5 Logged In User Before starting an audit trail it is recommended that there is a user logged in The current CX Supervisor user logged in has the user identity will be saved in the audit trail records If no user is logged in when a record is created then User Unknown is reported for the user identity 13 4 6 Starting and Stopping an Audit Trail The Audit Trail has to be started before any records are logged into
89. the procedures associated with the creation amendment and removal of alarms using the Alarm Editing facility The use of alarms during the running of a project is also described 8 1 What is an Alarm Alarms provide notification of a problem during the execution of an application in runtime Alarms are defined in the development environment and monitored in the runtime environment Alarms range from incidental to catastrophic in nature In runtime the occurrence of an alarm condition and any subsequent change of state is recorded in a log file known as the Alarm History log An operator is alerted to an alarm condition by means of an Alarm Acknowledge dialog box which may also be accompanied by a warning sound A list of current alarms is also maintained Individual alarms are defined in the development environment using the Alarm Editor General alarm settings are controlled in the development environment using the Alarm Settings dialog box The Alarm Object refer to chapter 4 Objects is a graphical object which can be configured to display alarm messages for certain groups of alarms and thus provides a convenient way of filtering alarm messages Alarm definitions are made and modified using the Alarm Editor To use the Alarm Editor CX Supervisor must currently have a project open If no project is currently open either select Open Project from the Project menu to open a previously saved project or select New Project from the P
90. to CSV or Text files is slightly different from an actual Database connection Only the Directory that contains the required files should be supplied as a Data Source if a file is selected the connection will fail The actual file to be used is specified later when configuring the Recordset For example if a collection of text or csv files are contained in the directory C Text then a valid connection Data Source is C Text Note Connections to CSV or Text files using the Provider installed with ADO version 2 0 are read only Records can not be added or amended To create a read write connection to a CSV or Text file see chapter 12 Creating a Read Write connection to CSV Text file Note Connections to Excel files using the Provider installed with ADO version 2 0 are read only Records can not be added or amended To create a read write connection to an Excel file see chapter 12 Creating a Read Write connection to an Excel file Configuring a Connection SECTION 12 Databases 12 2 1 3 Connect on Application Start up The checkbox Connect on Application Start up provides the option of automatically connecting to the Database when the Runtime application is started 12 2 1 4 Advanced Shows the Connection String dialog box allowing the automatically generated connection string to be manually edited 12 2 2 Testing Connections in the Development Environment A connection to a Database can be made in the Development Environm
91. to break apart the image and animate it s sub parts See Metafile Conversion to CX Supervisor Objects for further details Sharing Graphic Libraries Graphic Libraries including the default Graphic Libraries can be shared by other users at other PCs running CX Supervisor Each library has its own MAT file e g PANELS MAT for the panels library The MAT files reside in the same directory as the CX Supervisor application Using file utilities on the PC it is possible to copy one or more MAT files onto a diskette or a network and transfer them to a CX Supervisor directory on another PC Consult the Microsoft Windows User Guide for details on copying files Printing the Graphics Library The Graphics Library can be printed in the same way pages can Before printing ensure that the printer has been set up correctly To check the printer settings refer to chapter 2 Pages Print Preview To preview the page before printing select Print Preview from the File menu Refer to chapter 2 Pages regarding the use of the Print Preview dialog box Printing the Graphics Library SECTION 7 Graphics Library 7 4 2 Printing To print the contents of the Graphics Library select the button Refer to chapter 2 Pages regarding the use of the Print dialog box 113 Printing the Graphics Library SECTION 7 Graphics Library 114 What is an Alarm SECTION 8 Alarms SECTION 8 Alarms This chapter describes CX Supervisor alarms and
92. to recompile are not saved This means that it will still be possible to build and run the application after a Rebuild All has been carried out if it was possible to build it and run it before the Rebuild All operation Note the rebuild all recommended warning message can be disabled via the Editing Preferences dialog box Due to a change of syntax in a previous release of CX Supervisor the Display and Close script functions CX Supervisor Script will NOT compile if they use the old syntax e g Display Page They must be changed to the new syntax e g Display Page If an application with these issues is not recompiled then it will continue to run correctly in the Runtime 6 12 2 Running a Project To run the current project click the button This will automatically build the project if required 101 Running a Project with CX Simulator SECTION 6 Projects The CX Supervisor runtime environment starts and automatically runs the project in a separate dialog box which is given the name of the project It allows examination of project alarm details and the run history 6 13 Running a Project with CX Simulator How to use Integrated Simulation The Run with Simulator option enables you to test CX Supervisor applications without the need for the configured devices to be physically connected 1 Click Run With Simulator from the Project menu 2 Select the device to be simulated 3 Select the CX Pro
93. update rates Drawing SECTION 20 Best Practices 20 4 Drawing CX Supervisor only allows update rates in standard groups which allows a greater chance for CX Server to optimise reads together Old projects may still be using non standard update rate and are best changed to the standard rates Use few update rates Even when using the standard update rates use as few different update rates as possible ideally 5 or less different rates Try to use the same update rates for the same areas of PLC memory so optimisations can occur Use sensible update rates Aim to keep update rates low 5 seconds or 1 second updates should suffice If faster than 1 second updates are needed always question Why If fast update rates are required pay special attention to consider if they can be disabled when not required Use Copy Paste to Excel for bulk editing During development the point editor supports Copying and Pasting in textual format so Excel s powerful editing formulas can be used to create definitions for points This can allow thousands of consecutive points to be created in seconds Use lt Shift gt and lt Ctrl gt to select multiple points for editing During development using lt Shift gt and lt Ctrl gt while selecting can be useful to apply the same changes to many points Use Hungarian notation Improve readability and maintenance by defining and using a standard naming convention For example Hungarian notation where v
94. validation script would not have been completed and appropriate action taken at the time that user input is requested Instead if a message box is required then a point should be used as an error status value and set to an appropriate value This point can then be checked in an on condition script and the appropriate message displayed from there If the validation code exits normally the recipe is downloaded in the normal way 10 5 Updating an Existing Recipe Open the Recipe Editor dialog box as described in chapter 10 Viewing Recipes in the Recipe Editor To modify an existing recipe highlight the recipe entry from the recipe list and click the button This results in the Modify Recipe dialog box being displayed a dialog box based on the Add Recipe dialog box as shown below 157 Copying an Existing Recipe Definition SECTION 10 Recipes Moses noppa Configuration Attributes Recipe Name Cottee lrsty Cancel Description Validation Makes smooth creamy Irish style coffee Validate Recipe Before Download Recipe Ingredients Ingrecient Name Linkedto Point Cuantiy Expressi n E citable rill rn MR re Da Scenes a coltee g coffee 10 Yes sugall gl suga 30 Yes veered ral water 50 Yes cream mil cream 50 Tes whiskeyimi whiskey 100 Yes The selected recipe can be redefined as described in chapter 10 Creating a New Recipe The Modify Ingredient
95. while others may allow access via a button Refer to chapter 6 Projects or chapter 9 Animation as appropriate The Current Alarms dialog box is as follows fej Current Alarms There are no existing alarm conditions The Current Alarm dialog box always shows the alarm messages listed in order with the highest priority at the top The widths of the alarm fields can be widened or narrowed as required using the mouse to drag the column boundaries The xi button acknowledges the alarm which is currently highlighted in the alarm status dialog box This has no effect if the alarm has already been acknowledged The Al button unconditionally acknowledges all outstanding alarms Any unacknowledged alarms become acknowledged This has no effect on alarms that are already acknowledged The S button causes the messages in the alarm status dialog box to be printed Before printing ensure that the printer has been set up correctly 123 Alarm Reporting In Runtime SECTION 8 Alarms 8 9 3 Alarm History 124 The occurrence of an alarm condition and any subsequent change of state is recorded in the alarm history log Alarm messages recorded in the log can be displayed using the Alarm History dialog box The Alarm History dialog box can be accessed in a variety of ways and is dependant on the setup of the runtime application Some applications may allow access to the dialog box via the context sensitive floating menu while oth
96. writing this conversion as ladder in the PLC hardware rather than in CX Supervisor software This is particularly true if this conversion has to occur on several pages where the value is used or before data logging This ensures the converted value is always available and results in a simplified solution Perform all timing functions and pulse generation from PLC ladder The PLC hardware has far superior timing and accuracy than Windows can provide When timing a process or event always use the PLC The stored result can then be read by the SCADA at its leisure If creating a pulse of fixed duration never attempt to design the SCADA to set a bit wait and clear the bit Instead allow the SCADA to set the bit but use the PLC program to clear the bit after the required time Operation should continue if the SCADA is unplugged In a well designed system normal operation can continue even if the SCADA is unplugged Some functions like data logging batch control and control obviously will not be available but the system should be able to continue with its task until completion That is the process should not rely on co operation between the SCADA and PLC because of the possibility of failure e g of the power supply PC components or operating system Ensure the PLC has hardware failsafes In situations where the system can cause damage e g to itself the materials or people it is essential to ensure the PLC has suitable safeguards and failsaf
97. 0 00 100 00 30 00 of CVM1 Performance 0 00 COM1H C200HX 140 00 120 00 100 00 80 00 60 00 40 00 20 00 Y of CVM1 Performance 0 00 COM1H COM1 C200HA 295 Ye of CVM1 Performance of CVM1 Performance Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions Toolbus 9600 CVM1 CS1H CQM1H COM1 C20DHA Sysmac Net CVM1 C200HA Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions 297 Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions 298 How to diagnose problems Appendix C Troubleshooting Appendix C Troubleshooting The appendix is a guide to troubleshooting and resolving problems Several tools and techniques are discussed to assist troubleshooting and in the case of no success the information required to request support C 1 How to diagnose problems Here are some tips to help diagnose problems e Where you think a problem exists try to create steps to reproduce it see below e Be scientific e Decide what the problem could be and perform a test to prove or disprove the theory e Perform one test at a time e Check the data values are correct in the PLC using the PLC Data Monitor and are correct in CX Supervisor using the Point Maintenance tool e Prove that scripts are executed by popping up message boxes e For speed or responsiveness issues use the Performance Monitor to check the system is not overloaded C 2 Point Maintenance The Point Maintenance dialog box is very useful during troub
98. 10 000 What is the maximum limit of number of serial ports supported It is the maximum that the Windows OS supports and are correctly installed on the PC We have successfully tested eight How do create reports and HTML reports CX Supervisor provides a simple yet powerful report generation facility Using the same Points Substitution format a text based template file may be used to generate a report Good formats are TXT RTF and HTML Binary formats like Word DOC can be problematic although RTF can usually be used in these cases These generated files may then be viewed or distributed using a file server or web server Note that although information may be textual or graphical in nature these reports are intended for non real time output of data only and not for monitoring or control See documentation for GenerateReport script function for more information and the Coffee Tutorial Step 12 in the CX Supervisor Getting Started Manual See gt How do make an HIML report update and refresh automatically How do make an HTML report update and refresh automatically CX Supervisor supports the generation of dynamic text and HTML reports from a static template see GenerateReport script function for details However Web Browsers views all pages as static pages There is a very simple HTML trick that will force the browser to reload or Refresh the HTML report that would then show any updates assuming
99. 10 22 UAM A Sd iaa 90 PRuUn UME SECU Aaa a ds 98 6 ti 1 Conig red US SS ue ica 98 6 11 2 Linking CX Supervisor Users With Windows Users ooooccccooncccconoccccccncconnnnnccnnononncncnnnnons 100 6 13 Ment OBlON ACCESS Leve Sun a N visite te 100 e E EENE POC COMARES caecenneea E 101 Gombpliiag a a Running a Pr Etica UR het hes BAR ae iecbee den eae 101 6712 1 BUICIA ia Proj Ct sursson a 101 6712 2 Running A Pro ii rE a a 101 RUnMNI a Project WIth CX SIMUAlO iea AS 102 6 13 1 Requirements and Limitations oooncccconnncncccnnccnnnncnnnnnnnonnnononnnonnnnnnnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnrnnnnas 102 S VE RUNNUM AS ci E ii la 102 Create R ntme Install DisiGonssn a lis 103 POSSE NITONIMM AON wesc ies tds ct tava dna lee laa ala od 103 Gel A aces oa set dace a A aI nea sale ee eae 104 Gl RING A A 104 619 QUIPULWIINO O Wero aii 105 6 20 Navigating Projects with the WorksSpace c oonncccionncnonccncconcconacncnnonorononnnncncnnnnnrnnnonnannrnnnnnrannnnanannnss 105 02l A A R E 106 6 21 1 About the Project EdItOF coooonncccconnconcconnncccnnnccnncnnnnoncnonnnnnnonnnnnnnnonnrnnnnnnnnnnrnonarncnnnnncnnns 106 6 21 2 Viewing the Contents of a Project cccccccoonnnccnnccononcnoncccnnnacononononononnnnnonnnrcnnnnnnnnarenconnnananess 106 6 21 3 Opening a Page via the Project Editor coooccnccccccnncoconnnnccoononnnconnnnnnnnnnnnnonanonnnonononnos 107 6 21 4 Adding Pages to a Project A A a Se 107
100. 9999 Default Value o The minimum threshold for the point is inserted into the Minimum Value field The maximum threshold for the point is inserted into the Maximum Value field The default value is inserted in the Default Value field Note Real points are limited to 1 7E 308 to a precision of 15 digits For a Text point the following attribute opens Point Type C Boolean Integer Pont Types r Point tinbutes C Boolean Text C Integer A C Real Text Text is entered in the Text field Note Memory Text points can have 32768 characters but PLC I O Text Points are limited to 1024 characters The I O type states the scope of the point i e whether it is purely an internal variable or whether it communicates with a PLC 39 Creating a Point SECTION 3 Points AO Type f Memon Resident Input C Output C npu 0utput e A Memory Resident point is provided internally by CX Supervisor e An Input point receives data from an external device e An Output point sends data to an external device e An Input Output point both sends data to and receives data from an external device 3 4 5 Memory Attributes The Array Size field allows Memory Point arrays to be created If an Array Size of 1 is specified a single point is created Specifying any other value creates an array of points of this type This option is only available to Memory Resident points Memon Attri
101. Angle 120 je Duplay Major Ticka M Display Uris on Outside P 20 Frame The Wizard allows entry in the Gauge Style Configuration Attributes Style Attributes and Style Specific Attributes fields To select a style click on an entry in the Gauge Style field To select an Expression Attribute click the Browse button and select a point from the displayed list The Select Required Item dialog box opens click the OK button to accept the point or click the Cancel button to leave the point unselected Clicking the Add Point button allows a new point to be created prior to association with the Wizard An existing point can also be associated with the Wizard by dragging a point directly from the Point Editor Refer to chapter 3 Points regarding adding a new point and dragging from the Point Editor To enter gauge values or display units type over the existing field entries Enter display angles by typing over the existing field entries Check the boxes to choose the required style attributes The Gauge can be displayed in linear or rotary format either with or without ticks The text font used for the gauge title can be changed via the Title Font button The text font used for the gauge scale can be changed via the Scale Font button The font size used by the gauge can be automatically calculated for the user by selecting the Auto Font Size option Exit the Wizard by clicking the OK button to accept the new gauge attributes or click the Canc
102. CTION 9 Animation 9 3 4 1 Points A point may be inserted into the script code in a number of ways e Clicking the Browse button picking the point off the list and clicking the OK button e Typing the name of the point system points form part of the points list 9 3 4 2 Undo Last Action The last edit performed can be undone if required in a number of ways e Selecting Undo from the Edit menu e Pressing lt Ctrl gt Z in the script code text field 9 3 4 3 Cut to Clipboard An area of script code can be moved to the Microsoft Windows Clipboard in a number of ways e Selecting the script code to cut followed by Cut from the Edit menu e Selecting the script code to cut in the script code text field and pressing lt Ctrl gt X 9 3 4 4 Copy to Clipboard An area of script code can be copied to the Clipboard if required in a number of ways e Selecting the script code to copy followed by Copy from the Edit menu e Selecting the script code to copy from the script code text field and pressing lt Ctrl gt C 9 3 4 5 Paste from Clipboard An area of script code can be copied from the Clipboard if required in a number of ways e Placing the l beam cursor at the desired point in the script code field followed by Paste from the Edit menu e Placing the l beam cursor at the desired point in the script code field and then pressing lt Ctrl gt V 9 3 4 6 Insert Tab Code A tab character can be inserted into the script
103. CX Supervisor Software Release 3 1 User Manual Trademarks and copyrights Notice Note A A Notice OMRON products are manufactured for use by a trained operator and only for the purposes described in this manual The following conventions are used to classify and explain the precautions in this manual Always heed the information provided with them Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product Caution Indicates information that if not heeded could possibly result in minor or relatively serious injury damage to the product or faulty operation Warning Indicates information that if not heeded could possibly result in serious injury or loss of life Trademarks and copyrights Copyright MECHATROLINK is a registered trademark of Yaskawa Corporation Trajexia is a registered trademark of OMRON EtherCAT is a registered trademark of the EtherCAT Technology Group All other product names company names logos or other designations mentioned herein are trademarks of their respective owners Copyright O 2010 OMRON All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means mechanical electronic photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of OMRON No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein
104. Edit Value button and enter the path of the CXSupervisorAudit mdw file as shown below Click OK to save this value and exit the Edit Property Value dialog Edit Property Value Property Description I et ODLEDB System database Property Value IC Omron audit C S upervisonudit dig Reset Value Cancel e Now click OK back on the Data Link Properties dialog If all information has been entered correctly then the following dialog will be displayed Select Table Mame Description Modified Created E Alarms 9 28 2010 2 52 43 PM 9 28 2010 2 52 43 PM Errors 9 28 2010 2 52 43 PM 9 28 2010 2 52 43 PM Events 9 28 2010 2 52 43 PM 9 28 2010 2 52 43 PM Points 9 28 2010 2 52 43 PM 9 28 2010 2 52 43 PM Sysadmin 282010 2 52 43 PM 9 28 2010 2 52 43 PM all 219 How to Access Information from a CFR Database SECTION 13 CFR Title 21 Part 11 e From this dialog select the required table to be imported and click OK Another dialog will be displayed shown below asking where you would like to put the data Select the desired location and click OK Import Data Where do you want to put the data 2 Existing worksheet New worksheet a Create a PivotTable report e The audit data from the selected table will now be imported into the Excel spreadsheet as shown
105. Editor dialog box Activating the Print Alarm Messages setting causes alarms of this type to be printed automatically when they occur 8 4 2 Alarm Type The alarm type can be Simple Deadband or Rate of Change Select the desired type by clicking on the Simple Deadband or Rate of Change settings This field is visible from the Alarm Editor dialog box 8 4 2 1 Alarm Attributes The attributes for an alarm are defined according to its type as this defines when an alarm reacts Since Simple is the default type the Simple alarm attributes are initially visible For a Simple alarm the following attributes are displayed Alger Type Alar Alirbutes sinok Expression Browse Deeded Biolertemp gt 100 C Rate of Change An expression based on a point is entered in the Expression field The alarm is raised once the point meets the expression The alarm is cleared when the point value subsequently fails to meet the expression For a Deadband alarm the following attributes are displayed Alarm Type Alarm Attributes C Simple Expression Browse Beadband Biolertemp gt 100 8 Deadband 5 x An expression based on a point is entered in the Expression field The alarm is raised once the point meets the expression The alarm is cleared when the point value falls outside the expression value plus the specified deadband percentage For the example above an alarm is raised when the boiler s temperature exceeds 100 an
106. Ensure that the Enable Distributed COM on this computer is checked 271 Configuring a Server PC running Windows XP Service Pack 2 Appendix A Configuring A 4 Configuring a Server PC running Windows XP Service Pack 2 Windows XP Service Pack 2 includes a communications Firewall to protect your computer from malicious communications By default this firewall is turned on and so will block all OPC and DCOM communications 1 2 3 To allow OPC or DCOM communications through the firewall either e Completely disable the firewall as follows Note this can leave your computer vulnerable to attack so consult your computer documentation or IT administrator if you are unsure a Open Control Panel followed by Computers b Right click My Computer and select Security Center c Select Windows Firewall d On the General tab choose option Off e Alternatively on the Exceptions tab you can configure specific programs to permit communications All other required settings are the same as for running standard Windows XP as explained below A 5 Configuring a Server PC running Windows XP l2 ae 1 Start Component Services e g by running DCOMCNFG EXE by selecting RUN from the start button The default location is CAWINDOWSISYSTEM 2 Select Component Services followed by Computers 3 Right click My Computer and select Properties 4 View the Default Properties tab Ensure that the Enable Distributed COM on this computer is checked 5 From th
107. FR Title 21 Part 11 Functionality dialog and in the Additional Information group box enter the names of the two text points in the relevant edit boxes as shown below Audit Trail Configuration Database C SQL Server Setup l Logging Options Specify the destination folder for the Audit Trail database files Folder Additional Intormatiorn tA Audit Trail ID Pont t uditld Browse l Audit Trail Note Point tAuditNote Browse M Log Alarm Information into the Audit Trail database files All Alarms C Selected Alarms using Generate Audit Trail setting i Log Erors E vents into the Audit Trail database files The following screen shot demonsirates a use of these notes E Micrproli a AE Oe Pa IEEE E ee E Points lable Eo d Dain Mine Mane 1 Index PresoveVshve sive Nevoie Used Audis AudiNoie 161146 iBarchStage Operates Batchi23 Sut 7 OOO TEILA BuichStage Operator Baichi23 Processing 3 30 07 2010 161148 BuichStage Cipar tos Batchi23 48 6Pmcesung 4 007 2010 i614 GatchStage Oparatos Baichi23 Processing 5 30072010 161150 Buichstage Oparatos Bamchi23 8 Procening 6 30072010 161151 BatchStage Operator Batchi23 Procesaang PII 161152 iSachStage Operatoe Bakthi Processing 307 2010 161153 iBatchStage Operator Batchi23 Prcesung 9 100706010 161154 Hut halage Operador Batchi23 Processing 10 30 07 2010 16 11 55 Operatu Baichi
108. Horizontal AMAIA did PO PP Percentage fill Horizontal MEN YE ALMA A O AN ace ici so 0 A ON II A group object possesses the animation functions common to all objects within the group The ticks denote whether the animation function is available for the object The blank cells denote the animation function is not available for the object The icons within the table header denote the object created by that icon Refer to chapter 1 Graphics Editor for further details In addition an object can be animated in the form of a script A script is made up of one or more statements An example of object script code is as follows REM Smo SET UP THE COLOQUE FLAGS x Paintblue TRUE paintgreen FALSE paintred FALSE paintpurple FALSE paintyellow FALSE paintwhite FALSE REM 3 OET UP AHE VALVE POSITION Bluevalve TRUE greenvalve FALSE redvalve FALSE Changepaint TRUE L Display page Display Value Analog Display Value Digital Display Value Text Edit point value Analogue Edit point value Digital Edit point value Text Enable Disable AN E 129 Runtime Actions SECTION 9 Animation 9 2 5 9 2 5 1 9 2 5 2 9 3 9 3 1 130 Refer to the Script Language Manual for full details regarding the construction and syntax of script code The script is created by selecting the Execute Script entry in the Animation Editor list Chapter 10 Runtime Actions describes the application of o
109. I resources free SystemResources 0 100 Percentage of system resources free UserResources Integer 0 100 Percentage of user resources free CX Supervisor supports Dynamic Data Exchange DDE which is a method of communication between Windows programs DDE uses messages to exchange data between applications and a protocol to synchronise the passing of data DDE applications fall into four categories client server client server and monitor A client application requests data or services from a server application A server application responds to a client applications requests for data or services Monitor applications can intercept DDE messages but cannot act on them they are therefore useful for debugging purposes CX Supervisor is a client server application which is both a client application and a server application thus requesting and providing information All CX Supervisor DDE data transfers are carried out on points and are asynchronous transfers There are two types of DDE points that can be created namely DDE Client Points and DDE Server Points With DDE Client Points all data transfers or conversations are initiated by CX Supervisor either sending data to or requesting data from external DDE Server Application s For example a CX Supervisor point could be linked to update a cell on a Microsoft Excel worksheet With DDE Server Points all data transfers are initiated by external DDE Client Application s eith
110. ION 12 Databases rs 104 12 1 12 2 12 3 12 4 12 5 12 6 12 7 12 8 12 9 12 10 10 Database Connection Edic 181 Gontigurind a SONAS ers a a a ea N a OOA 182 12 2 1 Add Modify Database connection dialog DOX ocoooccoconncccnccccnnccccnccnnnnnccnncnnnnnnncnncnnnnnancnnnnnns 182 12 2 2 Testing Connections in the Development EnvirONMeNt oocccccocccnncnnncccnnnnnccnnonancnnnnonacinnnnnos 183 1229 Database ENOS nani 183 12 2 4 Database Connection String dialog DOX oooooonncononnccccnnonconcncnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnanenennnos 183 12 2 5 Creating a Data Source Name file ooonnccicccnnnoncccnncnnnnnaconnnnnnnnncnonnnnnnnncronnnononnnennnnnos 185 12 2 6 Creating a Read Write connection to an Excel file cccccconnnncnnnconnnccnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnos 186 12 2 7 Creating a Read Write connection to CSV Textfil8 oooonocconnnnccnnccoconnccccccnncnncnnccnnanccnnnnnos 187 GON URANO ALCA Si de 187 2237 Name iio 187 12 3 2 Recordset Type ccccccccsssececeessecccceeeeeecsausececeeauseeesesecessaugeeessseceessauaeeesseueeesssaueeessenaaes 187 12 059 OMT A cl 188 1234 o is lis 188 Gontiquina Field ASSOCIAUONS sassari AAA 189 zada Name ari aiii aaa 189 rn e a a a 189 12 48 ls dll id 189 12 44 Feld PIO DCINY rt ida 189 Configuring Parameter Associations viii di ii 190 12S INEM 1 PEPE Po a aetes team se eres tana ect ln des acodie ade sae ee ae eaten 191 T202 A E 191 12202 DaT
111. ION 9 Animation 9 3 7 Vertical Move 9 3 8 Resize Width 136 expression reaches the Minimum Value A value within the maximum and minimum values results in a proportionate movement between the left and right positions To abort the Horizontal Move definition click the Cancel button By clicking the Browse button a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions When completed click the OK button If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message opens Objects can be animated by moving either up or down This can be specified via the Move Vertical dialog box To access the Move Vertical dialog box to add an action select Move Vertical from the animation list and click the Add Action button To access the Move Vertical dialog box to modify an action select Move Vertical from the animation list and click the Modify Action button Refer to chapter 9 Objects for a list of the objects to which this action is applicable On selection of the Move Vertical action the Move Vertical dialog box opens Move Vertical E3 Expressior eeen Browse bcte Expression Range Required Position Minimum value 0 Minium Oset 100 Maximum Value 100 Maium Offset 0 To define the animation an expression based on the status of a point must be entered in the Expression field The boundaries in which the object moves are inserted into the Active Expressio
112. Library ODJECIS aid AA 112 7 3 7 Conversion to Individual Page ObjectS ccccoooccccnncccccooncnnnncononanonnnonnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanonos 112 723 8 Sarna Graphic LIDLANCS ad AAA SANA AN 112 7 4 Printing the Grapnics LID Visas tt 112 TAA PAIN e 40 1 LE y OOO RO CO O PE O 112 TAR ENN O a O 113 SECTION 8 Alarms A e o 1 5 8 1 WV ee IS AN Alar toas taa lessees sica isteici te austen cae a e a leia le 115 8 2 Aam Senos einsa II cae ead etal aides ee as ast 115 8 3 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 8 9 Viewing the Contents of the Alarm Database oooonccccccccconncnncnnnnoncnnnnnnnnnncnnnnononnnncnnnnnonanrrnnnnnnnanennos 116 Creating NEWA iana aabet cana tharind stoic ivi uad yale eevi ona tae auanaiaauanns 117 8 4 1 Alarm Header Information ooccccoccccconnncccocnnconnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnns 118 od Alar 119 Updating an Existing Alasin e 121 Copying an Existing Alarm DefinitiON oooccccoccccccccnncconnnccononononnnoconnnonononnnoncnononnnonnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnns 121 Helsing aAmMEXSTAQ ANA AS A AA AAA Ad IO 122 A Galata a EEE 122 e cyte ie he eo en ee ee a eect feed ee ee ce 122 BO A a sh cae cee teamed ene anette Sol A 122 On Ue MMIC ta ote ee ce ae eee ce ea eee 122 Alarm REDONU RONIM rri e AA AAA Nae vetoes lies 122 8 9 1 Alar ACKNOW COG CG dini canela cds adidas 123 8 92 Curent AlS ficial ee Ria a ae ae ene DAS 123 A o E o a 124 SECTION 9 ANIMO Mt MO 9 1 9 2
113. Location Amey Stee o a Data Type Modifier I Communicatons Enabled Data Transfer Actions When Opening a PLC f Write Value To PLC C Read Value From PLC C No Data Transfer Conversion Abbbubes H i E I l i 4 je a The point type associated with the PLC Connection attributes is shown in the title bar The required PLC can be selected from the PLC field If no PLCs exist in the PLC field then one must be added This is achieved by clicking the Add PLC button and configuring one A point cannot be configured to have a PLC connection unless all the PLC connection attributes are correctly configured For more information on adding and configuring PLCs and devices see chapter 6 Projects Device Configuration 3 4 8 PLC Attributes The Data Location field identifies the area of memory to which this address applies and is dependent upon the type and configuration of the PLC The Data Type field identifies the type of data held at this address The type determines how point values are converted from a computer format into a PLC format The field contains options applicable to the Data Location The Modifier field indicates the command to be performed on the data at this address An example of a modifier is for a bit a modifier might declare that a bit is to be forced set and not to be written normally The field contains options applicable to the Data Location 41 Creating a Point SECTION 3 Points
114. M aware applications e g C later versions of Visual Basic without those applications needing to know anything about the internals of the object DCOM is simply the distributed version of COM i e the objects can be spread across a network It is a very powerful system although some machine level and security configuration may be required to allow it to work correctly and reliably Central to the capability of a DCOM object are its interfaces All communication with a DCOM object occurs through its interfaces an interface is said to provide a contract a full and unchanging description for the functionality provided by that object Each interface has a unique ID and describes a group of related methods The description of the interface defines the syntax and the semantics of the services provided by that interface the internal implementation of those services doesn t matter to the calling applications 245 An Overview of OPC SECTION 17 Using CX Supervisor as an OPC Client In the case of OPC these interfaces for each of the DCOM objects are defined within the relevant specifications This guide only deals with the OPC Data Access specification Custom used by C and Automation used by script languages and VB interfaces 17 1 3 2 What are the benefits of OPC Asking what the business benefits of OPC are is like asking what the benefits of plug and play technology are to the computer industry More choices better acce
115. OLUMN_NAME Schema Procedure PROCEDURE CATALOG Parameters PROCEDURE_SCHEMA PROCEDURE_NAME PARAMTER_NAME Schema Procedures PROCEDURE CATALOG PROCEDURE_SCHEMA PROCEDURE_NAME PROCEDURE_TYPE Schema Provider Schema Provider Specific See Remarks See Remarks Schema Provider ci A TYPE BEST_MATCH Schema Referential CONSTRAINT_CATALOG Constraints CONSTRAINT_SCHEMA CONSTRAINT_NAME Schema Schemata CATALOG_NAME SCHEMA_NAME SCHEMA_OWNER Using Transactions SECTION 12 Databases Schema Table CONSTRAINT CATALOG Constraints CONSTRAINT _ SCHEMA CONSTRAINT NAME TABLE_CATALOG TABLE_SCHEMA TABLE_NAME CONSTRAINT _ TYPE Schema Table Privileges TABLE_CATALOG TABLE_SCHEMA TABLE_NAME GRANTOR GRANTEE Schema Tables TABLE_CATALOG TABLE SCHEMA TABLE_NAME TABLE_TYPE Schema Translations TRANSLATION CATALOG TRANSLATION SCHEMA TRANSLATION NAME Schema Usage Privileges OBJECT CATALOG OBJECT SCHEMA OBJECT NAME OBJECT TYPE GRANTOR GRANTEE Schema View Column VIEW_CATALOG Usage VIEW_SCHEMA VIEW_ NAME Schema View Table VIEW CATALOG Usage VIEW_SCHEMA VIEW_NAME Schema Views TABLE_CATALOG TABLE_SCHEMA TABLE_NAME Note The actual schemas are defined by the OLE DB specification and Providers are not required to support all of the OLE DB standard schema queries Specifically only Schema Tables Schema Columns and Schema Provider Types are required by the OLE DB specification However the provider is not required to
116. Page As lf a copy of a page be required for incorporation into another project perhaps select Save Page As from the File menu CX Supervisor displays the File Save As dialog box as described previously After entering a new name for the page CX Supervisor prompts to save the different page into the current project as above Closing a Page To close a page after editing select Close Page from the File menu Alternatively either click the control box for the page located in the top left corner of the page and select Close from the Control menu or simply double click the Control menu and the page closes If you attempt to close a page which has not been saved CX Supervisor displays a confirmation dialog box If you want to save the changes click the Yes button Otherwise click the No button or click the Cancel button to abort closing the page CX Supervisor Preferences CX Supervisor allows a user to customise the working environment To set or amend the CX Supervisor setup select Preferences from the File menu followed by the preference to set up The types of customisation are described in the following paragraphs Startup Preferences The Startup Preferences allows the project last accessed in the previous session of CX Supervisor to be automatically loaded in the next session It is accessible by selecting Startup from the Preferences menu Click in the Load last project on startup setting to switch this preference
117. Palette cies ace ces a 151 SECTION 10 RECIPES ui 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 10 10 Whatis A FOCIDG Arraiana ads 153 ne A o a A a a E EA 153 Viewing Recipes in the Recipe Editor ccccceccccssseeccsseecceeeeceusecceseesscseessageeeseuseessaeeesseseesenagees 153 Creating a New heces dd 154 10 4 1 Recipe Configuration Attributes cccoonccncccconnonoccnnononnnnnnnnonannnnonancnnonnannnnnnnannncnnnncnnnnnanens 155 104 2 RECHE INGreGieniS sisted eee oleae eae eed ls eee 155 10 4 3 Recipe Validation oocccconcccocccnoccononoconncononnnoconnnonnnnnnnnnnononnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnneninananes 156 Updating am Existing Rec A ee reenact ee ee 157 Copying an Existing Recipe Definition o cccccconncnccccnnnncoconnnnnconannnnncnnnonnonnnncnnonnannnnonnnnennnnnnanennnss 158 Deleting an EXISTING REA DO a dais 159 RECI SCOUT AS o e ates 159 PANINO ROCES naa id 159 10 95 PARTIR Meis cos eae nena iaa 159 109 2 FP MINN MUU 0 ORAR PO A Penn a a eaa a 159 Using Recipes FU MNS ass wae at ala ee cat ae ti te aati late a ele trea Dena elie ea aie eas 160 10 105 CCID Ss WIG WER crust i lara 160 t0102 DOWNIO AGING a ING GIDC uscar ate titi iaa 162 10 10 53 UplOadinG a RECIO rca o r 163 SECTION 11 Data LOO GUNG scanners LOO 11 1 11 2 11 5 11 6 Wna e Data EOC cai e a 165 Devel Bole aio ie sr add 165 11 2 1 Configuring Data Sets and Logging SettingS ccccoocncococco
118. Point Editor by selecting the Point Editor option from the Utilities menu or by clicking the button In the Point Editor dialog box click the Add Point button in the toolbar to open the Add Point dialog box In the Add Point dialog box move to the I O Type options and select the Input Output or Input Output option as appropriate Note that the I O Update Rate and I O Attributes options and displayed Inthe I O Attributes options select OPC Other and click the Setup button This will open the Communications Control Attributes dialog box Inthe Communications Control Attributes dialog box enter the appropriate parameters as follows E communications Control Att ibule 5 Communications Control 4thnbutas Communications Control Attributes Server This shows the name of the communications object to connect to the server i e OMRONCXICCommunicationsControl If you wish to use a different object make your selection from the drop down list To Add Modify or Delete an object click the Info button 259 260 Adding a Point Linked to a Parameter SECTION 19 Connecting to Omron Industrial Selecting the Add option will open the Communications Control dialog box From the list of control objects select the one to be added and click the OK button Communications Controls Select a control OMRON Cx Communications Control OMAON Ce IC Communicabore Control OMRON Ce OPC Communicatons Control OMRON E Superaso
119. SECTION 17 Using CX Supervisor as an OPC Client This chapter introduces OPC Server to a new user and explains how to use CX Supervisor as an OPC Client 17 1 An Overview of OPC OPC stands for OLE for Process Control and is a standard published by the OPC Foundation The basic aim of the OPC standard is to allow hardware vendors to produce software drivers called OPC Servers and for software vendors to produce applications called OPC Clients which use a standard method for data interchange This allows software and hardware from different vendors to be used together Based on Microsoft s OLE now ActiveX COM component object model and DCOM distributed component object model technologies OPC consists of a standard set of interfaces properties and methods for use in process control and manufacturing automation applications The ActiveX COM technologies define how individual software components can interact and share data Backed by Microsoft s NT technology OPC provides a common interface for communicating with diverse process control devices regardless of the controlling software or devices in the process The goal of the standard is Plug and Play a concept developed by Microsoft and a number of other companies a few years ago By using a standard way of configuring computer hardware and software interfaces automatically a device will easily connect to another and immediately work without the need for lengthy installation proc
120. Select the Device containing the required item from the dropdown list To Add Modify or Delete a Device click the Info button Items The Items within the selected Device are listed The Item Attributes dialog box can be used to add or edit the items To Add Modify or Delete an Item click the Info button Selecting the Add or Modify option will open the Items Attributes window from where the item details can be added or updated Array Size Enter the number of array elements in the CX Supervisor point that this item should have If not an array enter 1 7 Having checked that all the parameters are correct bring return to the Point Editor window by closing any attributes window that may be open The CX Supervisor Point will now be connected to Device parameter and can be used like all other CX Supervisor points i e to drive animations in alarm expressions in recipes for data logging etc The application can now be run by clicking on the Run Project button in the toolbar 261 Adding a Point Linked to a Parameter SECTION 19 Connecting to Omron Industrial 262 Design SECTION 20 Best Practices 20 1 Design SECTION 20 Best Practices This chapter details the best practices to get the most from CX Supervisor including how to plan and design your application This section covers some good design practices There is no doubt as with everything in life that a good design is essential and creating a good CX Supervisor applicati
121. Supervisor script language expressions are a construct for computing a value from one or more operands For instance in the example lift height rate the expression is height rate where the result yielded from the expression is used for the value of lift 325 326 Field association Graphic Object GUI I O type Icon Ingredient Integer type Item JScript JVM Microsoft Excel Microsoft Windows Microsoft Word for Windows Appendix G Glossary of Terms Outside of the script language expressions consisting of operators and operands can be used to control objects through actions A field association enables a link to be made between a CX Supervisor Point and a particular field i e column within a recordset In CX Supervisor a graphic object is created in the development environment and can be a line an arc a polygon including a square and rectangle a round rectangle an ellipse including a circle or a polyline A complex object can exist as a combination of two or more graphic objects Graphical User Interface Part of a program that interacts with the user and takes full advantage of the graphics displays of computers A GUI employs pull down menus and dialog boxes for ease of use Like all Microsoft Windows based applications CX Supervisor has a GUI Input Output type An attribute of a point that defines the origin and destination of the data for that point The data for a
122. Tab select The Interactive User 5 Select Customize on the Security Tab of the Launch and Activation Permissions section 6 Click Edit and then add the user PCNAME everyone Select Local Launch and Local Activation and then click OK 7 Select Customize on the Security Tab of the Access Permissions section 8 Click Edit and then add the user PCNAME everyone Select Local Access and then click OK Error Pages The Standard Web Pages use a two tier error reporting system Remote users that is someone viewing the web pages from any other machine apart from the one which is running the CX Supervisor runtime see the default error page If you are viewing the web pages on the local host a full error page is shown This page is not shown to remote users for security reasons The standard web pages require version 3 5 or later of the Microsoft NET Framework to be installed on the server the computer running the CX Supervisor runtime application Requirements for the client are simply a relatively modern browser with cookies and JavaScript enabled Development Features SECTION 15 Multilingual Features SECTION 15 Multilingual Features This chapter introduces CX Supervisor s multilingual features to a new user and explains how to develop in and create applications in languages other than the default English for example e How a non English designer can run the development tools in their native language even if they are creating an
123. To alter the colour of the page click in the Demo Page Window area or click the Colour button CX Supervisor displays the Windows Colour Palette dialog box Basic colors EPE See MI FEF EHEHK A E A f EREE EEE EE EEE ee p EEE ml Custom colors N_N N_N MN ef N_N NA MN MN NM Cancel 9 Either select a colour from the palette area or define a custom colour When the desired colour opens click the OK button to return to the Page Properties dialog box 10 Alternatively to display an image or photograph as the background click the Background button and select the desired file and note the Display Background check box is automatically ticked 2 4 Printing a Page 2 4 1 Print Setup Before printing a page ensure that the printer has been set up correctly To check the printer settings select Print Setup from the File menu CX Supervisor displays the Print Setup dialog box in response The current printer selection is defined in the Name control box To alter the settings proceed as follows Prim Setup Status Defaut printer Ready Type AdobePS HP Laserjet 55i Where AiHollyhp_laserjel_Ssirrox Paper Onentation See 24 r lt Portrait A Ay Source AuwtoSelect Tray Landscape a es 29 Printing a Page SECTION 2 Pages 1 2 3 To change the current printer selection 1 Click the Name field and select from the list presented 2 To change the page orientation from por
124. Vertical dialog box opens Percentage Fill Vertical Expressiory OK Active Expression Range Required Percentage Fill Cancel iit Erowsze Minimum ale 2 Filled o o iasimum Male 100 E Filled 100 Fill Direction f Bottom to Top C Top to Bottom To define the animation an expression consisting of a number of operators and operands which may be based on the status of a point must be entered in the Expression field The boundaries in which the object moves are inserted into the Active Expression Range Required Percentage Fill fields The Filled fields specify the percentage of the object to fill when the expression reaches its maximum and minimum values The flood fill also requires a direction This can be specified as top to bottom or bottom to top by selecting the appropriate Fill Direction setting To abort the Vertical Percentage Fill definition click the Cancel button By clicking the Browse button a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions When completed click the OK button If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message opens CX Supervisor allows the specification of pages within a project for display This is set up using the Display Page dialog box To access the Display Page dialog box to add an action select Display Page from the animation list and click the Add Action button To access the Display Pa
125. View the alarm history Event Error Log View the events and errors log Application Restart or replace the running CX Supervisor Application Settings Configure user preferences including page refresh rates and user language 223 Configuration SECTION 14 Standard Web Pages 14 4 Configuration 14 5 Default Port At least 1 of the users configured for a CX Supervisor application must have web access rights in order to log on to the standard web pages To configure web access for a particular user the Allow web access for this user option must be ticked within the Configure Users dialog box This user will then be able to log on to the web pages remotely using their login name and password The default port for the standard web pages is 4140 If this conflicts with another application on your machine it can be changed by running the Standard Web Page Configuration tool 14 6 DCOM Settings To check the DCOM settings follow the steps below 14 7 Error Pages 14 8 Limitations 224 The CX Supervisor runtime and the web server program use Windows DCOM to communicate with each other If there is a problem with the DCOM settings the Standard Web Pages login page will show Unknown project instead of the project name 1 Click Start Run type dcomcnfg and then click OK 2 Expand Component Services Computers DCOM Config 3 Find the entry for scs exe and open its properties dialog box 4 On the Identity
126. Width Minimo Value fo Minima Width lo Hamun Vaker 1100 Hamun Width 180 geese i Let Cente C Right To define the animation an expression consisting of a number of operators and operands which may be based on the status of a point must be entered in the Expression field The boundaries in which the object moves are inserted into the Active Expression Range Required Width fields The Maximum Width specifies the required width in pixels of the object when the result of the expression reaches the Maximum Value The Minimum Width specifies the required width in pixels of the object when the result of the expression reaches the Minimum Value A value within the maximum and minimum values results in a proportionate width between the minimum and maximum widths The resizing also requires an anchor and direction in which to stretch or shrink This can be specified as the left of the object right of the object or centrally to the object by selecting the appropriate Justification setting To abort the Resize Width definition click the Cancel button By clicking the Browse button a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions When completed click the OK button If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message opens 9 3 9 Resize Height Objects can be animated by shrinking or expanding vertically This can be specified via the Resize Height dialog box To access the Re
127. a Network button is added to the dialog box For further information of the function of the Network dialog box refer to the Microsoft Windows User Guide 6 10 2 6 Alarm Message Printer Settings To open the Alarm Message Printer Settings dialog box select Alarm Message Printer Settings from the Runtime Settings menu Alarm Message Pimter Settings penia WHOLLY WHP_LASERJET_SSIMx TASER SSN y 1 2 3 1 Select the target printer in the Printer Name field 2 Ifthe printer type is a Page Printer ensure the Page Printer setting is set ON and the appropriate number of lines per page are specified in the Number of Lines Per Page field 3 Specify a Line Terminator setting either CR Carriage Return LF Line Feed or CR LF 4 Click the OK button to accept the changes or the Cancel button to abort 6 10 2 7 Event Error Messages To open the Event Error Settings dialog box select Event Error Settings from the Runtime Settings menu Event Error Settings 4 High Priority Errors Cancel Medium Priority Errors Low Priority Errors blasimum entries in Event Error Log 200 94 Settings SECTION 6 Projects Set the Maximum entries in Event Error field and the Automatically Display Event Error Log on options as desired Click the OK button to accept the changes or the Cancel button to abort In the runtime environment the Event Error Log dialog box can be displayed at any time
128. a check box Generate Audit Trail Check this box for each point to be audited For the test project apply the setting for the points Audit and rAuditArray Advanced Point Settings OLE Access W Read Only Read write Cancel Non Yolatile IMPORTANT NOTE The use of CX Supervisor I O points is not recommended for audit trail logging since unexpected or spurious results can be observed due to the asynchronous input and output nature of these points 13 4 3 Default Audit Trail Configuration The Audit Trail Configuration dialog is launched from the developer menu under Project Runtime Settings Audit Trail Settings The screen shot below shows the configuration dialog in its default state The basic features defined by the default state are e The default connection is to an Access database file mdb e Point Auditing is always enabled e By default when no destination folder is specified an Audit Trail folder will be created under the project folder 203 Creating Running a CFR Application Microsoft Access SECTION 13 CFR Title 21 e Logging Alarms and Events Errors are disabled by default Audit Trail Configuration Database f SQL Server Logging Uptions Specify the destination folder for the Audit Trail database files Folder se i LLL Additional Information Audit Trail lb Point Browse Audit Trail Note Point Browse Log Alarm information into
129. a dem NOTA DELE deba epiw n mado honig kode lor he Sera do yeni Tip Mordor Moe de al der en kan Depe m HARRAH gie Prog o Mordor para ue lla dera wiles BAC TCI doo obese in k5 FF A CHA Eii n En fa The Translation Tool can also be launched manually from the Start button and the Default UDT for the required project loaded The Translation Tool can be distributed to translators licence free and an installation package can be found on the original CD in the folder Translation Tool The User Defined Text for the application is shown in the first column sorted alphabetically A column is shown for each existing translated UDT file To add new translations click the Add New Language toolbar button and select the required language Now simply select each cell and type the required translation Non translatable text like numbers product names or formatting e g 1 0 Microsoft Windows or can be left blank to use the original translation or Copy and Pasted from other columns When completed exit the Translation Tool and save the changes The User Defined Text will now be loaded when you change languages at Runtime If some development text with translations is changed or corrected the translations will be shown in Red as below as if the Application text is missing Where there are translations for text that is not in the Application Text the whole row is shown in Red To correct this problem either copy the old
130. a points provided they have the same update rate 249 Using CX Supervisor with OPC Servers SECTION 17 Using CX Supervisor as an OPC Note This dialog box cannot be opened until a valid project file exists in which to create the groups Groups Use the Add Edit and Delete buttons to show the Group Attributes dialog box and update the list of groups For identification purposes groups should be given logical names The defaults are Group1 Group2 etc i GROUP ATTRIBUTES Group Alinbules Name Upchste Fister io Seconda E Actes On Shatup Name This is the name of the selected group If you are editing an existing group name or creating a new one the current or default name is overwritten The default name for new groups are Group1 Group2 etc Update Rate This is the rate at which the Items data points in the group will be interrogated and new data entered if it is a readout or read from if it s a control Enter the rate as a numerical value and select the units from the drop down list The minimum value is 100msec the maximum is 99999Sec i e over 27 hours Active On Startup Checking this option will make the Group active when the OPC server is started This means the items contained within will be able to read and write data The default is checked C ITEMS TAB The Items within the selected group are listed Items are data points of information stored in the OPC Server The Item Attributes dialog box can
131. able because it contains no searchable columns to use as a hopeful key 293 294 o D D w i O a o OL o O gt O 2 ES Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions When attempting to pass information to an Excel spreadsheet it the following ODBC Driver Error can occur The query is not updateable because it contains no searchable columns to use as a hopeful key The Excel ODBC driver cannot correctly interpret the data type of a column if the column in the spreadsheet contains both text and numbers If a spreadsheet has been set up with data directly inputted in Excel and an attempting to write new data to the spreadsheet from CX Supervisor this error will occur This is because the ODBC Driver sees different formats in a column To overcome this set up the spreadsheet the data area definition to contain only the column headings Insert Name Define Another problem in this area has been that the format of the data can change from Number to Text i e 333 formats in the cell of the spreadsheet The exact cause of this error is unknown but can be resolved by clearing the cell formats Edit Clear Formats of the spreadsheet that will be receiving the data How does the PLC affect performance for my network type The charts below show how the network type affect the performance depending on the PLC used Ethernet Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions Controller Link 200 00 200 00 15
132. ads per second depending on each PLC and Network used The maximum number of CX Supervisor points depends on the update rates and element sizes For example 1000 reads per second could be 1000 points of 1 element with a 1 second update rate or 200 array points with 5 elements with a 1 second update rate or 20 array points with 5 elements with a 100 millisecond update rate or any combination of variations The figures should be self explanatory but its worth noting that Toolbus is better than twice as good as SYSMAC WAY at the same baud rate and depending on the PLC supports higher baud rates This is a very cheap way to improve performance Note 1 These figures assume best case scenario where data is in contiguous addresses Lesser performance will be achieved as memory areas are fragmented Note 2 These tests stopped at 1000 updates so actual limits are beyond this figure except for CS1H Ethernet and Controller Link Networks which has been tested for 10 000 updates per second T E C LS Lo an i A ra E E gt z E a ai ro 275 Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions CWM 1 V2 CPU2d CV500 V1 CPU21 A Max Num of Raads per Se cone 276 Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions COMIH CPUS1 Max Num of Reads per Second ST SMAC W AY 9600 Toolbus 9600 CO0M a CPUAZ2 Max Num of Reads per Second SYSMAC AW AY 8600 Toolbus 2600 See gt How does the Operating Syste
133. age and maintain so keep this number as low as possible and avoid unnecessary alarms Total DDE Points DDE is an antiquated technology and is prone to problems especially when used with non English characters Any DDE points should be removed and an alternative used instead Total Graphical Objects The total number of objects used on all the pages in the project The more objects that are in the project the slower larger it is on disk and the longer it may take to re draw a page This is especially key when using an IPC where space and power are at a premium Total Memory Points The total number of points that are not on an external device These are the most efficient points as they don t consume network bandwidth Total OPC Other Points The total number of points that are external to CX Supervisor using a comms interface such as OPC or on another CX Supervisor runtime Total Pages This is the total number of pages in your project including pop up pages This is limited in ME so this gives an idea of when you are approaching this limit Too many pages can make a project hard to maintain so this should be kept to a minimum Total PLC Points The total number of points in the application that are on a device Total PLCs The total number of PLCs in this project Any PLCs used on the same network will obviously share bandwidth If there are more PLCs here than you expect check the PLC configuration and make sure you ve no
134. aining servers still function Ciard Apple ations Cicle ary 18 4 Redundant Server Several applications are configured as Servers for direct connection to the same Devices or Device network The same data is collected by all Servers One or more clients can collect the data from any single Server and in the event of a Server failure can be written to switch to data from an alternative Server 254 Creating a CX Supervisor Server application SECTION 18 Connecting to a remote CX Derai Applicant Ait A distributed solution may be any of the above or a combination of the ideas When your topography is defined the steps to connect each Client or Server are the same 18 5 Creating a CX Supervisor Server application A Server application must collect device data and allow clients to access it lt may also have other elements like graphics control or logging To create your application e Create Device points for every data value required by the Server application and any required by any client See Chapter 3 Points for more details e Configure DCOM on the server machine to allow access from the client machines See Appendix A for further details e Add any other elements required by the Server application e g Graphics Control Logging Alarms etc Be sure to note the computer name of the server machine Note A quick way to display the computer name is to right click the Network Neighbourhood ic
135. akal memtine leccmncounameuenets 73 Using the Floating M nu ccccccccccecccccsecceceseecceeececeeeeeseeeeeceuececeeecesaeeeesaaeeeseueeessaeeessueeesseageessaeeeeas 74 SECTION 5 ACUVEX ODIO Sinai LO 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 9 9 6 AO A 75 NSerina a NEW OD CCl seesand ds 75 Editing Properties at Design TIM naaa ais 75 Reading and Writing Properties at RuUntiMe cccoocncccccnnccocnnoconnnononnnonononononnnononnnnnnnnnconnnnonannnnnnnnnnos 76 Calling Methods at Runtime oocccccconnnnccccncnnnccnncnncnnnncnnnnnnnccnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnrnnrnnnnrnrnnnnnannnnoss 77 Responding tO EV CIES nit AAA A A adver Ries 17 SECTION 6 A S ciccone EERE ENERE E a 9 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 12 6 13 6 14 6 15 6 16 A o A ale eatin he 79 RUNUMS CITI ONN Sosa A A as 79 CrealiliGua PFO Sia ii A a 80 Amending a Proe Essenis aid 80 Savingia Pro eii eto A A AA 80 Poning a Pro ells diia 80 Device COMIQUF IO Mardi dirt 81 6 71 Creating a PIG COMMCCUOM i dia 81 6 7 2 Modifying a PLC Connection occcoocnnnccnnccnncconnnncnnnncnnnononnnnonnnncnnonnnnrnnonannnnnnnnnrnnnonanrnnnnnnrnnnnnnas 83 6 7 3 Removing a PLC COMNCCUOM llei iaa 83 6 7 4 Accessing PLC Connection in Runtime occccooccnncccnccnnccnnnnnnonnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnancnnnnnnnonnnnnanennnnnnnnnns 84 Rins Gateway NI A e ee 85 TWA a DECS eno 86 AP A O aaenae dep hese a ewate heer nnsest uate taadeustcara 89 6 10 General Se MIG ai aia 89 6
136. all types wt 091 155 45 vn The Boolean Points button only displays points of a Boolean type The Integer Points button the Real Points button and Text Points button once selected react in the same way 3 3 3 Sorting the Points in the View by I O Type Points can also be filtered by I O type Respectively these buttons display All Points Memory Points Inout Points Output Points or Input Output Points to a 3 3 4 Sorting the Points in the View Individual listed points are sorted based on a designated field type name type input output type or description By clicking on the Name button the points are sorted alphanumerically by name The Type button the I O Type button the Address button and Description button once selected react in the same way In the previous Point Editor example the list is sorted by Name The widths of the point fields can be widened or narrowed as required using the mouse to drag the column boundaries A double click the text boundaries causes the column to autosize 3 3 5 Changing the Viewing Mode Click the E23 button to configure which columns of information are displayed in the Point Editor Click the 2al button to view details with large icons Click the S button to view details with normal icons Click the Es button to view details as a list Select the 3 button to view details as a list including name type I O type address and description information The details c
137. alysis Performance Monitor Inputs Outputs at X This list shows the total number of device points at M Sec each update rate these should be kept to a few well chosen update rates many points on very few update rates that are not more frequent than absolutely necessary Invalid Points Invalid CX These indicate that the cdm file has become Server Point Keys corrupted CX Supervisor auto generates the cdm References to invalid CX file so if this has become corrupted for some Server point keys reason you can close all Omron software and delete the file When you re open CX Supervisor developer the file will be re generated Max Bandwith Used This is the percentage of the network used in the worst case Theoretical max bandwidth scenario This is based on an assumption of bandwidth for the particular network and does not take into account network traffic or other variables Max Bytes Sec This is the theoretical maximum number of bytes per second of updating points this is a better gauge of bandwidth use Max Points Sec Max This is the theoretical maximum number of points Elements Sec that will update each second the higher this number the greater chance of comms problems this value is very dependent on data type though so is not the best reflection on bandwidth use some points are arrays so the element count reflects the number of elements updated per second Again this is independent of data type but when compared wi
138. amended by selecting Preferences from the File menu This is especially useful when printing Note To select a range of points click on a point to mark the start of the range and click again with the lt Shift gt key down to mark the end Note To individually select more than one point click while holding the lt Ctrl gt key down Note The short cut keyboard combinations for Cut Copy and Paste operations are valid within the Point Editor Highlight one or more points and type lt Ctrl gt X to cut or lt Ctrl gt C to copy use lt Ctrl gt V to paste Since the cut and copy operations store the information in the Windows Clipboard points may be pasted to another CX Supervisor application See also Chapter 3 Quick creation of many points Note If the I O type ends with and a number it is an array point with the shown number of elements 3 3 Viewing Points in the Point Editor The Point Editor view of the points database can be tailored by filtering or sorting the available points 35 Viewing Points in the Point Editor SECTION 3 Points 3 3 1 Filtering the Points in the View by Group Points are separated into groups To select a group pick an entry from the Group field All points can be displayed by selecting lt All Groups gt from this list 3 3 2 Filtering the Points in the View by Point Type A selection of points can be displayed based on the point type Selection of the All Points button displays points of
139. an Indicates status of communications O active 1 disabled DiskSpace Integer 0 2 147 483 647 Amount of free disk space available in bytes PCName Text Computer name of PC as seen in Explorer ProjectName Text Name of project file without SCS extension ProjectPath Text Path to project on disk without project name SpoolCount Integer Number of alarm entries currently spooled awaiting printing to page printer Version Version number of CX Supervisor Runtime program 3 11 4 Display Points 3 11 5 Mouse Points 48 The following table describes system points for use with the display mode ScreenSizeX Integer 0 2 147 483 647 Screen width ScreenSizeY 0 2 147 483 647 Screen height The following table describes system points for use in mouse movement and operation They are updated on a left button click System point Point type MouseX Integer 0 65535 Mouse X co ordinates MouseY Integer 0 65535 Mouse Y co ordinates System Points SECTION 3 Points 3 11 6 Alarm Points The following table describes system points for use with CX Supervisor alarms ActiveAlarms Integer 0 2 147 483 647 Number of active alarms AlarmCount Integer 0 2 147 483 647 Total number of alarms HighestAlarms Integer 0 2 147 483 647 Number of active highest priority alarms HighAlarms Integer 0 2 147 483 647 Number of active high priority alarms MediumAlarms Integer 0 2 147 483 647
140. an be sorted in ascending order by clicking once or in descending order by clicking twice in the appropriate field 3 3 6 Summary of Point Information A summary of point information is available by selecting the e button The resultant Point Information dialog box shows an overall summary a breakdown on the number of points per type and the input output type To exit the dialog box click the Close button The Point Information dialog box is shown as follows 36 Viewing Points in the Point Editor SECTION 3 Points Paint Information Pori Sunny Total Portie Total User frefined Pinte Total Pork Groups Number of Boolean Porti Number of Real Panir Number of Test Portir w G s e 401 Type Hunia of Syrtes Ponit Humbe of Menor Renderi Ports Humber of Input Ports Member of Duig Perie Muesber of Input Output Porte 3 3 7 Drag and Drop of Points onto Control Objects The Point Editor can be used to drag and drop points onto control objects For instance Integer points can be dragged from the Point Editor onto a Linear Gauge Rotary Gauge Trend Graph and Slider Boolean points can also be applied to a Toggle 1 2 3 To apply a point to a control object with the Point Editor 1 Arrange the CX Supervisor windows so that the point to drag and the target control object are both visible ppm EFE FEA 37 Creating a Point SECTION 3 Points
141. an independent body must be set up to manage the OPC specification This decision resulted in the formation of the OPC Foundation that has continued to develop the philosophy of standardised interfaces for SCADA In 1998 the Data Access 2 0 specification for OPC was released This addressed several deficiencies and ambiguities in the original standard and included specifications for both the Automation interfaces typically used by VB programmers and Custom interfaces typically used by C programmers In 2000 using these DA 2 0 specifications Omron created the first version of CX Server OPC which provides Client and Server software for the CX Automation Suite software range The current version of Omron s CX Server OPC is compliant with version 2 05 of the Data Access specification 17 1 2 Other OPC Specifications 244 Since the first OPC Data Access specification was produced in 1995 the OPC Foundation have addressed a number of additional areas of control and automation normally associated with SCADA The original specification for Data Access is now just part of a whole series of specifications that include such areas as Alarms Events and Batch control although the DA interface is still far more commonly supported than the others The figure below shows some of the current areas covered by OPC Interface Specifications An Overview of OPC SECTION 17 Using CX Supervisor as an OPC Client OPC Security OPC Common OPC amp
142. ancel button to abort An additional security measure can be applied by selecting Exit Level from the Runtime Security menu The Exit Level dialog box opens Ext Level Security Settings Required Lewel for Est MIE TI The dialog box allows a specific privilege to be applied to exiting the runtime application Select a user privilege from the drop down list and click the OK button to confirm the setting or the Cancel button to abort 6 12 Compiling and Running a Project When a project is running it cannot be edited CX Supervisor runs projects under the CX Supervisor runtime environment 6 12 1 Building a Project 6 12 1 1 Rebuild All To create the CX Supervisor runtime project click the button This compiles the projects and pages into a CX Supervisor runtime file sr2 The Rebuild All option on the Project menu causes the entire application to be re compiled Together with the Analyse Application feature this can be used to validate your project CX Supervisor checks application integrity whenever the application is compiled or run and warns that a full rebuild may be necessary When the Rebuild All operation is carried out all errors and warnings will be reported in the output window and double clicking on a specific error will usually take you directly to the source of that error During a full rebuild all pages that are successfully recompiled will optionally be saved automatically All pages that fail
143. ariable names are prefixed by a type character e g bMyBooleanPoint nMyIntegerNumber txtMyTextPoint or rMyReal Use default optimisations Leave the default communications optimisations turned on In nearly all cases they really do provide the best solution Seek advice if you are considering turning them off Delete unused points After a development phase and prior to deployment delete any unused points These are listed in the Point Editor under the group lt Unused Points gt This section covers some good practices when drawing the screens These can greatly speed up application development and help produce a professional looking system Start new pages with Snap to Grid During the creative phase of any page this helps ensure objects are automatically aligned and sized saving time tidying up later Use cursor keys for fine adjustments The cursor keys move selected objects by 1 pixel or snaps to grid if lt Ctrl gt held and vice versa when Snap to grid is active This is a lot easier than using the mouse Group objects 267 Scripts SECTION 20 Best Practices 20 5 Scripts 268 To make Workspace navigation of objects easy reduce the number of top level objects by collecting objects together into Groups Grouped objects can be nested on other groups in a natural hierarchy e g a machine has several panels that have keypads that have buttons Create object libraries Keep a common look and feel
144. as desired Click the OK button to accept the change or Cancel to abort Editing Preferences The Editing Preferences dialog box provides a number of switches to enhance the use of the Graphics Editor and CX Supervisor animation It is accessed by selecting Editing from the Preferences menu The number of undo operations in the Graphics Editor can be set in the Number of Available Undo Operations field To make the Graphics Editor return to Select Mode after every drawing operation click in the Revert to Select Mode after Drawing Operations setting The use of double clicking on an object can be defined when a check mark is present in the Enter Edit Mode field a double click on an object of that type causes it to enter Edit Mode When a check mark is present in a Display Animation Editor field a double click on an object of that type activates the Animation Editor Click the OK button to accept the changes or the Cancel button to abort CX Supervisor Preferences SECTION 2 Pages 2 6 3 General Preferences General Preferences allow the default script language to be chosen When new scripts are added CX Supervisor will default to saving scripts in the select language 33 CX Supervisor Preferences 34 SECTION 2 Pages What is a Point SECTION 3 Points SECTION 3 Points This chapter describes CX Supervisor points and the procedures associated with the creation amendment and removal of points using the Points Edit
145. ater An example of the Custom Colour dialog box is shown below Palette E ajx Basic colors Sel Bee Mi Sree et en ton a EE EEE Eee EEE Ml Custom colors Bene aan Hue feo Red lo ae man n Sat 240 2 Define Custom Colos ss Colorl5 olid Lum f 20 Blue 255 Cancel Add to Custom Colors Graphic Object bar 1 2 3 Line Style Note Note SECTION 1 Graphics Editor To create an object with a particular line style before selecting the object from the Tool Palette first select the line style by clicking on line style button to drop down the Line Style picker It is not strictly necessary to select a line style for an object before creating it however if no line style selection is made the object retains the default style of thin solid To apply a line style to a previously created object select the object on the page and click on the appropriate line in the Line Style Palette Line styles may only be applied to some graphic objects They cannot be applied to text embedded objects controls or bitmap graphics 1 2 4 Fill Pattern Palette Note Note To create an object with a particular fill pattern before selecting the object s tool from the Tool Palette first select the fill pattern by clicking on Fill Pattern button to drop down the Fill Pattern picker It is not strictly necessary to select a fill pattern for an object before creating it however if n
146. ation This chapter explains how to create DDE Server Points these points are exposed to DDE Client applications either for Read Only or Read Write access In order for a point to take part in a conversation with a DDE Client it must be given DDE Access The following dialog box demonstrates how to give a Real memory point DDE Read Write access A DDE Server point is created as follows 1 Select the Add Point button from the Point Editor toolbar The Add Point dialog box opens 2 Enter a meaningful name for the DDE Server point in the Point Name field 3 Click the Advanced button The Advanced Point Settings dialog box opens DDE Appendix F Obsolete Features Advanced Point Setl Mos OLE Access 4 Read Only ReadAwnte Cancel DDE Access NorrWolatde Al i 4 Ensure the DDE Access Read Write setting is set to ON 5 Click the OK button to accept the settings in both the Advanced Point Settings dialog box and the Add Point dialog box Note The DDE Access group s Read Write box in the Advanced Point Settings dialog box is checked this is the only action required to expose DDESVR3 to a DDE Client application for read write access Note Any CX Supervisor point can be given DDE Access even DDE Client points F 4 3 DDE Array Points CX Supervisor supports arrays in DDE for both Client and Server transactions DDE Client data transfers are initiated by CX Supervisor either sending or requ
147. ays references the inserted object Lanwal EJES Curent Tyne Microsoft Excel Worksheet x Object Type Cancel Convent lo Microsoft Excel Char cet Es Micac Esce ukes C Activale as MT Display As Icon Recut The selected Microsoft Excel Worksheet object vall rol 322 ADO AND Application Arguments ASCII Bitmap Boolean type COM Appendix G Glossary of Terms Appendix G Glossary of Terms ADO stands for Active Data Objects and is data access technology which uses OLE DB to access data sources in a uniform way e g MS Access databases MS Excel spreadsheets and Comma Separated Variable files A logic operator used to interrogate Boolean type points AND returns TRUE if all arguments are TRUE An example of AND is that if ais a statement andbisa statement AND returns TRUE if both a and b are TRUE If one or both statements return FALSE then AND returns FALSE A software program that accomplishes a specific task Examples of applications are CX Supervisor CX Server and Microsoft Excel CX Supervisor and its development environment allows the creation and testing of new applications through a Graphical User Interface GUI Words phrases or numbers that can be entered on the same line as a command or statement to expand or modify the command or statement within the CX Supervisor script language The command acts on the argument In essence the command is a verb and the a
148. bandwidth This design must be closely linked with the PLC program design so the two processes complement each other Visualisation design should never be an after thought CX Supervisor comes with two utilities to help you monitor how healthy your application is while you are designing and testing it e Application Analysis performs a validation of the application and checks for communications performance theoretical error conditions such as use of non existent points use of obsolete functions such as Sleep or DDE and provides an overall summary of the application In some cases it will also offer suggestions on how to resolve some of the problems found e Performance Monitor works during the runtime to check the actual performance figures and provides analysis based on how your application actually works with your network and PLC program 16 1 Application Analysis An application can be analysed using the Analyse Application option from the main Project menu in the Development package After the application has been analysed the following dialog box will be displayed Re Analyse Application gt x Summary wamings Network PLE Page 60 Total PLC Points Total Number of PLE points JE 8 Always Updating 36 Number of PLC pomts constantly being refreshed E Inputs at 1 Sec 6 Inputs at 1 Sec E Inputs at 5 Sec 30 Inputs at 5 Sec E Total PLCs 1 Number of PLCs 8 Total Points 36 Number of Points 8
149. bax Points Sec 12 00 hax Posts S ec O Ha Elements Sec 12 00 Max Elements Sec OB Max Bytes Sec 25 00 Max BytesSec E Total Alans 16 Number of Alatne 0 Total Pages 1 Number of Pages E Total Regula Interval 1 Mumber of Regular Interval Scripts E Total Graphical Objects 63 Number of Graphical Objects Always Updating Byte 25 00 Always Updating BytesSec 6 Theoretical Max Band 11520 Theoretical kax Bandwidth BytesSec E Always Updating 0 22 Always Updating E Mos Bandvth Used 022 Maximum Bandvath Used 235 Application Analysis SECTION 16 Application Analysis Performance Monitor Summary Tab The Summary tab provides an overview of the application data including any warnings or errors found Warnings Tab The Warnings tab identifies specific problems found with the application and may offer suggestions for resolving the problems It many cases it will also be possible to go straight to the source of the problem by accessing the popup menu associated with the item allowing the problem to be resolved directly from the Analyse Application dialog box Network Tab The Network tab provides information specific to the selected network configuration Where more than one network is configured each network can be selected independently from a drop down list PLC Tab The PLC tab provides information specific to the selected PLC Where more than one PLC is configured each PLC can be selected independently from a drop d
150. be edited or activated by merely double clicking on it Linking allows an object to be shared by several documents by forging links between the destination documents and the source object e g a company logo may appear in several word processor documents by linking to a graphics object rather than embedding Embedding and Linking Objects within the CX Supervisor application can either be achieved by using the Object Packager or by embedding or linking objects directly within a page 317 Object Packager Note Appendix F Obsolete Features Packages may only be embedded or linked into CX Supervisor pages if they are created using OLE compliant applications This applies to objects either directly linked or embedded within CX Supervisor and those inserted using the Object Packager F 7 Object Packager 1 2 3 The Object Packager is a Windows application which enables objects to be wrapped for insertion into documents It can be used to either create a link to a file held on disk or to embed an object into a page When embedded or linked the object can be moved and positioned in a similar way to any other object created within CX Supervisor To use the Object Packager select Package from the list of objects displayed in the Insert Object dialog box shown later in this chapter An example of a typical Object Packager window is as follows we Object Packager Package in Untitled pag For the remainder of this chapter on
151. bject animations Printing the Animation Editor Print Preview Printing The Animation Editor can be printed in the same way pages can Before printing ensure that the printer has been set up correctly To check the printer settings refer to chapter 2 Pages To preview the page before printing select Print Preview from the File menu Refer to chapter 2 Pages regarding the use of the Print Preview display To print the contents of the Animation Editor click the amp button Refer to chapter 2 Pages regarding the use of the Print dialog box Runtime Actions Script A script controlling the actions of an object page or project can be created and updated using the Script Editor dialog box The Script Editor allows script code to be created or amended which carries out the mechanics of the animation operation To access the Script Editor dialog box to add an action select Execute Script from the animation list and click the Add Action button To access the Script Editor to modify an action select Execute Script from the animation list and click the Modify Action button Refer to the Script Reference chapter 10 Objects for a list of the objects to which an Execute Script action is applicable Page Animations and Project Animations may have an Execute Script action On selection of the Execute Script action the Script Editor dialog box opens Runtime Actions SECTION 9 Animation MN Script Editor Edt Operators Control Ac
152. brary SECTION 7 Graphics Library This chapter describes the CX Supervisor Graphics Library The chapter includes details of how the Graphics Library may be used for storing frequently used objects for use with a number of applications 7 1 Overview The Graphics Library is a repository for objects that are often used in CX Supervisor pages The Graphics Library Editor allows access to Libraries from a drop down list box Objects are stored in the Library and can be removed or copied allowing quick addition of frequently used objects to pages or which appear in a project a number of times Libraries are not project dependant so objects can be copied from one project to another 7 2 Graphics Library To activate the Library click the ts button If the Library is already open but displayed as an icon double click the Library icon An example of the Graphics Library Editor is shown below but note that actual library names and contents may differ from that shown in the following chapters Graphica Lala aiy pump 7 2 1 Create Library Each Library has a unique name which is entered when the Library is created To create a library click the te button The Add New Library dialog box opens Add New Library Enter the name of the new Library file and click the OK button or cancel the addition of the Library by clicking on the Cancel button If an object is dragged into the Library without a Library file open the
153. butes Aray Size 3 4 6 1 0 Update Rate The I O Update Rate specifies how and when communication with the PLC takes place This option is not available to Memory Resident points O Update Rate On Change O On Request On Interval 1 Seconds v The On Change option specifies that communication with the PLC occurs automatically as a result of a value change The On Request option specifies that data updates with the PLC will be manually requested using the scripting commands InputPoint and OutputPoint The point is updated internally but only communicates with the PLC when requested to by the script commands The On Interval option specifies the frequency that communications occur with the PLC When this option is selected an list box appears allowing the frequency to be entered 3 4 7 VO Attributes The I O Attributes option specifies the external source or destination for the point This option is not available to Memory Resident points 40 Creating a Point SECTION 3 Points hO Attibubes PLE OPC Other Setup The external source is defined by selecting the appropriate I O Attributes setting Further configuration of the external source can be applied by clicking the Setup button On clicking the Setup button for a PLC external source the PLC Attributes dialog box opens PLC Attributes Boolean p Eat PLC Attributes Loo PLCName pM Carcel PLE Type None gt Data
154. cally deleted if further point changes are made in the Developer In this case points revert to their Default value Select the Validate Point is Within Specified Range check box This option is only available for Input or I O points of type Integer or Real When checked an error message opens in the error log if the data passed to CX Supervisor is outside of the specified Minimum and Maximum range Click the OK button to accept the advanced settings or the Cancel button to abort the operation Amending an Existing Point To modify an existing point highlight the point from the points list and click the button This results in the View Point dialog box being displayed as shown below a dialog box based on the Add Point dialog box Modify Point Tene aker cDefaut Pont Athibutes Minimum Value 99999999 Maximum Value 99999999 Default Value fo r Memory Attributes Anay Size f The selected point can be redefined as described in chapter 3 Creating a Point Note If a point is renamed then any animations or scripts that were using the previous point name become invalid Run the Analyse Application tool to check for References to non existent points Deleting an Existing Point To remove an existing point highlight the point from the points list and click the button This results in a confirmation dialog box being displayed Click the Yes button to remove the point from the poi
155. ce type The number of Networks available is dependant on the device type 2 Anumber of computers linked together with a central processing point known as a Server which is accessible to all computers Networks affect CX Supervisor in that further Network associated options are available if the computer is Network connected A point that is designated as non volatile is a point whose value is saved on disk and automatically reloaded when CX Supervisor resumes execution A logic operator used to interrogate Boolean type points which produces the Boolean inverse of the supplied argument An example of NOT is that if a is a statement and is FALSE then NOT returns TRUE Ifa is a statement and is TRUE then NOT returns FALSE In CX Supervisor an object can be text graphics a control a bitmap or ActiveX object as created in the development environment A complex object can exist as a combination of two or more objects of any of the above types Specifically graphical objects can be categorised as a line an arc a polygon including a square and rectangle a round rectangle an ellipse including a circle or a polyline A control is essentially a complex graphic object and is specifically either a pushbutton a toggle button a slider a trend graph a rotational gauge or a linear gauge OLE DB is the underlying database technology on which ADO relies OLE BD is designed to be the successor to ODBC The term used
156. ce catalog_name DSN DSN data_source_name FILEDSN FILEDSN filename dsn MSDASQL Driver Microsoft Excel Driver xls DBQ c Database Invdb xls 12 2 4 3 Data providers installed with ADO V2 0 Jet 3 51 Microsoft Jet OLE For Microsoft Access databases DB 3 51 ADSDSOObject For resource data stored such as Active Directory this will become more important when NT5 0 is available 184 Configuring a Connection SECTION 12 Databases MSIDXS For Microsoft Index Server MSDASQL For existing ODBC Drivers this ensures that legacy data is not omitted MSDAORA Native Oracle driver simplifies access to existing Oracle data stores SQLOLEDB For Microsoft SQL Server For hierarchical recordsets this allows the creation of master detail type recordsets which allow drilling down into detailed data MSPersist For locally saved recordsets MSDAOSP For creating your own providers for simple text data The above is just the list of standard providers supplied by Microsoft Other vendors are actively creating their own 12 2 5 Creating a Data Source Name file A Data Source Name file or DSN for short stores information about a database connection in a file The file has the extension DSN and by default is stored in the Program Files Common Files ODBC Data Sources directory This type of file can be viewed with a suitable text editor e g Notepad One advantage of using a DSN file over specifying the full path
157. ce of the editor can be amended by choosing Preferences from the File menu This is especially useful when printing CX Supervisor preferences can be configured such that double clicking on a graphical object also brings up the red editing grab handles Setting this preference is achieved by selecting Preferences from the File menu Refer to chapter 2 Pages for further details on preferences and CX Supervisor configuration Control objects cannot be re shaped in the same way as a graphical object but are edited using Wizards Wizards customise control objects to display information in an easy to understand manner To edit a control object and activate a Wizard double click the object 93 Creating and Editing Graphic Objects SECTION 4 Objects 4 3 1 4 3 2 4 3 3 4 3 4 4 3 5 94 Note The shortcut keyboard combinations for Cut Copy and Paste operations are valid within Wizards Highlight part or all of a field and type lt Ctrl gt X to cut the text or lt Ctrl gt C to copy the text move the cursor to the desired field and type lt Ctrl gt V to paste the text Since the cut and copy operations store the information in the Windows Clipboard they may be pasted to another Wizard dialog box or application Creating and Editing Graphic Objects Arc Block Text Ellipse Line Polygon For details on re sizing the graphic objects described in the following paragraphs refer to chapter 3 Editing Objects Arcs
158. cept the new slider attributes or click the Cancel button to leave the slider unchanged 4 4 9 Toggle Button Toggle buttons are used to control and display the current value of a digital point Click the button then click or click and drag on the page to insert a button To edit the Toggle Button double click on it The Toggle Button Wizard dialog box opens Toggle Button Wizard ES Button Style Clank Button Toggle Swatch Colour Button In Out Button Rotary Swich OnvOlt Switch Font Configuration Attributer Boolean Point State H State 0 Athibutes Text p State 7 Albibutes Text i Ste ltributes The Toggle Button Wizard allows a Toggle Button to be assigned a style State O text and State 1 text to signify its purpose It also allows selection of a Boolean point To select a style click on an option from the list box To enter button text type in the Text fields for States O and 1 or select ON and OFF the Style Attributes dialog box is automatically updated Some toggle buttons can have an On Off colour associated with them The text font can be changed via the Font button To select a Boolean point click the Browse button and click on a point from the displayed list The Select Required ltem dialog box opens 65 Creating and Editing Control Objects SECTION 4 Objects Select Required item CAI Groups gt
159. ch the Recordset is linked to 12 3 3 1 Automatically open on connection 12 3 4 Lock 188 If this checkbox is ticked the Recordset will be automatically opened when the Connection is opened If this is unchecked the Recordset must be open with a script command The lock option enables the Recordset to be opened in either read only or read write modes there are two type of read write locks as defined below Read OnlyThe default lock is read only i e data cannot be changed Read Only The default lock is read only i e data cannot be changed Pessimistic Locks records when you start editing and releases the lock when Update or Cancel is called no need to worry about a conflict with other users but can cause records to be locked for long periods of time preventing other users from accessing the same records Configuring Field Associations SECTION 12 Databases Note Optimistic Locked only when the Update method is called therefore changes can be made to records without creating a lock conflicts have to be catered for because someone else might have changed the record between the time you started editing and the time you called Update If the Connection is open when a Recordset is added the Combo boxes for Table Name and Server Query will be automatically populated with valid entries for the selected Database When the Add Recordset dialog box is closed an attempt will be made to open the newly configured Re
160. chapter 9 Runtime Actions When completed click the OK button If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message opens During runtime selecting the user input object by clicking the left mouse button results in the in place edit box or runtime User Input Analogue dialog box being displayed based on the contents of the development version 149 Runtime Actions SECTION 9 Animation Enter a new value Curent Value 0 r Enter New Value 1 Cancel Minimum Value 1 8 008 Maximum Value 1 e 008 New Value p CX Supervisor provides an instruction based on the Runtime Display Attributes field the minimum and maximum values allowed based on the User Input Limits fields and a New Value field in which the user types the desired Real or Integer value Click the OK button to accept the value or the Cancel button to abort the operation An invalid entry in the New Value field is exposed as an error once the OK button has been clicked 9 3 25 Edit Point Value Text A text point may be issued to the user for amendment during runtime defined using the User Input Text dialog box To access the User Input Text dialog box to add an action select Edit Point Value Text from the animation list and click the Add Action button To access the User Input Text dialog box to modify an action select Edit Point Value Text from the animation list and click the Modify Action button For a list of th
161. check which may be made in runtime as the recipe is about to be downloaded If the validation fails the recipe is not downloaded If no validation is required make sure the Validate Recipe Before Download setting is set to OFF If validation is required check this box and then click the Validation Code button to display the Script Editor dialog box Updating an Existing Recipe SECTION 10 Recipes i Script Editor Edt Operators Control cbons Eunchone S5pecul Exaculion ltibabas Senp Name Cancel Trigger Ever On Reps Browse Aien rr la Cr Senp Code VB Suip CX Supenice Sa IF washer temp gt 38 OR water temo lt 95 THEN RETURN Mister rv ab lengershue Beal THEN EMDIF ELSE ENDIF layin yon rj EE E EE a Enter the recipe validation code using any standard CX Supervisor script language constructs The validation code should check any possible invalid point value or error condition The point value being checked is the value of the ingredient about to be downloaded or the current point value if the point is not an ingredient of the recipe being downloaded In the event of a failure the script language should perform a premature lt Return gt This has the effect of failing the recipe validation check and abort the attempt to download the recipe The recipe validation code should not contain any command which requires user input e g a Message command This is because the
162. checked the data files management is disabled and no files will be deleted The Start Logging on Application Startup checkbox controls the logging of the Data Set When selected all the Items in the Data Set start logging when the system is started and stop logging when the system is stopped If this option is not selected then logging must be controlled by the Start Stop logging script functions as required by the developer 11 2 3 Editing Item Properties 11 2 3 1 Item Properties The Add Modify Item properties dialog box is shown when adding a new Item or editing an existing one liem Propertes OF hem Name Volume Cancel Expresnor Mater Bicis Cata Type C Boolean Integer F Feal Cesdbard i a Sample Fister C On Change On irea 5 Second Scale Bi rerem Waber 50 bamur Valua En Scale Label Lires These options enable an items name and associated expression to be entered Its data type can be selected and if required a deadband value can be applied to the measured value The Item Name field allows the Item to be given a meaningful name The entry should be kept short but also be logical for clarification A maximum of 26 characters is allowed The Expression field defines the point name or expression that will be logged The Browse button allows easy point selection For details on how expressions or points are formulated Refer to chapter 3 Points The Data Type field determines the type o
163. cking the Change Icon button displays the following dialog box Change Icon Labet Partbrush Picture 1 Select either the current or default icon by clicking either the Current or Default setting and click the OK button to return to the Insert Object dialog box Should a different label be required to display beneath the inserted icon delete the contents of the Label field and type in a new label the default label offered is the filename of the file containing the inserted object 2 Type the full path of the target application or DLL ending with the application or DLL name into the From File field To locate an existing file name or a different path click the Browse button to display the Browse dialog box An example of the Browse dialog box is shown as follows alrsve dll JJ dhep D ShelE wt 12 Accwiz dll arnddla dl I divers 7 spool Acledit di 1 amdnedet Mime C viewers 18 Achary dil append ex D wins Advapi32 dl Apprec32 18 546x_hbc dl 1 Advpack di PJ Arp exe Y Filename IBAS Files oftype Icon Files Carcel Both programs extension EXE or Dynamic Link Libraries extension DLL are listed in the Files of Type field The Browse dialog box functions identically to the File Open dialog box described in chapter 6 Projects except the file list offered shows icons as opposed to pages 319 Object Packager 12 3 Appendix F Obso
164. cnnnconanenononannnnnonanennnnnannnnnnnos 165 11 2 2 Adding Editing Data Set Properties occccconccnnccccncnnocnnnnnnoonnnennnonanonononnnnnnnonnncnnnonanennnnnoness 166 11223 Eating Hem Properes crono laa 167 T24 Editino GINS cnnan fotaceendan sen Gea cidema oe Pusmunee doe sane thncdgksavu guasiese shined E E 168 Data OG CG at RUNIM eters a lcd 169 1131 le Manage nens vel iecenatlen ve Wann cckasaaian Uunadimtanasduariee met 169 Messe aba CONG Sasso a A 171 Data Log Viewer Component V2 0 and V1 8 ooocccccccnccncoconcnononnncnncnnnncnnonnnnnnnnonanononnnnnnnnnnanrnnnnnanons 172 11 4 1 Invoking the Data Log Viewer cccccsseeccceeeeeceeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeseeeeessueesseeeesseneessaneessaeeeess 172 114 2 WIEWING Logged FICS wict cutee het oct E Ad 172 11 43 Data OG Viewer 1 8 contaros aba di iia 173 Remote Data Log VIEWER a dci 175 Data Log EXPO EACS ura dt da did 175 11 6 1 Exporting Data via the Export Dialog coocccconnnccccconconnnnonannnononononanononnncnononcnonanonennnnnss 175 11 6 2 Generation of Comma Separated CSV Fil6sS oocccccccncnnccconcnnncnnnnnnononcnncnnanencnonanonnnnnns 175 A 176 116 4 Multiple Sec o S 176 11 6 5 Generation Of Text Files vecsscev conde sccdhccce ass os 177 Data LOGGING andanada 177 11 7 1 Add Database Link Dialog occcccoconnnccccccnnncconnnnnnonnnnnnonancnnnnonanonnnnnnnnnonancnnnnnnannnennnnnos 177 1 72 Add Field ink Dialog dis 178 SECT
165. cnnnnnnnnnnonnnnrnnnnnnnennnnnns 54 A A A Eee de Se ee ncaa Seach ales aceon 54 dale BOCK isso irene 54 A EIDOS ge a ene eee 54 A eg ee CR ee eee ee ee ee ee eee ee eee 54 4 9 5 POygON scerna e a abd trodes a tule bs E aa Ea aa ak 54 AO ROI USO me RE E E tn nee 55 Ase RECANE nn A A at gaa done aoe a Ge ede ceed 55 43G THOUGH OCCURING Cs toes A da 55 AS MA aid 55 Creating and Editing Control ObjectS ccccoonnnncoconncnnccnncnnnonanonononnnonononanonconancnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanennnnnns 55 a A aetalde eee a a 55 A A tet nencvanpee a A a 57 Ads RICOS a a ia 58 7A Lisa Gales an 60 gAn e USM MOM Pe A o q as tear hatte Sees na eatin aise aca esa none keene awe ee 61 o 61 4 4 7 Scatter OPA iia 62 ARES OM A A A A A a are a ee 64 AA Toge BUNOT a a N AA 65 AA O Trend A a aaa a a 66 4 4 11 Web Browser OD al o 68 Manipulating 0 e ic ics a a a ee E 68 Poe NS A e a O O algae Slain 68 E MI a a la a a ee 69 A EU da 69 BaD A 69 AP o A 69 A Di RE a cen en ee nen ee a E eee eee ee 69 Ber WNC PEE E cette on E A EE E E EA E E EE AS E E E E LENE E EE E AEN 69 46 8 Miror Image rensei e A E eee 70 Aog Onena uti o aA a oie 70 A E a ied Oat te 70 A en A ee ee ee 70 4 512 RGIS AMG Lo Wear Meda stemacaadasycadiiabaniamsbaatescie 70 Table of Contents 4 6 4 7 4 8 nn cuatieg aata eara aN 70 ASA ZOOM AAA 72 POE SUS HUN ri o de ici ends in 72 7 e EADIE e OE A A 72 A a tenga ulea tant Sided mola team ncrteuia tesa ular ea
166. contained within the Graphic Object bar refer to chapter 4 Objects CX Supervisor provides a Control Bar containing formatting and object manipulation tools The Control Bar can be activated or de activated from the View menu To activate the Control Bar select Control Bar from the View menu CX Supervisor places a check mark next to it signifying its active 19 Control Bar SECTION 1 Graphics Editor status To de activate it repeat the procedure the check mark is removed and the Control Bar is no longer displayed The various tools on the control bar allow the properties of objects to be modified A control may be activated with more than one object selected to change a particular attribute of all of the selected objects e g when all graphical objects on a page are selected and the Rotate button is pushed in and the desired angle specified all selected objects are rotated An illustration of the Control Bar is as follows Gauge _1 zj il E jd The Control Bar may vary slightly from this according to the display resolution currently in use the number of buttons displayed depends on the available space at higher resolutions more buttons are displayed The Control Bar can be removed from the display at any time by selecting Control Bar from the View menu A tick next to the name indicates that it is currently displayed CX Supervisor saves the settings when it is exited and restores them when it is next run The specific o
167. cordset 12 4 Configuring Field Associations 12 4 1 Name 12 4 2 Point 12 4 3 Field Field associations provide a means of connecting CX Supervisor Points with fields i e columns of data in a Recordset thus enabling data transfers to be made between Points and Records By creating a Field Association for each field in a record data can easily be read from a record in the database to its associated points and written from the points to the current record in the database When a Recordset has been added to a Connection in the Workspace the right menu option Add Field will be enabled Selecting this option will invoke the following dialog box Modify Field Association Field Association Properties Mame DiderD __ Cancel Paint ri rdestD Browse Field DideriD bd Field Property alue Access field by index e Automatically read on open A unique Field name will be automatically provided This can be modified to provide a more meaningful name if required The name of the point that will be used in data transfers The Browse button may be used to select a current point or add a new one The name of the Recordset field to be associated with the above point If the Recordset is open this list will automatically show all available fields 12 4 4 Field Property The type of information from the field to be transferred the following options are available Value default the assigned value of the
168. ct s to be set to italic when the Text Italic button is pushed in or normal when the Text Italic button is released Text Italic only applies to text block text and to text on buttons other controls and graphics cannot be italicised Text Underline On Off The u button allows any selected text object s to be set to underline when the Text Underline button is pushed in or normal when the Text Underline button is released Text Underline only applies to text block text and to text on buttons other controls and graphics cannot be underlined Text Left Aligned The El Aligned button aligns any selected text object s to the left edge of the bounding box Text Left Justified only applies to text block text and to text on buttons other controls and graphics cannot be left justified Text Centred The button aligns any selected text object s to the centre of the bounding box Text Centre Justified only applies to text block text and to text on buttons other controls and graphics cannot be centre justified Text Right Aligned The E button aligns any selected text object s to the right edge of the bounding box Text Right Justified only applies to text block text and to text on buttons other controls and graphics cannot be right justified Grid The use of the grid may be helpful in drawing and aligning the objects on the screen Select the button to enable the grid The grid settings are available by selecting Grid from the Vi
169. cts SECTION 4 Objects This chapter describes the various objects available within CX Supervisor It also describes the processes for creating editing and manipulating objects Pages created with CX Supervisor are constructed from objects that are inserted and linked together to form a coherent interface CX Supervisor objects are divided into three groups graphical control and embedded Generally the procedures for creating objects are identical A button representing the desired object is clicked on the Graphic Object bar The mouse pointer is then either clicked on the page for a default sized object or clicked and dragged to the appropriate point on the page for a custom sized object 4 2 Editing Objects 4 2 1 Re sizing 4 2 2 Re shaping 4 2 3 Wizards Editing falls into three distinct categories e Re sizing an object e Re shaping an object e Modifying an object using a Wizard To re size an object click on it with the left mouse button This selects it and brings up green sizing grab handles Click and drag the handles until the object is of the desired size Re shaping procedures are similar for all graphical objects which can be reshaped Not all can Control objects can only be reshaped using Wizards To change the shape of a graphical object choose Edit Object from the Edit menu to bring up the red editing grab handles Click and drag the handles until the object is of the desired shape The typefa
170. culation using above values Write Same as above but for the writing part of output and I O points Data Changes Number of inputs causing change of value C 6 1 VBScript Syntax errors These are seen during runtime as errors in the Error Log often giving the line and character of the error Referring back to the original script should easily display the problem Note that if the VBScript syntax is used within CX Supervisor script the line number reported refers just to the lines of VBScript with the VBScript being line 1 To troubleshoot further For specific help on VBScript language syntax see Microsoft s web site at http msdn microsoft com scripting Double check capitalisation and objects names See Appendix B FAQ What are the syntax differences between VBScript and CX Supervisor script To confirm the line causing the problem temporarily comment it out and see if the syntax error is no longer reported As a test try to simplify complex script lines into 1 or more lines with single instruction to identify which instruction is causing the error As a test simplify complex math formulae into several lines with single operation to identify which operation is causing the error As a test use hardcoded values for parameters using known valid values Display values using MsgBox command or using the LogEvent command Confirm path of execution using MsgBox in all conditional branches C 6 2 CX Supervisor Syntax errors
171. cution of another command or action CX Server is currently processing the maximum number of requests This error indicates the application is thrashing the maximum possible communications throughput of the device s connection CX Server has reached the maximum limitation for the specified function Communications Error occurred because of a Network Routing Table problem Check the routing tables in all devices are correctly configured In Alpha C series PLC s ensure the Allow Routing Table flag is set Oxnn24 The data cannot be converted to BCD as it contains Hexadecimal values between OxA and OxF na oe Oxnni18g Ml ae Oxnn1D OxnniF 306 General Use E 1 General Use Note Note Note Note Appendix E Using with the Omron DyaloX Appendix E Using with the Omron DyaloX The CX Supervisor Runtime can be installed on an Omron DyaloX Industrial PC which can also be purchased with the Runtime software preinstalled The preinstalled bundle will run Machine Edition projects without a USB Dongle but a PLUS dongle must be purchased to run PLUS projects If installing the Runtime manually or other application software make sure there will be enough disk space If not the software can be installed on an additional compact Flash drive within the IPC The DyaloX IPC is designed to be a run time end user platform and is ideal for running the CX Supervisor Runtime Only package Runtime applications can be
172. d Change PLE El Meteor Type A name can be assigned for the device in the PLC Name field Select the PLC from the Device Type field To add a temperature controller select a temperature controller from the Device Type field e g ESAF AH See also Chapter 14 for details on other models Clicking the Setup button opens the Device Type Settings dialog box allowing the device type of the PLC to be configured 81 Device Configuration 82 Note SECTION 6 Projects Devece Tepe Settings 0516 The possible settings for PLC configuration depend upon the type of PLC selected this applies also to the Read Only and Timer Clock fields On completion click the OK button to continue or the Cancel button to abort the operation Values specified may be set as default by clicking the Make Default button A network may be specified for the selected PLC by selecting from the Network field The networks available are dependent on the device type selected To open the Network Settings dialog box click the Setup button Hetwork Settings SYSMAC WAT Network Driver Modem FINS Deshnshon Adder Network E np Pe 3 m Frame Length Response Timeout s p 2 2 The Unit Number is the identifier for the network being configured The Destination Network Address and Destination Node Number identify the connection point to the network A PLC can be selected to act as a gateway to the PLC being e
173. d A delay in response from the PLC of more than one minute results in the error message Recipe transfer timed out When the recipe download is complete all the ingredients are saved and the CX Supervisor runtime environment continues to run in the normal manner An event is logged stating that the recipe was successfully downloaded 10 10 3 Uploading a Recipe There are two ways of uploading a recipe definition in runtime The first method is to use a CX Supervisor script function attached to a graphical object on a page such as a push button The function call is UpLoadRecipe lt NameOfRecipe gt The other way to upload a recipe is to display the Recipe Viewer as described in the previous chapter Highlight the desired recipe from the recipe list and click the l button The Modify Save Upload Recipe dialog box opens Modify Save Uploaded Recipe Values ES Contiguation Ata Recipe Hame Cottee Irish Cancel Sare Recs s Makes smooth creamy lish ste When ml 100 Ves The Modify Target button allows the target value for an ingredient to be modified by means of the Modify Ingredient dialog box An ingredient must already be selected from the list of ingredients for this recipe Any change to the target value is saved in the recipe definition Any number of ingredients may be modified in this way when the recipe is uploaded Selecting the OK button will upload the recipe If for some reason the recipe definiti
174. d alphanumerically by name The Type and Description fields once selected react in the same way The Alarm Editor dialog box shows the alarms in name order The widths of the alarm fields can be widened or narrowed as required using the mouse to drag the column boundaries The typeface of the editor can be amended by selecting Preferences from the File menu This is especially useful when printing The O button displays the Alarm Settings dialog box which allows global alarm settings to be modified Refer to chapter 8 Alarm Header Information Click the 24 button to view details with large icons Click the button to view details with normal icons Click the button to view details as a list Select the button to view details as a list including name type expression priority and description information The details can be sorted in ascending order by clicking once or in descending order by clicking twice in the appropriate field A summary of alarm information is available by selecting the ea button The resultant dialog box shows an overall summary and a breakdown on the number of alarms per type To exit the dialog box click the Close button The Alarm Information dialog box is shown as follows Alarm Information Alain Summary l Total Number of lams Number of Simpie Alarms Number of Deadband Alam Number of Rate ol Change Alarms z 2 O 8 4 Creating a New Alarm Open the Alarm Ed
175. d message This field is visible from the Alarm Editor dialog box The group to which this alarm is added is selected from the Group field To create a new group name simply type the name of the new group in the Group field The use of alarm groups allows filtering of alarm messages by group name The priority assigned to the alarm is selected from the Priority field The Display Alarm Acknowledge dialog box setting determines whether the Acknowledge Alarm dialog box opens in runtime when the alarm occurs The dialog box notifies the operator of the alarm condition and allows the operator to acknowledge the alarm The default value is True Activating the Auto Acknowledge Alarm setting causes these messages to be acknowledged without any operator action Refer to chapter 8 Alarm Acknowledge Creating a New Alarm SECTION 8 Alarms The Play Sound setting determines whether an audible warning is sounded when the alarm occurs The default value is False Note that a waveform file must also have been selected for the warning sound to be heard The waveform is selected by using the Alarm Sound button on the Alarm Settings dialog box An alarm description detailing the possibilities of how the current alarm would be raised is inserted in the Description field To move to a new line press lt Ctrl gt lt Return gt Any characters are valid and up to 255 characters may be entered in the text field This field is visible from the Alarm
176. d to provide a more meaningful name if required 12 3 2 Recordset Type The Recordset can be 1 of 3 types Table Name The Recordset is the name of an actual table in the Database 187 Configuring Recordsets Note Note 12 3 3 Source SECTION 12 Databases Server Query The Recordset is the results of a pre defined Server Query stored in the database SQL Text The Recordset is the results of an SQL query executed when the Recordset is opened It is more efficient to run a Server Query than an SQL query For Database connections all three of the above options are available but for Text or CSV connections only one option is available namely SQL Text For convenience a facility is provided for automatically building the required SQL Text for this type of connection This facility is invoked from the Build SQL button shown below Modify Recordset EJ C Table Name C Sewe Duery SOL Tex Buld SQL SELECT FROM T ablest This will bring up a dialog box with a list of all valid files in the Directory specified for the Connection After choosing a file and exiting from the Build SQL dialog box the required SQL Text is built In the above example the file Tables txt was chosen but this will be written as Tables txt in the SQL Text as most Providers do not accept the character because it is used as a delimiter The source field shows the Table name Server Query or SQL text as selected above whi
177. d Paste enables the selected Item to be cut or copied and then pasted into a Data Set or Group e Delete will delete the selected entry e Add DataSet Add Group and Add Item enables new Data Sets Groups and Items to be added to the selected entry 165 Data Log Editor SECTION 11 Data Logging Work S pace Pa fe ES a Dataset 1 Milles 5 Group 1 Grain dl Gran Wienghi E Grain Size Eda sE y 2 Elo ur Milled Cul ll Group 2 Delivery Copy B DataSeq 2 Mixer ur E Group 1 Flours 3 3 Group 3 Water Dietete Volume as Water n Aud Data Set dy Temperature Add Group Ro Water Mix Add fem Bb Dalase 3 Durnp Dd DataSet Moulder Uire G hn Sh ces Dytogging EF Daae The functionality of the Items is determined by their expression If the expression is a single point name the item is shown as the same type as the point as configured in the point editor i e memory input output or input output If the expression contains calculations constants and or multiple point names the item is shown as a script calculation 11 2 2 Adding Editing Data Set Properties The Add Modify Data Set properties dialog box opens when either the Add Data Set or the Edit an existing Data Set option is selected from the menu Add Data Set l Data Set Properties Data Set Name Dataset 1 Miller Period li Morth s Woot nies to een 24 e Keep all files M Start Loggi
178. d combinations for Cut Copy and Paste operations are valid within the Add Recipe dialog box Highlight part or all of a field and type lt Ctrl gt X to cut the text or lt Ctrl gt C to copy the text insert the cursor at the desired field and type lt Ctrl gt V to paste the text Since the cut and copy operations store the information in the Windows Clipboard they may be pasted to another dialog box or application 10 4 1 Recipe Configuration Attributes The name of the recipe is entered in the Recipe Name field The recipe name can be constructed using any alphanumeric characters This field is visible from the Recipe Editor dialog box A recipe description may be inserted in the Description field To start a new line press lt Ctrl gt lt Return gt Any characters are valid and up to 255 characters may be entered in the text field This field is also visible from the Recipe Editor dialog box 10 4 2 Recipe Ingredients The recipe ingredients are added using the Add Ingredient button in the Add Recipe dialog box to display the Add Ingredient dialog box as follows Add Ingredient xf Ingredient Attibutes 7 OK Ingredient Name r LinktoPoint e O Bros Quantiy Expression eee Iv Editable Value at Runtime di 155 Creating a New Recipe SECTION 10 Recipes Enter a suitable ingredient name in the Ingredient Name field This name should be unique and meaningful and identify the particular ingredien
179. d is cleared when the boiler temperature falls below 95 100 minus 5 For a Rate of Change alarm the following attributes are displayed Alarm Type Alam ltribultes F Simple Expression Browse F Deadband Bictertemp gt 100 te Rate of Changa T Base Dwechorn y ROC 5 pos Minutes Up 119 Creating a New Alarm SECTION 8 Alarms An expression based on a point is entered in the Expression field The alarm is raised if the value exposed by the expression increases or decreases at the speed based on the values of the ROC field the T Base field and the direction based on the Direction field The alarm is cleared when the rate of change is less than the critical rate For the above example an alarm is raised when the boiler s temperature increases by 5 or more per minute and clears when the boiler s temperature increases by less than 5 per minute A point may be inserted into any of the alarm types Expression field by either typing in the point name or by selecting the Browse button which results in the select Required Item dialog box being displayed at the position where a point should be inserted E elect Required ltem Al roupa Cancel Por Names a PM Tae Add Abas 124 our a PO ches Lanning tAlarmCoure Add Point 4 vadableMemory 040 Month i Rn e 00 Pr eos j items Displayed 0 ermoblode C Alises tDiskSpace i GD Resources f Points High lanms 7 H ig
180. d is still supported to allow editing of old projects This difference is by design and is correct Why does CX Supervisor show different ActiveX properties to Visual Basic or Excel Properties of ActiveX controls shown in the CX Supervisor ActiveX Property Browser may differ from those seen in the Visual Basic or Excel property browser This can be for one or more of the following reasons e Both Visual Basic and Excel show their own container properties in this window as well as the object properties CX Supervisor does not show its container properties Examples of VBA container properties are 291 292 Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions CausesValidation DataSource Draglcon DragMode Height HelpContextID Index Left TabIndex TabStop Tag ToolTip Text Top Visible Whats ThisHelp ID Width e CX Supervisor only shows properties with data types it can edit for example Boolean Integer Real String UserDefined and Colours Other data types i e Font type cannot be edited so are not displayed Also properties with multiple parameters are not listed in CX Supervisor as they cannot be edited e CX Supervisor will show additional private object properties which Visual Basic and Excel choose not to display Is it possible to connect an external PLC to CX Supervisor via a modem Yes you can connect from CX Supervisor via CX Server to a PLC via a modem In the PLC configura
181. d programs can actively exchange data and controls other applications within Microsoft Windows DDE technology was notoriously unstable and was replaced with OLE technology See also ltem Server server application and Topic SCADA applications are created and tested using the development environment within CX Supervisor On completion the finished application can be delivered as a final customer application to be run by the run time environment Dynamic Link Library A program file that although cannot be run stand alone as an executable can be utilised by one or more applications or programs as a common service DLL files have a DLL extension DLL s comprise a number of stand alone functions In CX Supervisor a DLL containing icons can be accessed to represent the display part of an OLE object One such DLL MORICONS DLL is provided in the standard Microsoft Windows installation A recipe is downloaded during runtime This process involves identifying the appropriate recipe and executing the validation code if any exists The download is complete when each ingredient has set its point to the target value A file that contains programs or commands of an application that can be executed by a user or another application Executable files have a EXE file extension CX Supervisor provides two executable files one for the development environment CKSUPERVISORDEV EXE and one for the run time environment SCS EXE In the CX
182. d the number of pixels down e g 1024 x 768 See also SVGA mode and VGA mode Programmable Logic Controller A point within the CX Supervisor script language that stores a value or string assigned to that point A point is used to hold a value of a predefined type Boolean Integer Text etc The contents of a point may be controlled by an object or I O mechanism such as PLC communication The contents of a point may control the action or appearance of an object or be used for output via an I O mechanism see also Boolean type Integer type point variable Real type and Text type A CX Supervisor application will consist of one or a number of pages linked together The pages may contain passive or active graphics text or animations and may be grouped together logically to form a project A project may consist of many pages or simply a single page Projects may be built and tested within the CX Supervisor development environment and run stand alone under the CX Supervisor run time environment Only one project at a time may be open for editing within the CX Supervisor development environment A type of point where the value of the point can be any number including those containing a decimal point A recipe is a set of pre defined steps used to perform a particular task A CX Supervisor project may contain zero or more number of recipes Recipes are defined in the development environment and executed or downloaded in
183. d to be added manually Any User Settings files used by script e g CSV or TXT files cannot be detected and are therefore not copied These will need to be added manually 6 16 Project Information Information may be stored concerning a project by using the Project Information dialog box This dialog box may be accessed by selecting Information from the Project menu CX Supervisor displays the following dialog box Project Information File C PROGRAM Enter a title and any relevant details concerning the project in the Title and Description fields and click the OK button 103 Alias Definitions SECTION 6 Projects 6 17 Alias Definitions 6 18 Find 104 1 2 3 An alias definition can be provided to replace strings in scripts and expressions used throughout CX Supervisor applications An associated string replaces the alias when used in a script or expression Select Alias Definitions from the Project menu EE Definitions The 3 columns are seperated by tabs and are the Alias text to be used the actual value to be used and an optional comment starting with character respectively The project can be searched to find occurrences of text or a point name It can also be used to search for text within script e g to find where a text message is generated from The areas which can be searched are e The current page e All pages e Project scripts e Alarms e Recipes e The project whic
184. deration include 213 Further Settings and Configuration SECTION 13 CFR Title 21 Part 11 Functionality 13 6 1 Database File e Database File Location e Microsoft Access Database File Management e Audit Trail Notes e SQL Statements Location It is possible to specify a different location for audit database files other than the default AuditTrail subfolder To specify a new location open the Audit Trail Configuration dialog Audit Trail Configuration Database Microsoft Access mdb C SQL Server setup Cancel Logging Options iw Sp Folder ecity the destination folder for the Audit Trail database files Browse EAT est AuditProject sLog Additional information Audit Trail ID Point t uditld Browse Audit Trail Note Point tAuditN ote Browse i Log Alarm information into the Audit Trail database files fe All Alarme Selected Alarms using Generate Audit Trail setting W Log Errors Events into the Audit Trail database files And in the Logging Options group box check the Specify the destination folder for the Audit Trail database files check box and either browse for or type in the desired location NOTE If the directory does not already exist then it will be automatically created when the file is first created 13 6 2 Microsoft Access Database File Management 214 By default CX Supervisor will create a new access database file with pr
185. ding a Page 1 2 3 Note To amend a page it must first be open If no pages are open click the 4 button A standard File Open dialog box with the caption Open Page opens The layout and usage depends on your operating system so see your Microsoft documentation for details To amend a page 1 Locate the drive and directory where the desired page is stored 2 Select the desired page from the list presented 3 Click the Open button to load the page Loading a page does not automatically make it part of a project It is therefore perfectly feasible to load and edit pages from other projects Use the Project Editor to attach a page to a project For more details concerning projects refer to chapter 6 Projects The loaded page may now be edited as required using the CX Supervisor editing tools 27 Defining the Properties of a Page SECTION 2 Pages 2 3 28 Defining the Properties of a Page A page has certain attributes or properties These properties may be viewed and edited in two ways The simplest way to access the properties of a page is to double click with the left mouse button in the background area of the page This causes CX Supervisor to display the following Page Properties dialog box Page Proper ties Page Tille Page Descoption a Border Style Display Mode gt Size Position Attributes C Nons 2 Overlap Top lo Height 480 2 Thin se let o Md ean ae Cente
186. dited this list is restricted to the PLCs contained in the current project Selecting the Driver tab results in the Driver Configuration view being displayed this part of the Network Settings dialog box helps to ensure that data is transmitted correctly over the network Device Configuration SECTION 6 Projects Network Sethings SYSMAC WAY Note The possible settings for the Baud Rate Parity Data Bits and Stop Bits fields depend upon the port selected If a timeout occurs the communication is not complete Where necessary increase the Timeout Offset value in milliseconds to ensure that the device does not cause a timeout Values specified may be set as default by clicking the Make Default button 6 7 2 Modifying a PLC Connection From the Setup Devices dialog box a PLC name may be modified by selecting the PLC name from the Device List on the Setup Devices dialog box and clicking the Modify button This opens the Change PLC dialog box A new name can be entered in the PLC Name field If an invalid PLC name is entered an error message opens on clicking the OK button 6 7 3 Removing a PLC Connection From the Setup Devices dialog box a PLC name may be removed from the PLC Name field by selecting the PLC name from the Device List on the Setup Devices dialog box and clicking the Delete button This results in a confirmation dialog box being displayed Click the Yes button to remove the PLC from the list or the No button
187. duced e Use deadband option Consider using the deadband option especially for noisy analogue signals to reduce the actual logging and storage requirements e Don t Keep all files The Dataset Keep all files checkbox defaults On for complete data retention but this should be cleared to stop the Hard Disk filling up 269 Data Logging SECTION 20 Best Practices 270 Configuring a Client PC running Windows XP Service Pack 2 Appendix A Configuring Note Appendix A Configuring a PC for Remote Connection The OPC interface and CX Supervisor Communications Control use a Microsoft technology called DCOM This allows the Clients and Servers to be seamlessly Distributed over a PC network The Server should be running on the PC with direct connection to the Device or Device network However the Client or indeed multiple Clients can be run on different networked PCs and will automatically read and write data over the PC network To do this the PC running the Server must be correctly configured If necessary refer to your OPC server documentation For full details of DCOM configuration and security issues see your Microsoft documentation The following is a quick guide Although DCOM connections can be achieved using Windows 98 and ME they are more difficult to configure and offer less functionality For best results always use Windows NT or Windows 2000 A 1 Configuring a Client PC running Windows XP Service Pack 2
188. e LNG and LND file to the installed application folder These languages will then be available for all applications run on this machine When copying the application files also include the newly translated UDT files 233 Popup Keyboard Layout SECTION 15 Multilingual Features 15 10 Popup Keyboard Layout The layout of characters shown on the Alphanumeric popup keyboard can be set for existing or new languages The layout is updated when a new language is selected All keyboard layouts are saved in files with KBD extension and have the same name as the selected language Note If there is no valid keyboard layout for the selected language then the default layout in SCSDEFS KBD is used This already caters for all the western languages supported 1 2 3 To create a new keyboard layout 1 Copy the file scsdefs kbd in the installed application folder default is C Program Files Omron CX Supervisor and rename the copy with the language name e g American kba 2 Follow the instructions at the top of the file to add each character for each key 3 Save the new keyboard layout 4 The Runtime will now automatically update the layout when the new language is selected 234 Application Analysis SECTION 16 Application Analysis Performance Monitor SECTION 16 Application Analysis Performance Monitor A visualisation application should always be designed in advance with special care being taken to make best use of
189. e The distinction between the development program and runtime program and their respective target users is very important to understand and will help you understand the following sections Note CX Supervisor is designed and tested for use with European versions of Microsoft Windows Every language permutation is not tested and no testing is performed on other versions like Russian Japanese or Chinese etc as this is simply standard Microsoft functionality However you should ensure your translated application can be correctly deployed before starting full development for example by creating a small test application Note The formatting of character tables used by CX Supervisor for multilingual features is the worldwide standard Unicode format This product therefore only runs on Unicode compliant Operating Systems e Windows 2000 Windows XP and later products 15 1 Development Features For the benefit of the application developer the CX Supervisor Development application may be run in any major European language i e English Spanish Italian German and French This means all menus dialogs and error messages displayed by the Development program are shown in this language which provides a more comfortable and more efficient development experience 225 Runtime Language Features SECTION 15 Multilingual Features Note To choose between languages at the beginning of the installation select the required language Note th
190. e Default Properties tab configure the Default Authentication Level to Connect and the Default Impersonation Level to Identify Setup the access permissions by either e On the Default COM Security tab adding the user to the Access Launch and Configuration lists by clicking the Edit Default button in each case The user added should have Administrator rights on the local PC If not it may be necessary to add user groups INTERACTIVE and NETWORK as well e From the My Computer item in Component Services select DCOM Config and configure the properties for required applications e g SCS OpenDataServer and OpcEnum On the Security tab add the required users to each of the Custom Permissions The users added should have Administrator rights on the local PC If not it may be necessary to add user groups INTERACTIVE and NETWORK as well A 6 Configuring a Server PC running Windows NT or 2000 1 2 3 1 Start DCOMCNFG EXE e g by selecting RUN from the Start button The default location is C WINDOWS SYSTEM 2 View the Default Properties tab Ensure that the Enable Distributed COM on this computer is checked 2 2 Configuring a Server PC running Windows NT or 2000 Appendix A Configuring a PC 3 From the Default Properties tab configure the Default Authentication Level to Connect and the Default Impersonation Level to Identify Setup the access permissions by either On the Default Security tab adding the user to the Acces
191. e Opening Characters field and Closing Characters field Click the OK button to accept the settings or the Cancel button to abort the operation 6 10 2 10Advanced Settings To open the Advanced Settings dialog box select Advanced Settings from the Runtime Settings menu Advanced Settings Internal Communication Optimisations DK Allow internal optimisations for Output points Defaults Communication Packet Optimisations O Use optimum Packet sizes O Use specific Packet sizes Communications Failure Display Options Display bad quality values as Y Le Server Project File Options Embed Le Server Project within Lx Superior SA File Le Server Control Options Allow advanced script access to PLC via CXS erer control Click the settings to enable disable Internal Communication Optimisations and Communication Packet Optimisations Bad Quality values and results of calculations using bad quality values can be shown as characters This could indicate a communication failure or Bad Quality status in an OPC Server If you may need to option to edit the PLC settings in the runtime without recompiling in the developer then untick the Embed CX Server Project within CX Supervisor SR2 file option This is useful for example if it is possible the 97 Runtime Security SECTION 6 Projects COM port driver number may change remote telephone number or network node number or even the PLC CPU mod
192. e Point Name field 3 Set the I O Attributes setting to DDE and click the Setup button The DDE atiributes dialog box opens DDE Attnbutes DDE Attributes Sener Name Excel Topic Name Sheet xls Item Name R1 C1 Array Size EOI 4 Enter Excel in the Server Name field This is the name of the external DDE server application 5 Enter Sheet1 xls in the Topic Name field This is the required topic in this case it is a Microsoft Excel worksheet named Sheet1 xls It is possible to specify a specific topic for instance in Microsoft Excel to specify a sheet within a book a colon is used to delimit the information e g Book1 sheet3 xls 6 Enter R1C1 in the Item Name field This refers to the item name 7 Enter 1 in the Array Size field 8 Click the OK button to accept the settings in both the DDE Attributes dialog box and the Add Point dialog box It is not necessary to give DDE Client Points DDE access via the Advanced dialog box this field is only used in the creation of DDE Server Points If the DDE Access Read Write setting is set ON this point s value would then be exposed to change by external DDE server application s which may not always be desirable This process is repeated for any further DDE data transfers that are required F 4 2 DDE Server Points 312 1 2 3 A DDE server point receives data from or receives a request for data from an external Client applic
193. e a left mouse button click The following list shows all the possible facilities with Keyboard Control enabled e Moving Around Selectable Objects Using Cursor Keys The cursor keys can be used to move around the objects in the respective direction e With an object selected if the right cursor key is pressed then the closest object is selected from within an area bounded by lines drawn diagonally upwards and diagonally downwards and to the right from the centre of the object If no object is found then the current object remains selected A similar rule also applies when using the left cursor key and the up and down cursor keys Note Selectable items must have a left mouse button event defined or have a default action e Moving Around Selectable Objects Using lt Tab gt Key The lt Tab gt key can be used to move around all the objects in the order in which they are drawn this can be varied using the raise object and lower object editing facilities The lt Shift gt lt Tab gt key can be used to move around the objects in the reverse order 90 Settings SECTION 6 Projects 6 10 2 2 Target Settings To select items in a specific tab order use the lt Tab gt key to move around the page items in a specific order using the move to top feature Start at object number 1 and end with the last object i e if obj1 obj2 and obj3 then use move to top on obj1 first followed by obj2 and then by obj3 this gives
194. e and Chapter 16 Best Practices Points Diagnostics dialog box Appendix C Troubleshooting C 5 Diagnostics dialog box The Runtime has a communications diagnostics window This will only normally be used under guidance of Technical Support to assist diagnosing specific communication issues To view the dialog box 1 Log in as a user with Designer privileges 2 Open the Point Maintenance dialog box and select the PLC point to diagnose 3 Press Diagnostics The following screen is shown Sliderln Pont Disgnostics Informaborr CA Seres interface Information Total Achva Ponts Average Ache Fis Sec Calculated Peak Pts Sec Read Calbiscks Reads Now Being Processed Total Actre Pont Elements Average Ache Elements Sec Calculated Peak Elements Sec Wite Callbacks Writes How Beng Processed 3 D S 85 Calback Ord On Change Allow Input Optimisations MSecs ance last callback MSect since fret callback Mirimum calback mberat Masarnm caliback mierval Average calback mberval Average callback duration Data updates MSecs since last dats update Dala changes Hec since lect data change Comme Fad Status Ce Server Registration Type C Server Internal Ley Other Irdcrmnatior Dalal ype Group Recipe Pending Number of Errors Last Enor Data Trancier Optimisation Allow Output Oplimisationa Hiec since bast calback MSecs since frel callback Minimum callback mberval Masaru callback iedyat fn
195. e communications object to connect to the server i e OMRONCXSupervisorCommunicationsControl If you wish to use a different object make your selection from the drop down list To Add Modify or Delete an object click the Info button Selecting the Add option will open the Communications Control dialog box From the list of control objects select OMRON CX Supervisor Communications Control and click the OK button Lommunications Controls 7 q l xj OMRON CH Communications Cortrol OMRON CX I Communications Control Cancel OMRON CX OPC Commuracabons Control OMRON CX Su ero Dommuricatons Control Clicking the OK button in the Communications Controls dialog box will open the Communications Control Properties dialog box from where the server details can be added or updated Click Show All and select the computer name of the server machine from the list To edit these properties later select Modify from the Info menu Group Select the Group containing the required item from the dropdown list To Add Modify or Delete a Group click the Info button Items The Items within the selected Group are listed The Item Attributes dialog box can be used to add or edit the items To Add Modify or Delete an Item click the Info button Selecting the Add or Modify option will open the Items Attributes window from where the item details can be added or updated Array Size Enter the number of array elements in the CX Superv
196. e font used by the alarm object using the Font button In Style Attributes set the following options as desired shows the date of the alarm shows the time of the alarm shows the status of the alarm shows the column headings displays object with 3 D border shows highest priority at top shows the groups of the alarm shows the priority of the alarm number of characters in date field number of characters in time field number of characters in priority field number of characters in status field Exit the Wizard by clicking the OK button to accept the new alarm object attributes or click the Cancel button to leave the alarm object unchanged 4 4 2 Bar Chart Click the W button then click or click and drag on the page to insert the Chart To edit a Bar Chart double click on it The Chart Wizard dialog box opens Chart Wizard Combiguesbon Atenbubes Chart Tithe Chart Style 30 Bar Warcal Chat Backyound Colour MN E Project Colours fe 3 0 Frame E Auto Size Font Auto Fit Bas Bas Colours Labels and Expuessiona The Chart Wizard allows entry of configuration attributes and assignment of expressions T PEA 1 Enter a title for the chart in 2 Select the chart style from the Chart Title field the Chart Style field 3 Select the colour of the chart background 57 Creating and Editing Control Objects SECTION 4 Objects 4 4 3 Pictures 98 4 Toggle the Project Colours 3 D Frame
197. e frequency cannot be guaranteed as the OS may be busy or handling other processes Note 4 Because of Note 2 and Note 3 above Sleep should not be used for creating output or logic pulses e g setting a bit on sleeping then setting the bit off Instead just use the PC to set the bit and allow the PLC to clear the bit either after a duration timed by the PLC real time clock or when the triggered process is complete The requirement for Sleep is quite simple but the implementation is actually very complex In the example above the application must continue to run during the pause i e read PLC data log data check alarms animate graphics etc For this reason any script with a Sleep statement must be executed in parallel with the system This can result in unexpected results when a Sleep is added and previously functioning script commands are now running in parallel Redesign the script considering parallel processing This can also result in unexpected behaviour when a Sleep is added to a Project initialisation or Page initialisation script as some parts of the system or objects may not be loaded at time of execution Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions Sleep can cause problems during shutdown of the runtime if a sleeping script is still running How do I use System points in Visual Basic VBScript Access CX Supervisor points from Visual Basic style scripting called VBScript couldn t be simpler just use the point name nor
198. e installation program runs in your selected language and also the Development application resources are installed in this language In the unlikely event you ever need to change your language selection simply uninstall CX Supervisor in the normal manner and then reinstall selecting the desired language Choose Setup Language Select the language tor this installation trom a the choices below French Standard hernan habian Spanish Of course the designer enters all application data like page names on screen text button captions etc and these all form part of the runtime application Translation of the runtime application is covered in the next section Remember the choice of development language is entirely separate to the language the end user will use and has absolutely no impact on the runtime application 15 2 Runtime Language Features Note The developer will be required to create the runtime application to run in at least 1 language This is often English but does not have to be It could be the same language as the developer or even a completely different language for the end user All translations for all system text like dialogs and menus are installed automatically User defined text entered at development time is normally entered in the target language see Runtime Multilingual Features if this is not suitable The Default language can be set so that at runtime the translated system text automatical
199. e objects to which this action is applicable refer to chapter 9 Objects On selection of the Edit Point Value Text action dialog box opens Edit Point Yalue Text Text Foint Cancel Runtime Display Attributes Browse Caption Browse Set Text to Echo Off T Display Keyboard Ts In Place Edit A text point must be entered This is typed into the Text Point field A text string to use as the caption of a user dialog box can be entered in the Caption field Selecting the Echo Off setting ensures that text typed at runtime appears hidden as asterisks The Display Keyboard option is useful if the runtime system does not have a keyboard i e it is controlled by a touch screen or tracker ball When a value is edited a Keyboard dialog box opens which allows editing by clicking on screen If the In Place Edit option is checked instead of the popup editing dialog box the value can be edited on the page in a standard Windows edit box 150 Runtime Actions SECTION 9 Animation Enter Login Name a 3 et efe 7 e of lt BE Ja JE CJ JE JE JJ JE JE JE PA JE Pc DA PC JA O ce ef PA Maelo o ef 7 su To abort the Edit Point Value Text edit click the Cancel button By clicking the Browse button a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions When completed click the OK button If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message op
200. e of the editor can be amended from the Preferences option in the File menu This is especially useful when printing 106 Project Editor SECTION 6 Projects 6 21 3 6 21 4 6 21 5 6 21 6 6 21 7 6 21 8 6 21 9 Opening a Page via the Project Editor To open pages via the Project Editor click the Project Editor 5 button Adding Pages to a Project When a new page is created it is automatically registered in the P Project Editor but its details are not saved When the page is saved as a PAG file a message opens requiring confirmation to add this page to the project Click the Yes button to add the page or the No button to save the page without adding to the project lf the page was not added to the project when saving it can be added later by using the Add Page to Project button Removing Pages From a Project To remove pages from a project select the page by clicking its description on the Project Editor and click the Remove Page from Project button A message opens asking Do you want to remove name and path of page from the project Click the Yes button to delete the page or click the No or Cancel button to keep it and return to the Project Editor Linking Pages in a Project A number of pages may be linked together within a project Linking allows a main page containing active elements e g buttons to be loaded and depending upon the actions performed i e which buttons are clic
201. e or more ingredients each of which relates to a point Each ingredient assigns a value to a point by means of a target value A suite of CX Supervisor recipes may be created for any project In runtime the recipes are a great time saver that eliminate mistakes that may otherwise be made were the repetitive tasks they perform left to human endeavour It is possible to achieve simple point initialisation using the CX Supervisor script language This approach works perfectly well for relatively straight forward applications However further functionality is provided using the recipe system such as the ability to modify a recipe while the CX Supervisor project is being executed in runtime 10 2 Recipe Components Before proceeding any further with the description of recipes some basic recipe terminology must be introduced e Recipe A recipe is a set of pre defined steps used to perform a particular task A CX Supervisor project may contain none or many Recipes are defined in the development environment and executed or downloaded in the runtime environment e Ingredient Each recipe consists of at least one ingredient Each ingredient must be related to an existing point e Target Value An ingredient must specify a target value for its related point This is the value to which the point is set in runtime when the recipe is downloaded e Validation Code Recipe validation code is CX Supervisor script code which is used to check poi
202. e sure that only the pages that are necessary are open When a page is no longer needed close it CX Supervisor will update all pages that are open therefore if lots of pages are open then it may be doing a lot of unnecessary work that will slow down the application For pages that are displayed in the same place set the Display Mode property to Replace This allows pages to automatically be closed when a new page is loaded 20 1 2 Use Logical Point names instead of physical addresses Note Logical point names like Boiler_3 Pressure provide more flexibility than physical addresses like D8319 allowing the PLC program and addresses to be changed without impacting the SCADA They also make it much easier read during development and more importantly during maintenance If the Logical symbols are created in CX Programmer it can link them to a CX Server file which CX Supervisor can then Import into the Points Editor This is a very quick method of creating all the required points e Perform all data conversion in PLC ladder Although today s PCs have excellent maths performance consider the format of the PLC data and how it will be used It can be temping to scale a point value when read e g to change the units of measurement or 263 Performance SECTION 20 Best Practices 20 2 Performance always perform a calculation e g calculate a running average or to format it e g make 1700 become 17 00 Instead consider
203. e with time based operations Provisions are given to both 12 hour and 24 hour time formats System point Point type 12Hour Integer 0 12 E in 12 hour format SAMPM Text AM PM indicator for 12 hour clock form System Points SECTION 3 Points System point Point type Hour Integer 0 23 Hours in 24 hour format Millisecond Integer 0 999 Number of milliseconds Minute Integer o O59 59 Minutes 3 11 2 Date Points The following table describes system points for use with date based operations Provisions are given for numerical and alphanumerical formats System point Point type 95 DayOfMonth Day of the month DayOfYear 1 366 Day of the year Month Integer 1 12 Month 1 January 12 Dec MonthName Text Month name e g February ShortMonthName Text Abbreviated month name e g Feb ShortWeekDayName Text Abbreviated weekday name e g Wed ShortYear Integer Abbreviated year e g 95 WeekDay Integer Day of the week 0 Sun 6 Sat WeekDayName Text Weekday name e g Wednesday WeekOfYear Integer 0 51 Week number for the year 3 11 3 Internal Points The following table describes system points for use with interrogating current system settings such as memory and disk space restrictions and other system resources 47 System Points SECTION 3 Points AvailableMemory Integer 0 2 147 483 647 Amount of available memory in bytes DemoMode Boole
204. ealpoint 5467 7658 To two decimal places the value of MyRealpoint is 54 2f MyRealpoint becomes To two decimal places the value of MyRealpoint is 5467 76 Combinations of format specifiers are possible 3s to two decimal places the value of MyRealpoint is 64 2 MyTextpoint MyRealpoint becomes Hello to two decimal places the value of MyRealpoint is 5467 76 The can be used in various fields for example In Alarm Raised and Cleared Messages e g Alarm Raised Boiler Temperature too high Current value is 1d BoilerTemp As captions for popup edit box animations This is useful as the captions are then dynamically translated e g Captions Captaonstring As parameter to MessageBox This is useful to help convert numbers to strings e g MessageBox Error ErrorNum occurred As parameter to LogError or LogEvent This too is useful to help convert numbers to strings e g LOGE ror Error ErrorNum occurred Priority Titles in Graphs and Charts useful for translations again e g TELS TULETEE CIIN Jj In Tooltips for dynamic information Tooltip texts Tool Tapst ring T In Report templates See Script Reference GenerateReport for more information 91 Embedding Point Values in Text SECTION 3 Points See Chapter 6 Point Substitution Settings and FAQ Creating Reports and HTML Reports for related information 92 Objects SECTION 4 Objects 4 1 Obje
205. eans the specified file could not be copied This is most often caused by the file already being in use or locked Reboot the machine and attempt installing before running any Omron software This error can also appear when attempting to install on a operating system that does not support extended European characters e g Japanese or Chinese Windows During installation on the Select Components dialog box select CX Supervisor package and click Change Scroll to the bottom of the list of sub components and deselect Language Files This will prevent language files including those using extended European characters being installed How do I address extended memory banks in PLCs In the point editor where you configure the PLC address enter a hyphen and the bank number for example E32000 3 Or depending on PLC type EM32000 3 This will address memory location 32000 in bank 3 Why can t see all my installed controls in the Insert Object dialog box Under Windows 2000 and Windows XP the Insert Object dialog box is not able to see all the controls installed on the PC These include the MS Forms 2 0 controls that are installed as part of MS Office 289 290 Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions This is by Microsoft s design for these operating systems however it is possible to force the old operation depending on which controls you need to expose for use in CX Supervisor Contact your supplier to receive d
206. ecipe Editor LS Colfee American gt Coffee ELEI Es Coffee Irish Click the 24 button to view details with large icons Click the button to view details with normal icons Click the button to view details as a list Click the button to view details as a list including name type expression priority and description information The details can be sorted in ascending order by clicking once or in descending order by clicking twice in the appropriate field A summary of recipe information is available by selecting the Recipe Information button The resultant dialog box shows the overall number of recipes in the project To exit the dialog box click the Close button The Recipe Information dialog box is shown as follows Recipe Information REA Ged Total Number of Recipes 10 4 Creating a New Recipe 154 Open the Recipe Editor as described in chapter 10 Viewing Recipes in the Recipe Editor To add a new recipe click the j button the Add Recipe dialog box opens Creating a New Recipe SECTION 10 Recipes Recipe Mame Coffee British Recipe Ingredients Ingrechent Name Linked to Port Quantity Expression When all the information has been provided for the new recipe selecting the OK button adds the new recipe definition to the project while the Cancel button aborts this add operation Note The short cut keyboar
207. ecting to Omron Industrial Componenti occcoccconcnoncnnno 259 19 1 Adding a Point Linked to a Parameter oooccnncccncnncccnnccnncnnnncnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnonnnnrnnnnnnnennnonnnnnnnnnanrnnnnnnaness 259 SECTION 20 Best Practicar 263 2001 O A a Mavalind acta united watetuahooaiduddad S 263 20 1 1 Design your page layouts and navigation T OW ccccoonccccocnnccocnnononcnnnnnnncnnnnnononennnnanoconas 263 20 1 2 Use Logical Point names instead of physical addresses cccoonccccoccnnccccnncnncnnonanononanonnnnoos 263 202 JIPCMOMIMANCE nani rd iii sidad 264 20 2 1 Organise the PLC Memory properly occoocccccoccncccccnccconnccnncncnoncnnonanononnnnnonnncnonnnnnonancnnnnnnnnnnas 264 2073 PROMISE A A AAA A A EOS 266 2074 AIDTaWIN O irradian 267 200 e DS OS 268 200 Dala oo Ia 269 Appendix A Configuring a PC for Remote ConmnectiOD ccconncconacccnncccnnnnnonnaoo 271 A 1 Configuring a Client PC running Windows XP Service Pack 2 0ooocccoooccccccnocconnnncconccnnncnncnnnacinonnnnons 271 A 2 Configuring a Client PC running Windows XP oocccccnnnccncccccccoccnnnnnncononcncnononnnnnnnancnnnnnnnnnnnonanenennnaness 271 A 3 Configuring a Client PC running Windows NT or 2000 occcccconcncccccccnnccnoncnncnnoncnnnononnnnonnnncnnnonanennnss 271 A 4 Configuring a Server PC running Windows XP Service Pack B ooooooocccccccnoccccnccnnnoncnncconencnnncnnnnanncns 272 A 5 Configuring a Server PC running Windows XP occocoonccccccoccncccoccn
208. ed files plus files to install to the specific directory to be used to distribute the runtime project These files can be on a removable Memory Stick or later burnt to a distribution CD or even to floppy disk if the project is small enough Click on Create Runtime Install Disc from the Project menu The Save Runtime As dialog box opens ready to create an installation to the desired folder Refer to chapter 6 Save Runtime As for further information regarding the Save Runtime As dialog box The files are not compressed This feature does not support large projects that need to span multiple disks The Runtime environment itself is not copied and must still be installed from a legitimate source Any ActiveX components used are not copied and should be installed on the target machine using the supplier s instructions Support files used by any ActiveX control cannot be detected and are not copied These will need to be added manually This includes e Omron OPC Client settings stored in OPC file e Omron Industrial Component communication settings stored in MSC file e Any bitmaps when using Microsoft Image control e Any file linked to by an OLE object objects with embedded files should be Ok Existing databases or those specified by dynamic connections cannot be detected and are therefore not copied These will need to be added manually Report Templates used by script cannot be detected and are therefore not copied These will nee
209. ed in a similar fashion to points on a PLC To read or write table memory use the prefix T followed by the address For example to access address 1000 in table memory use the data location T1000 VR memory is addressed in a similar fashion but with the prefix VR For example to read address 500 the format is VR500 If a point in VR memory is configured as type IEEE float then all values will be rounded to integers since the communication protocol doesn t currently support floating point addressing of this memory area The following example describes how to read and write Trajexia TJ1 data in a CX Supervisor application It assumes that both CX Supervisor and the TJ1 driver are already installed on a user s PC Preparation Setting up the points 1 Start CX Supervisor 2 Either create a new CX Supervisor project or open an existing project 3 Use the toolbar to select the Device Setup dialog box and press the Add button 4 Select TJ1 Device as the device type and give the device an appropriate name A network of Ethernet should be automatically selected Network Type Elhernel 7 Setlings Comment 5 Click the Settings button next to Device Type and then select the model of the device you will be using Trajexia Devices SECTION 6 Projects Device Type Settings TII Device 6 Click the Settings button next to Network Type and then configure the communicatio
210. edged Text Acknowledged Auto Acknowledged Text Automatically Acknowledged In the On Alarm Automatically Display area set the Alarm Status Viewer and Alarm History Viewer settings as required When these options are set When an alarm occurs the Current Alarms viewer or Alarm History viewer respectively is automatically displayed in runtime Set the Maximum entries in Status Viewer and Maximum entries in History Log fields to the desired values The numbers specify how many messages are displayed in the respective viewer dialog boxs in runtime Select the Log system start stop messages setting to ON if required If more messages exist than are requested to be displayed the most recent messages are displayed in preference to older messages The values shown above are sensible defaults In the Alarm Status Messages area if the User Defined Text option is set default messages for Raised Text Cleared Text Acknowledge Text and Auto Acknowledge Text can be applied If the Use Language File Text option is set the alarm status messages default to the supplied language file The Alarm Sound button allows the selection of an audible warning which may be played when an alarm occurs in runtime The Open Waveform File dialog box is shown below 93 Settings SECTION 6 Projects Open Waveform File Fie Name List Files of Type aveto Hle vis Note If the PC installation of CX Supervisor is on a networked machine
211. edures or complex configuration Instead of having to learn how to use 100 or more custom toolkits users will only have to learn one set of tools because all OPC drivers will work the same way OPC s purpose is to compel the automation industry suppliers to push all device drivers toward a standard form Essentially OPC defines a common interface that permits interface development work to be performed once and then easily reused The OPC standard requires hardware suppliers to provide front line data collection and distribution They are the most familiar with how to access the device s internal data efficiently These devices then become OPC servers providing data to OPC client applications consistently Application developers can then write code in any language deemed appropriate The latest version of the OPC standard is version 2 This replaces the earlier version 1 standard CX Supervisor uses an OPC version 2 interface to connect to an OPC Server which is version 2 compliant Note that the OPC version 1 interface has been superseded and is not supported Users of CX Supervisor may need some basic understanding of OPC For more information on OPC see the OPC Foundation web site at www opcfoundation org For instructions on configuring your DCOM settings for connection to remote PCs see Appendix A 17 1 1 A Brief History of OPC Data Access In the early 1990s a group of people from several important companies involved in the creati
212. el These settings can be edited by double clicking the CDM file in Explorer to edit the PLC settings without recompiling the software Allow advanced script access to PLC via CX Server control adds a new ActiveX control named CXServer no hyphen which can be accessed from any script to perform advanced PLC functions If you already have a graphical object called CXServer then turn this option off Click the OK button to accept the settings or the Cancel button to abort 6 11 Runtime Security 6 11 1 Configured Users In a runtime application it is possible to apply security measures in the development environment so that only sufficiently privileged users of the runtime application can access certain elements It is also possible to housekeep security information within the runtime environment with privileged users able to add amend or remove users There are four levels of user privilege available in CX Supervisor e Operator level privilege e Supervisor level privilege e Manager level privilege e Designer level privilege User configuration in the development environment is handled by the Configured Users dialog box Select Configured Users from the Runtime Security menu The Configured Users dialog box opens Manager Manager Operator Operator Supervisor Supervisor User Attributes Designer Designer Designer Designer web access for this user Use Windows login credentials 98 Runtime Security
213. el and view the Network settings In the list of network components look for Microsoft Remote Registry If it does not exist follow these steps to add it 1 oO 0 A In the Network settings ensure User level access control is selected on the Access Control tab From the Configuration tab click Add to add a Network component Choose Service from the type list and click Add Click Have Disk and browse your Windows CD Select the path Admin Nettods remotReg for Win95 CD or Tools Reskit NetAdmin RemotReg for Win98 and select regsrv inf Follow screen prompts to complete installation and reboot if necessary On the server machine select Passwords from the Control Panel Ensure the Enable remote administration of this server option is checked 7 Add all required user ids to the Administrators list by clicking Add Windows ME no longer includes the Microsoft Remote Registry network service on the product CD but this can still be installed and used from any Windows 95 or Windows 98 CD ROM using the above steps This product is no longer supports Windows 95 It is recommended to upgrade to Windows 2000 or Windows XP Professional DDE Appendix F Obsolete Features F 3 2 System Points F 4 DDE The following System Points are obsolete and are no longer updated Scripts and expressions will currently still compile but their value at Runtime will always be 0 GDIResources 0 100 Percentage of GD
214. el button to leave the gauge unchanged Click the t button then click or click and drag on the page to insert a graph To edit the graph double click on it The Scatter Graph Wizard dialog box opens Creating and Editing Control Objects SECTION 4 Objects Vy 2 Ons Scatter Graph Wizard M Configuration Altnibutes Title Cancel Me Sample Rate 30 Second ise Max Samples fico e Scatter Symbol Tepe x Cross Font Scatter Symbol Colour ji Scatter Background Colour MN he Project Colours le 3D Frame Auto Size Font Expressions Aas Browse Y Apis Browse The Wizard allows entry in the Configuration Attributes and Expressions fields 1 Oo of W Enter the frequency of data sampling in the Sample Rate field in this example the sample rate is every thirty seconds Enter the maximum number of samples to be displayed on the scatter graph in the Max Samples field Select the type of symbol to represent the data Select the colour of the symbol representing the data Select the colour of the scatter graph background Toggle the Project Colours and 3 D Frame settings as desired If set the Project Colours field allows the colour of the axis to be changed using the Palette The 3 D Frame option enables the graph to appear with a 3 D frame Either enter an arithmetic expression for the X and Y axis or select one through the Browse button An expression poi
215. eliminating a lot of the system integration problems caused by lack of open standards that exist between automation devices systems and manufacturing software After an automation system is installed OPC will not improve business bottom line directly however OPC will provide a common method to access real time information The real key to improving the bottom line is to distribute and use the information throughout the business value chain 17 2 Using CX Supervisor with OPC Servers 1 2 3 The exact procedure for connecting CX Supervisor to Third Party OPC Servers will depend on the server being used Consult your server documentation for full details However the following is a basic overview Start the OPC Server and configure any settings and workspace items as described in the vendor s manual 1 Start CX Supervisor and open your application 2 Open the Point Editor by selecting the Point Editor option from the Utilities menu or by clicking the 2 button 3 Inthe Point Editor dialog box click the button in the toolbar to open the Add Point dialog box 4 In the Add Point dialog box move to the I O Type options and select the Input Output or Input Output option as appropriate Note that the I O Update Rate and I O Attributes options and displayed 5 Inthe I O Attributes options select OPC Other and click the Setup button This will open the Communications Control Attributes dialog box 6 Inthe Communications Con
216. en there the system will keep 24 Dead files and one Live file i e 25 files in total Caution No backups are taken when a file is purged If you wish to keep any data you must ensure that backups are taken before purging occurs If the Keep all files check box is checked no automatic purging will take place and the System will store all the Dead files created until the disk is full Dead files can be copied moved deleted etc as they will not be written to again by the System Live files may be copied i e backed up to another directory while the Log file is open but they cannot be moved or deleted as they are locked by the System In order to delete or move a live file it must first be closed See Opening and Closing Log Files 11 3 1 4 Invalid Data Log Files Data log files generated during one project sessions will continue to be used in subsequent sessions if they are still live For example if a system runs during the day and is shut down at night then a Data Set with a duration of 7 days will use the same file for the whole 7 days If a session is halted and Data Set Items changed deleted or new ones added it is not valid to continue using the existing file When the session is restarted and Data Set file opened CX Supervisor checks to see if there are any differences between the current Data Set and the Data Set stored in the file If any differences are detected the System will mark the existing file as invalid by alterin
217. enables the data values to be logged at regular intervals Enter the interval as a number and from the pick list select the form e g 5 Second This method guarantees the value is checked and recorded at every interval However transients occurring between sample periods are not recorded which depending on the application may be a benefit The scale fields enable the graph upper and lower limits to be set and a scale label entered for the selected item Enter the Minimum value as the lower limit to be shown on the graph for this item Enter the Maximum value as the upper limit to be shown on the graph for this item Enter the Scale Label to be displayed This is a text field the contents of which are displayed by the Y scale of the graph The entry should be kept short but also be logical for clarification 11 2 4 1 Copy Cut Paste Options The Copy Cut and Paste options follow the windows convention and enable a selected Item to be copied or cut from one Data Set Group and then pasted into another As Item names within a Data Set must be unique when a copied Item is pasted back into the same Data Set the name is given a numerical suffix New or existing Items can be renamed and have their parameters edited by high lighting the Item and then selecting the Edit option from the popup menu When the Modify Item dialog box appears edit the appropriate parameters in the normal way 11 2 4 2 Adding Renaming Groups 168 The adding o
218. ens During runtime selecting the user input object by clicking the left mouse button results in the in place edit box or runtime User Input Text dialog box being displayed based on the contents of the development version omatt Enter New Text Eaa The user is provided with an instruction based on the Runtime Display Attributes field and a field in which the user enters the desired text Click the OK button to accept the value or the Cancel button to abort the operation An invalid entry typed in the editable field is exposed as an error once the OK button has been clicked 9 3 26 Common Colour Palette If an object or action has a colour associated with it the colour can be changed by clicking on the sample of the colour in the dialog box which describes the object or action The Colour Palette dialog box opens so that a new colour can be specified 151 Runtime Actions SECTION 9 Animation 152 Note Basic colors a Custom colors 11 SEES 11 MMMM ll EENEN 11 SEER ll IEEE EE EE EE Define Custom Colors gt cancel A colour can be selected by clicking on one of the palette colours This becomes the selected colour and is denoted as such in the Selected Colour field Alternatively a colour can be selected by specifying a colour name or number in the Colour Name field The selected colour within the palette can be mixed by using the red blue and green scroll bars to the right of the
219. ent by selecting the required Connection in the Tree View and then selecting the right menu option Connect If a Connection contains Recordsets that are set to auto open these will also be opened by the Connect option If all goes well and a valid connection is made the Database Connection Icon will be adorned with a lightning bolt If not then this is probably due to an error in the Connection String 12 2 3 Database Errors A detailed description of what type of error occurred supplied by the underlying Data Provider can be viewed by clicking that the right menu option Show Last Error Whenever an error is generated by a Data Provider a description of the error and its source will be displayed in a Dialog The Show Last Error option is specific to each Connection Example The following error was generated by the Jet Database Engine due to a typo in the Database name Database Error Ed Source Microsoft JET Database Engine Could not find file C Program FilesOmron SCS ADemosiDiataba source Nor pect 12 2 4 Database Connection String dialog box Connection to a Database is performed by means of a Connection String Because different Data Providers require different information to connect you to a data store these strings can be quite complex and cumbersome For this reason CX Supervisor will automatically create a valid connection string for your selected data source if it s supported This strin
220. enu 15 Reading and Writing Properties at Runtime SECTION 5 ActiveX Objects 2 With the ActiveX Property Browser displayed select the appropriate ActiveX control This will list the full range of property names available for that control in the browser and their values 3 The Value of each Name can be changed as required by clicking in the value box and entering the new value Some options require you to enter specific information others provide a choice of entries from a drop down menu 4 To edit the values of other ActiveX controls simply click the control to select it The values of the previous object will be replaced with those of the new selection OMRONCXKnobCo Actives Property Browser OMRON CE nobCoritrall Properties ILAR Name Value Back Colour 12632256 BorderStyle 1 Raised Title Fontlolour 0 TitlePosition 0 Top CommesServerN ame Uninitialized PLEN ame Hot Set ltem ame Hot Set Updater ate 1 DisplapMajorTicks 1 True DisplayMinorTicks 1 True Display ajorlnits DisplayMinerU nits MajorTickInteryal MinorTickInterval MinG auge alue Ms ane alie n property DisplayM ajorLinits In addition to editing properties with the Property Browser many ActiveX controls support their own custom Property Pages These may be accessed in design time by either double clicking the control or right clicking the control and selecting Properties from the
221. equired By convention this is made the same as the name of the parameter defined within the database but this is not essential The index is used to determine which parameter in the Query to associate the value with The index is automatically incremented for each parameter that is added to the Recordset The Data Type list will be populated with a selection of available data types The correct data type for the parameter being configured must be selected otherwise the Recordset will fail to open Use point to hold parameter value Point Value When unchecked the constant Value specified is passed as the parameter to the query When checked the current value of the point is passed as the parameter The name of the point to be used The Browse button may be used to select a current point or add a new one The constant value to be used 191 Configuring Schemas SECTION 12 Databases 12 6 Configuring Schemas schemas enable information about a Database to be obtained from a Provider There are a large number of Schema Types available The most useful feature of schemas is the ability to obtain Table and Query names from the Database in fact schemas are used by the Development Environment to populate the Combo boxes when working with live connections The information to be returned from the Provider is determined by specifying a Schema Type and a Criteria The Criteria argument is an array of values that can be used to limit t
222. er Microsoft Access Driver mdb DBQ C MyTestApps Balloon AuditTrail BALLOON2_20101008_1 mdb SystemDB C MyTestApps Balloon BALLOON2_Audit mdw Uid Guest 13 7 2 Using Microsoft Excel The following examples show how to access the CFR information using the various versions of Excel Microsoft Excel 2003 e From within Excel select the Data Import External Data Import Data menu option This will invoke the standard Open File dialog Select the appropriate CFR database file and click Open e The Data Link Properties dialog will now be displayed with the selected database file and user name Admin shown in the Connection tab Change the User name to Guest as shown below En Data Link Properties Provider Connection Advanced All Specify the following to connect to Access data 1 Select or enter a database name CWO mon 4uditauditT raud 20100928 1 mdb 2 Enter information to log on to the database User name Guest W Blank password iv Allow saving password Test Connection Cancel Help 218 How to Access Information from a CFR Database SECTION 13 CFR Title 21 Part 11 e Select the Advanced tab and ensure that the read checkbox is selected By default the Share Deny Write option may also be selected but other options are not selected e Select the All tab and scroll down to the Jet OLEDB System database entry Click the
223. er Associations 190 When a Recordset which is defined as a Server Query is opened the query is executed and the set of records produced The Server Query may be defined in the database as requiring parameters to be passed which allow criteria to be passed to the query Recordsets defined in CX Supervisor as Server Queries may have Parameter Associations added to the recordset Recordsets defined as a Table Name or SQL Text do not use parameters hence any Parameter Associations are ignored Configuring Parameter Associations SECTION 12 Databases 12 5 1 12 5 2 12 5 3 12 5 4 12 5 5 12 5 6 Name index Data Type Parameter associations provide a means of supplying values to parameters whenever a Server Query is run Each required parameter defined within the query is associated with a point or constant value At the time the Query is run the current value of the point or the constant value is passed to the query Under the Development Environment the points default value is used Parameter Associations are added by right clicking the Recordset and selecting Add Parameter from the popup menu The following dialog box is shown EX Parameter Propestes S Name Start Date _ Cancel Inder fi Data Type Date Time Valuer 9 93 Use point to hold parameter value A unique Parameter Association name will be automatically provided This can be modified to provide a more meaningful name if r
224. er Error GOG6S iniciara 305 Appendix E Using with the Omron DyaloX ooonccocccconccocccccocccooncccnnncnancrnnnnnnnns 307 E 1 So A A 307 Ed ASA MN A SUE A eee 307 E2 Communication Seling Seara a couse eenaseusacesicnendeesatanagetsesdebeaccesdtanananco es 308 Appendix F Obsolele Feature Sincera 309 F 1 Windows 98 Windows ME Windows NT cscsssssesseeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaaaaaaaeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 309 F 2 Configuring a OPC DCOM Client PC running Windows 98 or Me scccceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeesaaaeeeess 309 F 3 Configuring a DCOM OPC Server PC running Windows 98 or Me oocccccccccccnccnnccncccnccnnccnnnnnnons 310 Ele WrNdowS Oo ces Sec winder asi laa 310 Fe CY SCION Srta carlos 311 F 4 A A 311 FAT DDE CHEM RON Sutil ia diodos 311 F 4 2 DDE Server POINTS essien oe a R A a A AAA EAE D ER 312 Edo DUDE PON Su oa 313 F 5 OLE AULOMANON ini dead 317 F 6 CE OV CI CW be cele als a A ic 317 F 7 oDer Packager traia drid rada 318 Entel Creating an Object Prom No Wendy 318 F2 Creating alt ODec From a File aid a iia 320 EX A A dls cae 321 F 7 4 Converting Package ODjeltiuiiia a 322 Appendix G Glossary Of Te MS iii 323 REVISION MISION secesnom aros Eai aa N ESENE 331 14 15 16 About the Graphics Editor 1 1 1 2 SECTION 1 Graphics Editor SECTION 1 Graphics Editor This chapter describes the Graphics Editor and the various tools and controls available It also provides in
225. er a dee 45 Optimisation ot PEC Communications sisse a a e aa a E Aa AE E 45 3 9 1 Greatlon Of all Anay PON iso 45 OMEN OO Ul sss asa siento A ine te osc 46 VSEM ONS ieee in dep och eta cnet hs Seals es seis aor Pate thins ance pes eee dae aL ee emanate lok 46 Sedat TIME IP OMS ts 46 Sia ID ALCHP OUNS sakcwenes ees ceeerbe chentaacearct ea contuueetecennale ences aresecvoceeee ten cen saxueacooveeaeen ouencn ne aasuateees 47 3119 MLSE al ONS 4325 a ccc chant adnede inset a ita 47 NE A o A ee 48 3 11 5 MOUSE POi N S oie 48 3 110 AA nr PONS a eR eC a Re eee 49 aser a 68 gl a8 6 POIN S a ld coin en 49 Ses PLE COMMUNICACONS PONS de eet 49 ATG eC POIS decidan pesc 50 PANUNG FON S PP o O E O O 50 Table of Contents 3 13 312 PRINS UD ea celdas 50 A A O ed Oe ee eee 50 o e vd 1014100 ce ne crs Sees sd haus Neate tees aoc eet ca oa eee teen eee ieee 50 Embedding Point VALES il Vex sstccaceceen sac nodes ea oh ecacbecsinaack dozen dasewed on apaeeuse a dee 50 Sll USO Format SOSCIICN lola ice 51 SECTION 4 ODISC Sidra 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 ODI OCIS a a O E OOO E A 53 Ed ODJECE ana a eel ed ee ee ee ea eee 53 PE A ea ict act ce cae es ec ts arc i arn teers Sane See tae sadhana lee dome anes Kee 53 Be2 22 IAC SMAI rrysaeacinacsis hacen aa warned a E te 53 A253 O aston cist E A le a saga ate ie Gace 53 Creating and Editing Graphic ObjectS ccccooocccnccconnnncnonncnnnnnannnnnonononononnnnnnonan
226. er of the object from the top left of the page in pixels The second two panels show the extent of the object in pixels 1 6 Text Bar An illustration of the CX Supervisor Text Bar is as follows Times New Roman ho m z u liil 23 Text Bar SECTION 1 Graphics Editor 1 6 1 Font Name 1 6 2 Font Size 24 The Font Name field contains a list of fonts which are available on the host version of Windows The list is presented in alphabetical order and only details typeface families This does not include bold or italic variants as this attribute is set by using the appropriate button The following illustration shows the control in de selected state Times New Roman E The following illustration shows the control in selected state Times New Roman ZapiChancery Zap Dingb The Font Name field displays the current font attribute for the selected object s To change the font for a block of text highlight it and click either the down arrow adjacent to the edit part of the control or into the edit part of the control itself for the Font Name field The control then displays a list of available fonts from which the desired typeface may be selected If more than one block of text is selected with each having different font atiributes the edit part of the control is empty However selecting a font from the supplied list still sets the font attribute for all the selected group of text blocks Font
227. er requesting or sending point values For example a value could be entered into a cell in Microsoft Excel which would update a CX Supervisor point F 4 1 DDE Client Points l 2 ee A DDE client point sends data to or requests data from an external server application This chapter explains how to create points that make use of the CX Supervisor DDE Client capabilities In order for data to be transferred between a point and a server application the point must uniquely identify the application and the data that is to be used in the transfer DDE applications use a three tiered identification system to distinguish themselves from other DDE applications An application name is at the top of the hierarchy the application name refers to a server application e g EXCEL A topic name further defines a server application e g for Microsoft Excel the topic would define the worksheet to be used e g SHEET1 XLS a server can support one or more topics Finally each topic can have one or more item names which uniquely identifies a data item within a topic i e R1C1 or a cell name reference identifies a single cell within a Microsoft Excel worksheet Example A DDE Client point named DDE1 that connects to Microsoft Excel worksheet Sheet1 xls and cell R1C1 is created 1 Select the Add Point button from the Point Editor toolbar The Add Point dialog box opens 311 DDE Note Appendix F Obsolete Features 2 Enter DDE1 in th
228. ers may allow access via a button Refer to chapter 6 Projects or chapter 9 Animation as appropriate The Alarm History dialog box is as follows Alarm History S 27 06 98 09 05 26 Opened C SYSMAC SCSV20Beta Demos 27 06 98 03 07 44 Closed Alarm Log 2706498 09 06 44 Opened CASTS5MALASLSW20B eta Demos 270698 09 08 54 Closed Alarm Log 27 06 98 09 09 06 Opened C SYSMAC SCSV20B ela Demos 720698 09 11 27 Closed Alarm Log 28 05 98 10 11 18 Opened C SYSMAC SCSV20B etal Demos 20 06 98 10 15 08 Closed Alarm Log j 20 5 00 1016 77 Mnanad PACVEMAR O OU HE aa Mamari El This dialog box always shows the log listed in date and time order The widths of the alarm fields can be widened or narrowed as required using the mouse to drag the column boundaries The E button causes the messages in the Alarm History dialog box to be printed Before printing ensure that the printer has been set up correctly The alarm log itself is simply a text file projeciname UAL that may be examined or printed using any of the usual utilities available under Windows such as Microsoft Notepad When the alarm log becomes full it is copied to the alarm backup projectname UAB and a new alarm log file created This switch over system uses a quick append function for every alarm and prevents intensive write operations Associating Points with Actions and Events SECTION 9 Animation SECTION 9 Animation This chapter descr
229. es to prevent such damage Given the possibility of SCADA failure it is not acceptable to implement such failsafes in software Care should also be paid to the design of software control to allow and cope with the possible refusal of operation from the PLC This section covers some good practices to ensure excellent performance 20 2 1 Organise the PLC memory properly This is probably the single most important practice to provide maximum performance and the best responsiveness It is important to design the PLC program and SCADA application together This will naturally helo create arrays of information and optimise communications allowing CX Server to collect data in the most efficient manner Consider the examples in the following 2 figures 264 Performance SECTION 20 Best Practices PLC Memory Integer Page 1 1 sec l Page l 5 sec Page 2 1 sec Page 1 1 sec Page l 5 sec Page 2 1 sec Page 1 1 sec Page 1 5 sec Page 2 1 sec Figure 2 Bad grouping example In Figure 2 we see the PLC Programmer has arbitrarily chosen to group data by its format Integers then BCD then Floats or even worse not at all When the SCADA is written this data is used by different pages and different update rates The different colours are to indicate that each block must be read individually totalling 9 communication requests which could be for as few as 9 memory addresses PLC Memory 1 sec Page 1 S sec 5
230. escribed in chapter 9 Common Colour Palette To abort the Colour Change Digital edit click the Cancel button By clicking the Browse button a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions When completed click the OK button If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message opens 9 3 17 Enable Disable Objects can be enabled or disabled This is achieved using the Enable Disable dialog box To access the Enable Disable dialog box to add an action select Enable Disable from the animation list and click the Add Action button To access the Enable Disable dialog box to modify an action select Enable Disable from the animation list and click the Modify Action button For a list of the objects to which this action is applicable refer to chapter 9 Objects On selection of the Enable Disable action the Enable Disable dialog box opens Enable Disable Digital Expressions Enable Disable State Enable whde TRUE Disable wide FALSE C Disable while TRUE Enable while FALSE ddi To specify a change in the enabled disabled state of an object enter a Boolean expression in the Digital Expression field Non Boolean expressions may be entered as long as the result is TRUE or FALSE Whether the object is enabled or disabled when the expression is TRUE is chosen with the Enable Disable State settings 143 Runtime Actions SECTION 9 Animation 9 3 18 R
231. esigner 3 11 08 2010 14 39 48 simple Alarm Medium Acknowledged Cleared Designer Pl Record IJ s F e el of 3 Opening the Events table will show a set of records similar to those shown below Events Table AE Eventid Date Time Message Used Auditld AuditNote i 11 08 2010 14 39 50 Event Message Designer 21182010 14 40 35 Cx Server Project closed Designer E E Opening the Errors table will show a set of records similar to those shown below trrors lable E a FA Ernod Date Time Pmorty Message Used Auditid AudtNote A A 14 39 52 Eror Message Designer 13 5 Logging Audit Trails to an SQL Database The same methods as described above for the Microsoft Access database can be used to log to an SQL Server Database To use an SQL Server Database the database must first be created and the connection string must be configured CX Supervisor provides supports for SQL Server database as detailed below The test project described in the section above could be converted to be used 210 Logging Audit Trails to an SQL Database SECTION 13 CFR Title 21 Part 11 Function 13 5 1 SQL Server Database Prerequisites The following conditions need to apply before logging to an SQL Server database can proceed 1 Ensure you have access to an SQL Server 2 The necessary security permissions are applied to update the database to be used for audit logging 3 A database is created to
232. esting data from external DDE Applications such as Microsoft Excel DDE Server data transfers are initiated by external DDE Applications either sending or requesting data to or from CX Supervisor Refer to the CX Supervisor Script Language Reference Manual for further details F 4 3 1 DDE Client Array Points This chapter explains how to create DDE Client Array points This is similar to the way normal DDE Client points are created except extra information is required to specify the range of the array and also whether it is to be stored as a row or column in the Server application L2 A 1 Select the Add Point button from the Point Editor toolbar The Add Point dialog box opens 2 Enter a meaningful name in the Point Name field 3 Set the I O Attributes setting to DDE and click the Setup button The DDE attributes dialog box opens 4 Enter an application in the Server Name field 5 Enter a topic in the Topic Name field 6 Enter the item in the Item Name field It is also necessary to specify how the array is to be transferred For instance in Microsoft Excel this is either as a row or column the default is as a row which can be omitted The following are valid array item names R1C1 R3C1 col first last c R5C2 R5C5 r1c1 r3c1 column 7 Enter the number of elements in the array in the Array Size field This must match with the specified range in the ltem Name field In the CX Supervisor Runtime environmen
233. etails of the required Registry changes How does Sleep work The CX Supervisor Sleep function is designed to create a short pause in script execution The parameter specifies the duration of the pause in milliseconds For example lt statements A gt lt statements B gt Sleep 100 lt statements C gt In this example statements B will begin executing immediately when statements A complete though statements C will not begin execution until 100ms after statements B have completed Note 1 In a well designed truly event driven system use of the Sleep statement should never be required Always consider if the statements after the Sleep should be in their own script executed when a Condition occurs Note 2 The Granularity or intervals differs between Operating Systems In Windows NT and 2000 expiration is checked every 10ms so Sleep 100 actually pauses for 100 to 109 99 milliseconds depending on when it was started For Windows 98 and ME the granularity is 55ms so Sleep 100 actually pauses for 110 2 times 55 to 164 99 milliseconds nearly 3 times 55 For this reason Sleep statements can act differently on different Operating Systems making the application OS dependant Note 3 Sleep should never be used as a delay for timing processes for the following reasons The actual time delay depends on the OS There is always an error of 0 to 1 granularity depending on when the action is started Th
234. ew menu All the available grid sizes are shown along with a Snap to Grid option which forces graphical objects selected by the user to align according to the current grid setting Note The buttons can be customised to remove or add favourite functions Tip of the Day On startup a Tip of the Day dialog box opens All tips can be reviewed using the Next and Previous buttons This dialog box can be turned off or turned back on from the Help menu 25 Tip of the Day 26 SECTION 1 Graphics Editor Creating a Page 2 1 2 2 SECTION 2 Pages SECTION 2 Pages This chapter explains the concept of pages The chapter covers creating amending printing and saving pages Creating a Page Note A project must consist of at least one page To create a new page CX Supervisor must currently have a project open If no project is currently open either click the Open button to open a previously saved project or select New from the Project menu to create a new project When you first create a project CX Supervisor creates a new page for you automatically For more details concerning projects refer to chapter 6 Projects With a project open click the D button to create a new blank page An example of a new blank page is shown as follows feats tS apm lied fle Edi Yer Doed iiei aido Hts ee rhs set Dost E A s mman A ee o a tARN Mee Los ir Ex _ l i T i F Fah pat l a a Amen
235. executes every second If an invalid expression is entered an error message opens when the OK buiton is clicked Execution linbules Senpi Name Ba Trigger Event EREE Expression es Note If On Regular Interval is specified a valid interval is required in the Interval 9 3 4 Script Code Time field in units of milliseconds The script is started at the interval specified by this period If an invalid time is entered an error message opens when the OK button is clicked Execution Atributes Script Name Scnpt o Tigga Event MEE AAG interval Time 00 Miliseconds Script code is entered in the script code text field To start a new line press lt Return gt Refer to the Script Language Manual for explicit details regarding the construction and syntax of script code Expressions consist of operators and operands e Operators are relational arithmetic logical and include many functions e Operands are constants or point variables The script language can also contain Java and Visual Basic script Refer to the Script Language Manual for details Scripts can be generated either by typing directly into the script code text field or by using the pull down menu commands When using the pull down menu commands the user is assisted in the completion of the parameters to the command via a series of dialog boxs The dialog boxs displayed vary according to the type of command being entered 133 Runtime Actions SE
236. f data to be logged Select either Boolean Integer or Real For points this is automatically picked up from the points database For expressions the required type must be selected The Deadband field enables a percentage limit or Deadband to be applied to the logging expression This allows the value of the expression to change within the percentage limit without being logged This is particularly useful when logging analogue values which are subject to noise Each sample is checked when the value changes for On Change sampling or every log period for On Interval against the last logged value While the value varies 167 Data Log Editor 11 2 3 2 Sample Rate 11 2 3 3 Scale 11 2 4 Editing Items SECTION 11 Data Logging within the deadband the values are ignored Immediately the value exceeds the deadband limits the new value will be logged This may dramatically reduce file size and ease analysis Entering a value of 0 i e no deadband will cause every sample to be logged The sample rate options are used to determine how data will be recorded select either on change or on interval The default is interval When the On Change option is selected data will be logged only when the value actually changes This ensures all transient information is logged even if changes occur faster than maximum sample rate and also ensures periods of inactivity do not generate duplicated data The On Interval sample rate option
237. field Name the name of the field column title Type the fields Data Type 189 Configuring Parameter Associations Note Note SECTION 12 Databases Size the maximum width of the field Add used to add new fields to a record The Name Type and Size properties are fixed for all entries of the column whereas the field value depends on the current position of the Recordset The Add property is specifically designed to enable fields to be added together to create new records They are not involved in any read operations as with the other field property types For this reason the Automatically read on open checkbox is disabled when this type is applied When creating configurations to add new records you will need to create a Add association for every field required to create a valid record e primary keys non null values etc need to be catered for See DBAddNew for more details 12 4 4 1 Access field by index 12 4 4 2 Field Paging Note Note When checked a numeric index is used to identify a particular field instead of its name This is useful if you want to configure generic field associations Automatically read on open When checked the data is transferred from the Recordset field to the associated point when the Recordset is opened You can work with a single record at a time by associating points with the required fields and process the data one record at a time However if the point specified i
238. finition can be provided to replace strings in scripts and expressions used throughout CX Supervisor applications An associated string replaces the alias when used in a script or expression Select the Aliases button from the Script Editor dialog box The Alias Definitions dialog box opens Refer to chapter 6 Projects for more details on alias definitions 9 3 3 Execution Attributes The animation reacts to an event A script can be associated with an event depending on whether it is a project script page script or object script 132 Runtime Actions SECTION 9 Animation For a project or page script the following events trigger the execution of the script e On a condition based on a regular expression e Ata regular interval defined by an interval time e At the initialisation of the page or project e At the termination of the page or project For an object script the following events trigger the script e Following the user clicking once on the left mouse button e On a condition based on a regular expression To specify a trigger for the script select an option from the Trigger Event field Note If On condition is specified a valid relational expression is required in the Expression field The script is executed every time a variable included in the expression changes value and the result of the expression is TRUE For example the expression Second executes every second except when Second is zero whereas Second gt 0
239. following convention is used nnn will be appended to any duplicate filenames to make them unique where nnn 1 to 999 If you run out numbers the export will fail tidying up will remedy the problem Generated names depend on whether a single item or multiple items are selected for export 11 6 3 Single Selections If a single item is selected for export i e ltem3 in the root directory of MyData Set then the following file will be generated MyData Set1999011214ltem3 csv 11 6 4 Multiple Selections Note On Interval Items If a multiple selection of on interval items with the same interval is made then the name of the parent directory will be used e g if the items live in Group1 the following file will be generated MyData Set1999011214Groupl csv The file will contain a column for each item selected and they will share the Date and Time fields The milliseconds field will only be valid for one of the Items and should therefore be filtered out for this type of grouping If a multiple selection of on interval items with different intervals is made then any items with the same interval will be grouped together in the same file The same convention will be used as above except using the duplicate filenames rules described above If an item does not share any interval with any other Item then its name will be used in the filename For example If Items 11 12 I3 14 15 I6 are selected from Group1 of Data
240. for constants or point variables A symbol used as a function with infix syntax if it has two arguments e g or prefix syntax if it has only one argument e g NOT The CX Supervisor script language uses operators for built in functions such as arithmetic and logic A logic operator used to interrogate Boolean type points OR returns TRUE if any of the supplied arguments are TRUE An example of OR is that if a is a statement and b is a statement OR will return TRUE if either a and b are TRUE If both statements return FALSE then OR will return FALSE The combination and manipulation of pages containing objects within projects forms the basis of CX Supervisor More than one page can exist for each project The pages in a project provide the visual aspect of CX Supervisor corresponding to a display with the objects contained in each page providing a graphical representation of the system being monitored 327 Appendix G Glossary of Terms 328 Parameter Association Pixel PLC Point variable Point Project Real type Recipe Run Time Environment SCADA Server Server Application A Parameter Association enables values either constant or stored in a point to be passed to a Server Query A single displayable point on the screen from which a displayed image is constructed The screen resolution of the computer s Visual Display Unit VDU is defined by the number of pixels across an
241. format of the Data Log files to determine which file to open as Live and which file s to delete during purging and also for performing previous next file searches in the Data Log Viewer Note Additional files should never be copied into the Data Logging directory as the automatic purging mechanism may delete all the log files 169 Data Logging at Runtime SECTION 11 Data Logging 11 3 1 3 Number of files in a Data Set When a Data Set starts logging a file will be created to hold the logged items this file is known as a Live or Active log file There is only one Live file in a Data Set file set When the time period for a Data Set log file expires a new file is created with a more recent Timestamp this file then becomes the Live file and the previous file is now known as a Dead log file Over a period of time there can be many Dead files in a Data Set but only one live one If a limit has been set on the number of dead files to be kept when this number is reached the oldest file will be purged automatically as each new file is created The number of dead files to be kept for a particular Data Set is managed automatically by specifying the Number of Files to Keep from the Data Set Properties Parameters when a Data Set is created This field is only enabled when the Keep all files check box is unchecked Note There will always be one Live file for each Data Set For example if the number of files to keep is set to 24 th
242. from different vendors has historically been the number one headache in system integration OPC offers the opportunity to ease the pain and shorten the application develooment cycle This gets automation projects up faster which saves time for new projects and brings the benefit of automation to the process sooner 246 Using CX Supervisor with OPC Servers SECTION 17 Using CX Supervisor as an OPC 17 1 3 5 Who should care about OPC You should care about OPC if your applications are largely run in personal computers and you are involved with solving plant integration problems As a critical mass of servers and OPC enabled applications become available OPC is likely to become an important part of your plant integration tool set The OPC specification promises a future without proprietary interfaces that will greatly benefit both manufacturing customers and automation suppliers 17 1 3 6 How is OPC going to improve my bottom line From a business perspective the use of OPC for connectivity promises to reduce the cost of automation control and integration solutions By using OPC compliant products significant savings can be achieved through shorter development efforts and a wide choice of vendor hardware and software solutions For every automation system installed today a significant amount of time and money is spent ensuring that the system can share information with other systems and devices OPC will save the customer time and money by
243. g can be viewed and modified via the Connection String dialog box shown below when Advanced is pressed on the Add Modify Database Connection dialog box 183 Configuring a Connection SECTION 12 Databases Connection String Prode blicas Jet OLE DE 4 0 Data Sources data ounce Noted mdb If your data source is not supported or you have your own drivers for a particular database the Connection String can be modified using this dialog box consult your database documentation for the required connection string 12 2 4 1 User ld and Passwords If a connection to a database requires a user id or password this can be supplied by means of the connection string which can be modified via the Advanced Dialog as follows Commechon Strma 1Piondernd4 crane OLE OB 4 0 Cala Sources data pounce Mohammad mdb Uza ld Adra Pattee sacred If you make a mistake while editing the connection string the original string can be restored by selecting the Build Connection String button A new connection string will also be built automatically each time a change of Data Source is made 12 2 4 2 Example Connection Strings Listed below are some example connections strings for the listed providers Jet Provider Microsoft Jet OLEDB 3 5 1 Data Source cidbname mdb SQL Server Provider SQLOLEDB Data Source server_name Initial Catalog dbname User ld user_id Password user_password Index Server Provider MSIDXS Data Sour
244. g the Timestamp brackets from to and create a new file For example if a file Batch1 2000032922 dlv is detected as being invalid it will be renamed Batch1 2000032922 dlv A new Batch1 2000032922 dlv file will then be created to log the new data If the file Batch1 2000032922 dlv already exists then the current invalid file will be renamed Batch1 2000032922 1 dlv and so on This is most likely to occur during the development of an application when Data items are continually being amended and tested Invalid files are not part of the Data Set files and can not be purged or found by the File Management next or previous searches The data recorded in these files is not lost and can be viewed using the Data Log Viewer and exported from them using Export Log Invalid files can only be deleted using Windows explorer 170 Data Logging at Runtime SECTION 11 Data Logging 11 3 1 5 Data Set Period Examples The following examples show how the specified period Hour s Day s Month s is implemented while the System is running 1 Data Set period Hours If a Data Set named CV500 starts logging at 12 30 on the 7th March 1999 with a period of 6 hours the following files will be created EVOOO LOI I0S0 ALZAS If the s7stem is left running the Data Logging directory will contain the following files CV SOOT LOIS O77 4oly CV S00 L290 SO LL wy CVOOUTLIIIOS0SU0 wdivy CV S00 TLIGIO SUSU 6 dly The first f
245. ge dialog box to modify an action select Display Page from the animation list and click the Modify Action button Refer to chapter 9 Objects for a list of the objects to which this action is applicable On selection of the Display Page action the Display Page dialog box opens 139 Runtime Actions SECTION 9 Animation 9 3 13 Close Page 140 Display Page Available Pages Pages to be Displayed BALLHELP BALLOON Z BALL ELL Remove To specify a page for display select a page from the Available Pages list and click the Add button The page entry now appears in the Pages to be Displayed list More than one page can be selected for display If a selected page is no longer required select the entry from the Pages to be Displayed list and click the Remove button When completed click the OK button To abort the Display Page edit click the Cancel button CX Supervisor allows the specification of pages within a project to be removed from the display This is set up using the Close Page dialog box To access the Close Page dialog box select Close Page from the animation list and click the Add Action button To access the Close Page dialog box to modify an action select Close Page from the animation list and click the Modify Action button Refer to chapter 9 Objects for a list of the objects to which this action is applicable On selection of the Close Page action the Close Page dialog box
246. grammer project to be run 4 Close CX Programmer to end integrated simulation Simulator Configuration Device PLE Project C projects Simulatorhelp cxe Browse 6 13 1 Requirements and Limitations Both CX Programmer and CX Simulator must be installed to enable integrated simulation in CX Supervisor At the time of writing CX Simulator is limited to simulating a single CS or CJ series PLC For CX Programmer projects with multiple devices only the first device will be simulated NOTE The One Click simulation feature is designed to test the functionality of your PLC program and CX Supervisor application It is not intended to simulate communications or hardware performance and is likely to perform slower than the actual hardware 6 14 Save Runtime As 102 When the project has been compiled and run the compiled version of the project may be saved into another directory location or onto another disc for issue to the target equipment CX Supervisor asks for a location and name for the runtime project This is a standard Windows dialog box and operation depends on your operating system Please consult your Microsoft documentation for full details The default file type is SR2 Create Runtime Install Disk SECTION 6 Projects 6 15 Create Runtime Install Disk Note A CX Supervisor application can be packaged safely for authorised distribution by creating a runtime install disk The process copies all requir
247. h includes Project scripts Alarms and Recipes By default all areas are searched i e Project and Pages To perform a Find operation 1 Select the dl button or Find from the Edit menu 2 Type the text to find in the Find What field or select a previous entry from the drop down list The Browse button can be used to select an item 3 Select the area to search Project amp Pages searches all areas 4 Select the required options Output to pane 2 results in pane 1 to be saved for future use 5 Press the Find button to start the search or the Cancel button to abort the operation Output Window SECTION 6 Projects Find Find what mise e Search Project amp Pages Cancel I Match whole word only Browse Match case Output to pane 2 All occurrences of the text in the selected areas is shown in the Output window 6 19 Output Window The output window shows output from the Build and Find functions Ps Ea Searching For tamer Baker IrtervalScnptl 78 Mier rotate angle Bakery IntervalSenptl 93 Mover rotate angle LAL ETL Find in Fites 1 4 Find in Files 2 The window can be docked to any side of the screen or floated above other windows To enforce floating press lt Ctrl gt while moving the window or right click the window title and uncheck Allow Docking Build results are shown automatically during building and remain on screen if there are errors
248. h lo chi aN cea ad geek hl Aad ta 223 TAS Pages e cases shes nt debe cena 223 144 COMMU atl OM Sil io 224 149 Der lt POl erena ida 224 e DCOM SENINGS earen io 224 tar o O O 224 t48 A A GEO o A 224 SECTION 15 Multilingual Features ooccoccocconccooconcconcoanonacoanonnnnanonanonrnanenanonas 225 15 1 Developed io ated 225 15 2 Runtime Language Features coi A eae eked 226 15 2 1 Setting the Default Language coocccconncconncconnoconnncnnnncnnnononnnnnnnonannonannonannnnnnnnnnnnnnannenaninnos 226 16 3 R nime NMUMMMGUAl ir CAlUleS cara O ea eee ee 227 15 3 1 Changing Language at Runtime occcccccnccccnccocnconcncnonnnonnnononnnonnnonnnonnnnnonnnonnnnnonannnannnenanenos 227 195322 User Demed TO ria 228 15 4 Translating User Defined Text with the Translation ToOOl ccooccccccnncconccccnnoconnnconnonannncnnnnnnnnonos 228 15 5 Translating User Defined Text Manually cooooccccccnncoccnonocononocononononnncnonononononononnnonnnnnnonncnnonannnonos 230 15 6 Configuring Windows for Language SuppOTt ccccoccccccocnnccccnncconcnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononenonnnnnonos 231 15 621 WINDOWS XP ai A A i 231 1562 WINdOWS 2000 A Ai 231 15 63 Loading Old Proe lS a des eo ela o OE ds 232 19 Data AO VICWC Eee A A a e ds 233 15 Standard Web PAG CS ueno caidos 233 15 9 Adding Unsupported Runtime Languages ooccccoccncccccnccocnnnccncnnnoncnnnnnnnnonnnnnnonnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonencncnnos 233 15 10
249. he creation of script code using the Script Editor The script is defined using the Execute Script entry in the Animation Editor list One object or a selection of objects defined as a group are animated in a number of ways refer to chapter 1 Graphics Editor for applicable objects e An object can be seen to be blinking e An object can be removed from the page e An object can change colour e A value associated with the object can be displayed e Text associated with the object can be displayed e An object can appear enabled for selection or disabled for selection e An object can move horizontally or vertically e An object can be flood filled e An object can change its size horizontally or vertically e An object can rotate e An object can have associated user interaction e An object can be displayed on the page However it is not feasible for all the objects to be capable of all forms of animation For instance a toggle object can only be animated so that it is enabled or disabled visible or invisible while a text object can be resized moved change its colour blink rotate await user interaction be made visible or invisible or display an associated value A list of objects and their available animations is as follows Animation Editor SECTION 9 Animation iama am E A 1 Lee LEA eet Ea dW shh AMABA MENEM LET EEE TE LETT TET Y VIV Y il IN ae CURAN AAA Execute script ALA Y MIME Move
250. he usual way Deleting an Existing Recipe SECTION 10 Recipes de Recipe Editor Coffee hish 10 7 Deleting an Existing Recipe Open the Recipe Editor dialog box as described in chapter 10 Viewing Recipes in the Recipe Editor To remove an existing recipe highlight the recipe from the recipe list and click the button A confirmation dialog box opens Click the Yes button to remove the definition or the No button to abort the delete operation 10 8 Recipe Security Levels A recipe may be assigned a security level governing which level of users are allowed to download the recipe in runtime The available security levels are shown below in descending order e Designer e Manager e Supervisor e Operator e All Users To assign a security level to a recipe display the Recipe Editor dialog box Then select the recipe to which the security level is applied With the recipe highlighted from the list click the Security Level field on the toolbar Select the required security level from the list The selected security level is then applied to the recipe To change the security level click the Security Level field again and choose a different security level from the list 10 9 Printing Recipes 10 9 1 Print Preview 10 9 2 Printing The Recipe Editor can be printed in the same way pages can Before printing ensure that the printer has been set up correctly To check the printer settings refer to chapter 2 Pages
251. he Expression field The boundaries associated with the percentage fill are inserted into the Active Expression Range Required Percentage Fill fields The Filled fields specify the percentage of the object to fill when the expression reaches its maximum and minimum values The flood fill also requires a direction This can be specified as left to right or right to left by selecting the appropriate Fill Direction setting To abort the Horizontal Percentage Fill definition click the Cancel button By clicking the Browse button a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions When completed click the OK button If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message opens 138 Runtime Actions SECTION 9 Animation 9 3 11 Vertical Percentage Fill 9 3 12 Display Page Closed objects can be flood filled along a vertical axis This can be specified via the Percentage Fill Vertical dialog box To access the Percentage Fill Vertical dialog box to add an action select Percentage Fill Vertical from the animation list and click the Add Action button To access the Percentage Fill Vertical dialog box to modify an action select Percentage Fill Vertical from the animation list and click the Modify Action button Refer to chapter 9 Objects for a list of the objects to which this action is applicable On selection of the Percentage Fill Vertical action the Percentage Fill
252. he Push Button Wizard dialog box opens Push Button Wizard Bitton Style Blank Butter Colyu Bulbor In Out Bultor The Wizard allows a button to be assigned a style or text or both to signify its purpose To select a style click on an option in the Button Style field To enter button text type in the Button Text field the Style Attributes dialog box is automatically updated The text font can be changed via the Font button Click the OK button to accept the new button attributes or click the Cancel button to leave the button unchanged Examples of the different styles of button are shown below EY eer The colour of the coloured button is red by default but can be changed by using the Palette A Gauge provides a means of displaying the value of an operation or the value of a point Click the button then click or click and drag on the page to insert a gauge To edit the Rotary Gauge double click on it The Gauge Wizard dialog box opens 61 Creating and Editing Control Objects SECTION 4 Objects 4 4 7 Scatter Graph 62 auge Wizard Lra Confor alion Altibutes Gauge Title Cx Superaror Gauge Expression Mirar Gauge Valier lo Masamumn Gauge Value 100 Mince Display Units 10 Major Display Units 20 Barfindicator Colour M fe Auto Sus Fonts PF Display Minos Unis Shae Specht Attnbutes Display Major Units Miriam Display Angle T20 FF Display Minor Ticks Masimam Display
253. he results of a schema query Each Schema type has a different set of Criteria that it supports A Schema is configured by selecting the desired Connection and choosing the right menu option Add Schema to invoke the following dialog box Add Schema Associaton Schema Assocation Properties Name fT ables Port baTabledames Browse Type Tables Preview Enberna TABLE_MAME F iter TABLE he Read on Connection 12 6 1 Name A unique Schema name will be automatically provided This can be modified to provide a more meaningful name if required 12 6 2 Point The name of an array point which will hold the results of the schema request The Browse button may be used to select a current point or add a new one 12 6 3 Type The Type list will be populated with a selection of available Schema Types 12 6 4 Criteria The Criteria list shows the available Criteria for the given Schema Type 12 6 5 Filter The Filter list is used with certain Schema types to reduce the information returned 12 6 6 Read on Connection If checked the Schema results are automatically obtained when successful connection to the database is achieved 12 6 7 Preview If the Connection is live then the Preview button will be enabled on the dialog box which allows you to view the results of the configured Schema The Schema Type Criteria and Filter values can be modified at Runtime via the DBSchema functio
254. he total number of points on a device that are only updated when on display this could be 100 if there is only one page 16 2 Performance Monitor The Performance Monitor dialog box shown below can be accessed from the Performance menu on the Runtime popup menu CX Supervisor Performance Monitor x Statistics Performance Component a lt Overview gt Clear All o iS 12 Sumimary 1 PC Statisticz gt 10mes eo HT LS5S1H_H_ Ethernet Not Open 239 Performance Monitor 240 SECTION 16 Application Analysis Performance Monitor Actual CPS The number of characters per second being used on the network if this is approaching the same value as the theoretical CPS 60 or higher then network problems are likely Average Active Points This is how many points elements are being updated every second if all points are at 1 Average Active Elements Second interval the calculation would be 1 and the Average should be very close to this If you have 2 points at 0 5 seconds the calculation would be 2 If the Average and Calculation differ considerably then there is a problem with bandwidth use Calculated Max Points Sec Calculated Max Elements Sec PLC Average Latency The average time it takes the PLC to process its ms own programs and any other requests of it before responding to a particular request Processing Delay This is the time used by CX Supervisor ms Processi
255. hecked then filenames will be automatically created otherwise a Save File As dialog box will be displayed EXPORT TYPE Controls whether export should be as comma separated values files or as text ADDITIONAL INFORMATION TO EXPORT Controls whether breaks date time and milliseconds are exported Close Fue Real Fiel 2 Lih Real Lift uri Fz A Buming Boolean burmner 0 2 Altitude Real Altitude FY Use Generated Files Additional Information to Export Universal Time UTC J Breaks in Data F Date F Time Export Type erat TT Miliseconds csv 11 6 2 Generation of Comma Separated CSV Files Both the ExportLog script function and the Export Dialog use the following conventions for automatically generating comma separated values files for export All generated CSV filenames will contain at least the lt Data Set name gt lt timestamp gt and a CSV extension CSV is a format that is recognised directly by spreadsheet packages such as Excel and can therefore be opened and viewed with this application e g MyData Set1999011214 csv No characters are used in the timestamp This is for two reasons 175 Data Log Export Facilities SECTION 11 Data Logging A Applications like Excel seem to complain about them being there B Less likely to be confused will dlv files during searches purges During the generation of files then obviously duplication of names can occur To avoid this the
256. hen the result of the expression is TRUE the object s blinks To select a colour for the blink animation click in the Blink Colour field The Colour Palette dialog box opens so that a colour can be supplied to the object The object blinks between its current colour and the chosen blink colour The Colour Palette dialog box is described in chapter 9 Common Colour Palette When completed click the OK button To abort the Blink operation click the Cancel button By clicking the Browse button a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions 9 3 15 Colour Change Analogue Objects can be animated so they change between a variety of colours at a variety of intervals This is achieved using the Colour Change Analogue dialog box To access the Colour Change Analogue dialog box to add an action select Colour Change Analogue from the animation list and click the Add Action button To access the Colour Change Analogue dialog box to modify an action select Colour Change Analogue from the animation list and click the Modify Action button Refer to chapter 9 Objects for a list of the objects to which this action is applicable On selection of the Colour Change Analogue action the Colour Change Analogue dialog box opens 141 Runtime Actions SECTION 9 Animation Colour Change Analogue Cancel Colours Thresholds e Apply changes to obci frame text colour V Apply change
257. hereas some require a shorter scan rate so the communications are service more frequently at the end of each scan Some other settings may also impact the CPUs ability to service communications e Try to reduce the number of active messages see below e Try to reduce to usage see below On the Performance tab the quantity of Active Messages is shown Each Active Message is a single communication request although the internal optimisations mean that many continuously addressed points can be read in one message This depends on the frame size which in turn depends on the network type This is why use of arrays and good memory layout are essential to performance To reduce the Active Messages see Chapter 16 Best Practices Performance and Chapter 16 Best Practices Points On the Performance tab the current and historic usage is shown 100 usage is rarely seen and the system may be running at capacity well before this This is analogous to a motorway where cars slow down long before they are touching bumpers and might only achieve 50 of capacity each car has a car length space behind it In practical terms for serial connections consider 70 80 the limit For Ethernet packet collisions start occurring above 30 and are automatically corrected but 40 50 is the practical limit For Controller Link which has a vast bandwidth any value above 10 signals a performance issue To reduce the usage see Chapter 16 Best Practices Performanc
258. ht mors E ita TRR 4 Integer Descriptio 7 Beal 4 Text Exclude System Points Only viable points can be viewed from a Select Required Item dialog box The list of items in the Point Names field can be refined by selecting an option from the Group field Click the OK button to accept the new point or click the Cancel button to leave the point unchanged Clicking the Add Point button or Add Alias button allows a new point or alias to be created prior to association with the expression Points are discussed in chapter 3 Points while expression syntax is discussed in the CX Supervisor Script Language Reference Manual 8 4 2 2 Alarm Messages 120 A message pertaining to a raised alarm is entered in the Raised field The content of the field should be descriptive to provide the user with a reasonable basis for an alarm solution The Alarm Editor provides a default raised message The name of the alarm is substituted for the character in the message text when the OK button is clicked The raised message may be changed at any time simply by entering the desired message in the text field A message associated with the alarm can also be entered in the Normal field in the same manner to that above this message opens once an alarm condition has been rectified and normal conditions have been resumed The Alarm Editor provides a default normal message The name of the alarm is substituted for the character in the message text
259. ibes CX Supervisor animation and the procedures associated with the creation of a project animation page animation and object animation using the Animation Editing facility The active use of points and how points dictate animations is also described 9 1 Associating Points with Actions and Events CX Supervisor provides a facility to greatly enhance the versatility of a runtime application by the use of actions and animations to execute commands and logical expressions based on specified criteria being met This can take many forms for instance pressing a button opening or closing a page or changes in the positioning of objects on a page CX Supervisor achieves this enhanced functionality in two ways by assigning an expression to a pre defined action or executing commands on a linear basis as a basic programming language In addition such functionality can be carried out on three levels object page or project with different objectives at each level Animations are actioned using the values or states of one or more points For example an integer point is assigned to an object the colour of the object is black when the value of the point is 0 The system causes the value of the point to be changed to the value 5 which changes the colour of the object to red To demonstrate an object s colour can be changed in the runtime environment from black to white This can be achieved using actions and animations in the two ways described
260. iguration dialog 2 Generate Audit Trail option is shown checked for this alarm When the All Alarms option in Audit Trail configuration is applied it is not necessary to check the Generate Audit Trail option for individual alarms to include them in the Audit Trail 3 Create a left click script for the Generate Alarm button in the test application bSimpleAlarm 1 4 Generate a left click script for the Clear Alarm button in the test application bSimpleAlarm 0 Creating Running a CFR Application Microsoft Access SECTION 13 CFR Title 21 13 4 11 Generating Errors and Events in Audit Trail Records By selecting the Log Errors Events option in the Audit Trail Configuration dialog all Errors and Events will be logged as records in the Audit trail database The same Errors and Events as reported into the Event Error log No further action is required For the purpose of demonstrating Event and Error logging the following actions can be applied to the CFR Test Application 1 Add a left click script to the Generate Event button in the test application LogEvent Event Message 2 Add a left click script to the Generate Error button in the test application LogError Error Message 1 13 4 12 Running the CFR Test Application to Generate Alarm Error and Event Records Build and run the modified project and carry out the following actions A CFR Audit Trail Test L o gin Designer
261. ile will only contain 5 5 hours of Data because the minimum resolution is one hour and the file was created on the half hour all subsequent files will contain the full six hours of data 2 Data Set period Days If a Data Set named Batch1 starts logging at 23 00 on the 29th December 1999 with a period of 1 Day the following files will be created BatonLll 992239290 ev If the system is left running the Data Logging directory will contain the following files Baten loool 229 23 ely Bacchi Loo LZ S00 0 alv Batch T999 T23 100 aL Batch1 2000010100 dlv The first file will only contain 1 hour of data all subsequent files contain the full 24 hours of data 3 Data Set period Months If a Data Set named Shifts starts logging at 22 00 on 29th February 2000 with a period of 2 Months the following file will created SOLES 2OU00S2 922 alv If the system is left running the Data Logging directory will contain the following files SHALES 2000050100 dly Shatts Z0000701L00 dlvy The first file will only contain 1 month and 2 hours of data all subsequent files contain the full 2 Months of data 11 3 2 Data Records There are two types of records that are stored in a Data Log file for each Item logged these are Events or breaks and the Actual Data 171 Data Log Viewer Component v2 0 and v1 8 SECTION 11 Data Logging 11 3 2 1 Event Break Records Event records currently consist of the following fields
262. ill create a point for table memory 500 and select an internal data type of IEEE float The command modifier should be set to blank A Seconds Settings SECTION 6 Projects PLC Attributes Real X PLC Attributes PLE Mame M y TJ Cancel PLC Type 141 TJ1 MC1 Add PLC Data Location T500 Array Size f Data Type IEEE float Bs Modifier Mones nf W Communications Enabled Data Transter Optimizations f Always Update Point Value C Only Update Point Value When On Display Conversion Attributes T Apply Conversion Factor Minimum PLC Value Masimum PLC Value 13 Click OK twice to close both dialog boxs You should now be able to access this point in a similar fashion to any other point in CX Supervisor Refer to the actual Trajexia documentation for further details about Trajexia devices memory areas and limitations 6 10 Settings 6 10 1 General Settings Default Button Font The Default Button Font option which can also be selected from the General Settings sub menu of the Project menu displays the standard font dialog box Sal Black 27 Sra Marie Bookman Oki S bie Bek heal Symbol 1 Book shel Symbol 2 Bookshell Symbol 3 E This dialog box is used to set the default font specification to be used for all text displayed on push buttons created using the graphics editor Any button can also have its font changed from the default using
263. ill guarantee the calculated is up to date with the latest source information plus stress the system much less while the value doesn t change Never use the Sleep command You should almost never need to use the Sleep command It can also create confusing applications as it can create re entrant scripts and asynchronous PLC communications Always question e If it is used for timing use PLC ladder instead as this is much more reliable e Consider if the code following the Sleep should in fact be executed on an event e g after completion flag returned from PLC instruction or new data value etc Use Animations if possible Always choose direct object animations in preference to page object scripts blink colour disable height width horizontal fill vertical fill move rotate display and close These are both quicker and clearer Data Logging SECTION 20 Best Practices e Keep scripts short Although the script editor can manage hundreds of lines this would suggest a serious design problem Consider 30 lines as a practical maximum 20 6 Data Logging This section covers some data logging related good practices e Utilise Data Logging performance Always use the inbuilt Data Logging in preference to trend graphs or file O functions as the performance is far superior e Always use On Change Always log data On Change There is no sampling error and CPU disk activity and storage required are almost certainly re
264. ime to display the data value at that point Enter an arithmetic trace expression for each point or select an expression via a Browse button An existing point can also be associated with the Wizard by dragging the point directly from the Point Editor See chapter 3 Points regarding adding a new point and dragging from the Point Editor Change the fonts used for the Graph Title Scale and Time axis via the appropriate font button Alternatively font sizes can be automatically calculated by selecting the Auto Font Size option 10 Exit the Wizard by clicking the OK button to accept the new Trend Graph attributes or click Cancel to leave the Trend Graph unchanged The units of measurement of time are selected from the associated field To select graph scaling click the Scaling button the Trend Graph Scaling dialog box opens 67 Manipulating Objects SECTION 4 Objects T rend G raph Scaling Configuration Altributes ok Minimum Scale Value fi Cancel Masmum Scale Value 100 Shyla Albibutez ran F Display Minos Ticks eee E E Display Major Tick Major Display Unites 20 wd Display Minor Unite Scale Unii Liris Display Mage Links Configuration Attributes can be altered by typing over the existing entries The Style Attributes can be amended by clicking on the settings Exit the Trend Graph Scaling dialog box by clicking the OK button to accept the scaling attributes or click the Cancel push but
265. in CX Supervisor user in runtime CX Supervisor does not normally force any user to be logged in at runtime If no user is logged in when Audit Trail logging is active then each data entry reports User Unknown into the UserID field If the application requirements demand that current user must always be identified for Audit Trail logging then the application designer must ensure that a runtime user is always logged in For example by forcing a log in at runtime initialisation and then disabling logout in runtime 201 Creating Running a CFR Application Microsoft Access SECTION 13 CFR Title 21 To assist with the correct identification of users CX Supervisor has the ability to log in to the runtime application with the same identity and password as a Windows user refer to section 6 11 of the manual for details 13 4 Creating Running a CFR Application Microsoft Access This section demonstrates the basic CFR functionality by describing how to create a simple test project and then execute runtime to record Audit Trail events The processes described in this section are e Creating and configuring a project with an Audit Trail At first to use just one CX Supervisor Point e Executing runtime to generate a database and data tables e Viewing the generated Audit Trail data e Adding Alarms e Adding Events and Errors 13 4 1 CFR Test Application The test application described in this section consists of one page with a
266. in recipes for data logging etc 17 3 Using with Omron s CX Server OPC 1 Note that the Omron OPC server discussed is supplied as part of the CX Server OPC product 2 Omron s OPC Server configuration is described in the CX Server OPC manual 3 While launched the CX logo opens in the system tray 4 For step 7 1 a i the correct Server Name is Omron OpenDataServer 1 5 For step 7 1 c i the Item ID should be the name of the point in the CX Server project CDM file configured in the server The Access Path is not used and may be left blank 6 During step 9 the Omron OPC Server logo opens momentarily as the server starts 251 Using with Omron s CX Server OPC SECTION 17 Using CX Supervisor as an OPC Cli 252 Two Tier Client Server or Master Slave SECTION 18 Connecting to a remote CX Su SECTION 18 Connecting to a remote CX Supervisor application This chapter explains how to connect multiple CX Supervisor applications together to form a distributed solution Point data from one application can be shared directly with other CX Supervisor applications across the PC network Depending on the requirements there are many reasons and topographies for interconnecting CX Supervisor applications 18 1 Two Tier Client Server or Master Slave 18 2 Peer to Peer One application is configured as a Server application or Master The Server is often the main station and is permanently switched on and often used locally f
267. in the design of the script To troubleshoot further e Confirm path of execution using MsgBox Message in all conditional branches e Display values using MsgBox Message command C 7 PLC Maintenance dialog box The PLC Maintenance dialog box is launched by right clicking and selecting PLC Maintenance After choosing the PLC you can e Open and close the PLC e See if there are errors e Change the PLC Mode e See the effect of optimisations as points are Disabled C 8 Database errors The database connectivity can sometimes be problematic to configure correctly To troubleshoot CX Supervisor database functionality e Try viewing and writing the data from another data source for example Microsoft Access application for mdb files etc e Connect to the database from the Developer to check Table and Field names can be correctly read Remember to disconnect before running if the provider doesn t support multiuser connections like the Excel provider e Note that every database function returns an error code to confirm if the operation was successful Always assign this to a temporary point and after the call to check the value e When database errors occur try calling DBGetLastError This will give a textual description of the problem As these errors are standard there is often information about the cause of these errors available on the Internet just search for the exact text of the error C 9 How to create steps to repr
268. ing SECTION 12 Databases 12 9 Datashaping Note Note Note Note Creating a Datashape connection Note The ADO SHAPE command can be used to produce hierarchical recordsets iie where a value within the current record is used to access another Recordset For example a record showing Customer Details might contain a field for Customer ID Every time the record position is changed a child Recordset showing Orders for that Customer ID could be recreated Hierarchical recordsets present an alternative to using JOIN syntax when accessing parent child data Hierarchical recordsets differ from a JOIN in that with a JOIN both the parent table fields and child table fields are represented in the same recordset With a hierarchical recordset the recordset contains only fields from the parent table In addition the recordset contains an extra field that represents the related child data which you can assign to a second recordset variable and traverse Hierarchical recordsets are made available via the MSDataShape provider which is implemented by the client cursor engine A new clause SHAPE is provided to relate SELECT statements in a hierarchical fashion The syntax is summarized below SHAPE parent command AS name APPEND child command AS name RELATE parent field TO child field bee Cha 2 COmmanic E sa By default the child recordsets in the parent recordset will be called Chapter 1 Chapter 2 etc u
269. ing facility The application of external sources to points is also described 3 1 What is a Point A point is a variable used internally by CX Supervisor All points within CX Supervisor have a name group and type associated with them CX Supervisor provides a set of pre defined System Points which are detailed in chapter 3 Points 3 2 About the Point Editor The Point Editor allows the viewing creating modifying and removing of points from the points database Note System Points cannot be modified To open the Point Editor dialog box click the E button An example of the Point Editor dialog box is as follows lt All Groups J al ejaj aa ol e e tito Integer Gate Hours in 12 Hour formal El paali integer Syubern Humba of acire slam A dilsimilor inisg Spitters Tolal mumie of aloe E AMP Text Gypa AH PM micao fo 12 Hou chock loma El tivelsbleMemory integer Spiteri mou of awalsble mes n m bites Teod Dihin Date leg 200295 A 0 20 Month integer pben Dap of the kontt A Dades integer Sye Dep of ihe Yas A emoMode onasan Bytha Indcales a vabd boken hat rol been inhaled and is lherefces in demo mode dl WDiskSpace integer Sateen Around of tree dk space om bytes S PGD Rerouces integer Sabern Peicertage of GO resources free OBSOLETE IN W20 AND ABOVE Al Halmi Brad per Dirie Muesber dd acire hagh piriy aimi BA o Bate ee I oos i eee le ep sd Lo eie mos mo ba o el The typeface of the editor can be
270. ion allows selected objects to be magnified up to four times their normal size To enlarge an area of the screen choose the View menu and select Zoom Then select the required magnification factor Off 2 or 4 A specific object can be zoomed in on by selecting that object and then performing the procedures described above Point Substitution Example This feature allows the points associated with one or more objects to be changed en mass This can make reusing page objects either by using copy and paste or the Graphics Objects Library simpler and quicker The Point Substitution dialog box is shown automatically after inserting a library item or on demand by right clicking on an object or objects and choosing Point Substitution or from the Edit menu In this example a button has been created which has a Colour Change animation and a script Both are linked to PointA After performing a copy and past on the item the Point Substitution dialog box can be used to choose the points that should be re linked Clicking the Browse button will allow a new point to be selected Clicking OK will now replace all instances of PointA with PointB and then recompile the button animations and scripts Applying Tooltips SECTION 4 Objects set Point Set Point OK PomtB Point Cancel del Browse 4 7 Applying Tooltips In the runtime environment it is possible to provide instant help for the object
271. ipt Editor to fix the error 9 3 6 Horizontal Move Objects can be animated by moving either left or right This is specified using the Move Horizontal dialog box To access the Move Horizontal dialog box to add an action select Move Horizontal from the animation list and click the Add Action button To access the Move Horizontal dialog box to modify an action select Move Horizontal from the animation list and click the Modify Action button Refer to the Script Reference chapter 10 Objects for a list of the objects to which this action is applicable On selection of the Move Horizontal action the Move Horizontal dialog box opens Mowe H orizontal Expresion OF ee Active Expression Range Required Position Biase Ue Mirireaar Ye lo Minimum Oliset fo hamum Value hoo Maanum Oltset 100 To define the animation an expression consisting of a number of operators and operands which may be based on the status of a point must be entered in the Expression field The boundaries in which the object moves are inserted into the Active Expression Range Required Position fields The Maximum Offset specifies the number of pixels to the right from its initial position that the object moves when the result of the expression reaches the Maximum Value The Minimum Offset specifies the number of pixels to the left from its initial position that the object moves when the result of the 135 Runtime Actions SECT
272. isor point that this item should have If not an array enter 1 Creating a CX Supervisor Client application SECTION 18 Connecting to a remote CX 7 Having checked that all the parameters are correct return to the Point Editor window by closing any attributes window that may be open To run the application click the a button The CX Supervisor Point will now be connected to Remote CX Supervisor application and can be used like all other CX Supervisor points i e to drive animations in alarm expressed in recipes for data logging etc 257 Creating a CX Supervisor Client application SECTION 18 Connecting to a remote CX 258 Adding a Point Linked to a Parameter SECTION 19 Connecting to Omron Industrial 19 1 SECTION 19 Connecting to Omron Industrial Components This chapter details connecting CX Supervisor to Omron s Industrial Components like Temperature Controllers Digital Panel Meters and Timer Counters Any process value or parameter from these devices can be monitored or written See the device documentation for available parameters and their description This is achieved in CX Supervisor by creating a point and linking it to the required parameter Device ranges supported are following models that support communication where indicated a wildcard K3GN E5 N E5 J E5ZE E5 K H8GN K3N ESZN Adding a Point Linked to a Parameter 1 2 3 Start CX Supervisor Development and open your project Open the
273. it on Microsoft Access database files To avoid this limitation CX Supervisor will monitor the number of records appended to a database file and it reaches 5 million records then a new database file will be created automatically SQL When using SQL for audit trail logging if the number of records accumulates to a significantly large number then it can affect CX Supervisor performance when opening the database file i e when the StartAuditTrail script function is executed In the worst case it can even result in failure to open the database file due to a timeout and therefore audit trail logging will not begin It is therefore recommended that SQL audit trail databases are managed in an appropriate manner based on the specifics of the CX supervisor application Based on our own testing performance degradation starts to become 221 Limitations 222 SECTION 13 CFR Title 21 Part 11 Functionality apparent when the database contains in excess of 1 million records however the exact point at which performance degradation occurs will probably be dependent on the exact PC specifications Maximum Length of Text Strings When logging to audit trail databases all text strings are limited to a maximum of 250 characters For example when logging point values to an audit trail database then the following items would be restricted to maximum 250 characters Previous Value Text points New Value Text points User ID Audit ID A
274. ite times and performance under load improve with processor speed CX Server DI 2 2 performs in very similar manner to previous versions and better on a mid spec machine Performance difference between PC specifications 350 300 250 200 150 100 50 0 Subscription 1 7 ames Read 2 2 ange rte 2 2 me Subscription 2 2 450 Mhz 1 1 Ghz 2 4Ghz 281 282 Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions Write time under increasing load 450 Mhz 1 7 450Mhz 2 2 1 1 Ghz 1 7 ci 1 1 Ghz 2 2 AGhz 1 7 9 2 AGhz 2 2 Can run CX Supervisor Runtime as a restricted Windows User CX Supervisor and CX Server require Administrator rights to be installed on a computer but other users can then run the software The runtime will run without problems as a Standard User member of Power Users group and will run as a Restricted User member of Users Group although will show errors when trying to update the registry To avoid these errors specific registry access can be provided by an Administrator to the following registry keys e HKEY_CLASSES_ROO MCLSIDY0002D780 0000 0000 CO00 000000000046 e HKEY CLASSES _ROOT CLSID 0002D781 0000 0000 C000 000000000046 e HKEY CLASSES ROOT CX Supervisor Application e HKEY CLASSES ROOT CX Supervisor Project Can I use CX Simulator with CX Supervisor Integrated Simulation can be used to automatically launch and use CX Simulator See Compiling and Running a
275. itor dialog box as described in chapter 8 Viewing the Contents of the Alarm Database To add a new alarm select the l button This results in the Add Alarm dialog box being displayed 117 Creating a New Alarm SECTION 8 Alarms 8 4 1 118 Note General Attributer ok Alam Hama a E Cancel Group Default if Browse he Acknowledge Box Play Sound Auto Acknowledge Print Messages Descnphorr Alan Type m Alam Atinbubes Simple Espresnon Browse C Desdband Rate of Change Alam Messages Bme Raned alsin Raised Monnal lain Y Cheated When all the information has been provided for the new alarm selecting the OK button commits the new alarm to the alarms database while the Cancel button aborts this add operation The short cut keyboard combinations for Cut Copy and Paste operations are valid within the Add Alarm dialog box Highlight part or all of a field and type lt Ctrl gt X to cut the text or lt Ctrl gt C to copy the text Insert the cursor at the desired field and type lt Ctrl gt V to paste the text Since the cut and copy operations store the information in the Windows Clipboard it may be pasted to another dialog box or application Alarm Header Information The name of the alarm is entered in the Name field The alarm name can be constructed of up to 20 alphanumeric characters Any other characters including spaces generate an audible error or an Invalid Alarm Name entere
276. ked allow other pages to be loaded on demand For further details of showing pages on demand refer to chapter 9 Animation Selecting Pages for Display on Run When a project is run the first pages to be displayed can be selected To display a page when a project is run open the Project Editor select the page by clicking on its description and click the button To stop a page being displayed on run click the button on the Project Editor toolbar Changing the View Mode Click the 24 button to view details with large icons Click the button to view details with normal icons Click the button to view details as a list Click the button to view details as a list including page name page path project status runtime display and load status information The details can be sorted in ascending order by clicking once or in descending order by clicking twice in the appropriate field Viewing Project Details To open the Project Details dialog box and view the project name and description click the e button on the Project Editor toolbar 107 Printing from the Project Editor SECTION 6 Projects 6 21 10 Multiple Selection 6 22 6 22 1 6 22 2 6 22 3 6 23 6 24 108 Standard multiple selection facilities can be used within the Project Editor To select an additional line hold the control key down while clicking to select all lines between the anchor line the last line clicked on and another line hold
277. lements are quicker than the time taken to update 50 individual points 3 9 1 Creation of an Array Point An array point can be created by specifying a value greater than 1 in the Elements field of the Setup PLC Connection dialog box The Data Location field specifies the memory address from which the array of data begins Note Elements of an array point are located at consecutive addresses after the address specified in the Data Location field Accessing Elements of an Array Point Direct access to array points can be achieved by applying a subscript to the pointname e g pointname index For more information refer to the CX Supervisor Script Language Reference Manual 45 Point Import SECTION 3 Points 3 10 Point Import 1 2 3 To import PLC points from other applications click the button This results in the Import PLC Points From Another CX Server Project dialog box being displayed The Point Import tool can be used to import point information into the CX Supervisor project that has already been configured The symbol name symbol type and PLC address is imported from the CDM file generated by other applications The CDM file can be generated from CX Programmer by linking the project to the CDM file The CDM file can also be generated by exporting from a SYSWIN project to a CDM file Refer to the documentation supplied with the package for information on how to export or link the data to the CDM file It is pos
278. leshooting for displaying and setting point values Launch by right clicking the runtime and selecting Point Maintenance providing that you have sufficient security When an expected animation or script execution has not occurred the Point Maintenance can quickly show if the data is not the expected value If the data is the correct value then the fault must lay with the animation or script Note You can not set the value of points defined as Input only In this case use the PLC Data Monitor C 3 PLC Data Monitor The PLC Data Monitor is similar to the Point Maintenance dialog box except that it is a CX Server tool that operates at a lower level on the PLC It can be used to read and write logical and physical addresses and using a variety of PLC data formats It is launched by right clicking the runtime and selecting Communication Utilities PLC Data Monitor Most useful is the Address monitor select the Address tab and double click Monitor Any CX Supervisor PLC Symbol point can be selected and monitored and set including Input only points C 4 CX Supervisor Performance monitor The CX Supervisor Performance Monitor tool displays application and communication information and can be very helpful in diagnosing performance problems It is launched by right clicking the runtime and selecting Performance if Security privileges permit There are statistics and a performance trend for each PLC each network the CPU time and a Summa
279. lete Features 1 On return to the Change Icon dialog box select the required icon from those presented 2 Change the icon s label if required 3 Click the Open button to return to the Insert Object dialog box 4 On return to the Insert Object dialog box click the OK button to return to the current page and embed the selected object into it at the current insertion point F 7 2 Creating an Object From a File 320 1 2 3 Creating an object from a file allows linking or embedding of objects created at sometime in the past As before select Insert New Object from the Edit menu and the Insert Object dialog box opens Click the Create From File setting and the dialog box changes to a format similar to that of the following Insert Object tet Create Hew Fie C Greate homfid C Progiem Fles OMRON CX Supervis C Create Control Browse T Link r Result inserte the contents of the fle as an object into py your document so that you may activate it using m the program which created it Type the full path of the file containing the object to be inserted ending with the full file name into the Create from File field To locate an existing file name or a different path click the Browse button to display the Browse dialog box A Browse dialog box similar to that used for changing an object s icon opens the difference being that the List Files of Type field has a single entry of All Files exte
280. lows Project Editor AN Relevant Pages 1 zaj a ur C Program Fies DMAON DY ENGINE C Progiam Files IMARON O HOARE C Program les OMAROHA O HCOOL C Program Files OMRON O HIGHI C Progiam Files 0 MAON Dj HIMJECT C Program Files MAGN CY HSTROKE C Program Fles OMROHA C HGNITION C Program Files MIMROHA CY tides DaFan FlesVOMAONS In Propect Displayed Losded CO inro C Program Files OMRON In Pregect Py INJECT C Progiam Files OMPON S In Project O STROKES C Program Files OMROMNA In Project D TITLE Program Files OHAOHA In Project Displayed Lowen The Project Editor consists of a control bar and a display area The control bar includes controls to filter the pages to be displayed add and remove pages from a project and open pages 6 21 2 Viewing the Contents of a Project The Project Editor is used to view the pages within a project Individual listed pages are sorted based on the designated page name page path project status runtime display or load status By selecting the Page Name field the pages are sorted alohanumerically by name The Page Type Project Status Runtime Display and Load Status fields once selected react in the same way The Project Editor display shows the projects listed in page name order Y oll 09 56 11 09 56 11 The widths of the editor fields can be widened or narrowed as required using the mouse to drag the column boundaries The typefac
281. ly loaded and displayed To support the diversity of end users the Runtime features come translated in 16 languages including English and can easily be extended by the developer see Adding unsupported Runtime languages Remember that the choice of runtime language is in no way connected to the language of the installed Developer application 15 2 1 Setting the Default Language 226 The Runtime application first starts up in the preferred default language Set this language during development from the Language Settings dialog select menu Project Runtime Settings Language Settings Runtime Multilingual Features SECTION 15 Multilingual Features Language Settings Ea Language for User Defined Text OF Default Default Nederlands Belgie Horwegian After setting when the application is next run it will start in the selected language Note In this context for this dialog only lt Default gt means no language file will be loaded so the default text compiled in the executable i e English will be used This is the initial setting and can be useful if no Language features are being used 15 3 Runtime Multilingual Features Applications supporting more than one language can be very useful for example for general use in countries with more than one national language or where a plant has a specific mix of personnel This can also prove valuable for international installations when the develope
282. ly the direct insertion of objects using the CX Supervisor built in functions are detailed For further details of using the Object Packager refer to the Windows User Guide or the Object Packager On line Help Whether using the Windows Object Packager or embedding or linking objects directly proceed as follows 1 Click the page in which the object is to be inserted 2 Click the button The Insert Object dialog box opens Insert Object Create New AchonB wr Class Adob s Class Cancel Cancel E Adobe Acrobat Documeni Create hom Fide AL ink ae Audio xplosioni X Control E Create Control Bitmap Image r ne As Close Window Display As Icon Coke Bvt Class Resul Inserte a new Adobe Acrobat Document object F 7 1 Creating an Object From New 1 2 3 318 To create an object from new proceed as follows 1 Scroll through the list of object types presented in the list box until the desired type is highlighted Object Packager 1 2 AA Appendix F Obsolete Features 2 Click the OK button to insert the object into the current page and display it as it would look from within the application in which the object was created To display the object as an icon click the Display As Icon setting The icon displayed is the first one which is stored in the icon resource table for the application which created the object in the case of the example shown a Paintbrush icon If another icon is required cli
283. m affect performance See gt What is the maximum limit of number of points 277 Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions 278 See also Chapter 16 Best Practices Performance and Chapter 16 Best Practices Points How can see if the communication network is overloaded Use CX Supervisor Performance Monitor Tool to see if the network is overloaded This tool is available in the CX Supervisor run time by right clicking and selecting Performance if security privileges allow It can be used to see how much of the available bandwidth is in use You can also see how many points are waiting to be processed and the latency of actual communications To improve responsiveness try to reduce the bandwidth used the latency and the number of active messages Note that performance begins to reduce well before 100 saturation is achieved For example it is rare to achieve more than 70 80 for a serial connection This is analogous to a motorway where cars slow down long before they are touching bumpers and might only achieve a maximum of 50 capacity i e each car has a car length space behind it How does the Operating System affect performance On the same specification machine Windows NT provides the best overall performance It is understandable that newer larger Operating Systems run slower on the same specification machine This is not usually a problem as newer operating systems are usually delivered on newer specification
284. machines FINS Gateway drivers for particular networks operate consistently across all operating systems OMRON recommend Windows 2000 and Windows XP Professional for the following reasons Better security Better stability Better multitasking 2 3 E z Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions Better DCOM configuration How does upgrading CX Supervisor affect communications performance The graphs below show that this does not have an impact itself which is not surprising as a communications functions and therefore performance are governed by the communication middleware CX Server The graphs show Upgrading CX Supervisor does not affect the total number of Subscription points that can be simultaneously read which has remained more than 1000 Performance of instantaneous read and write is not significantly affected by the version of CX Supervisor Updating CX Supervisor does not affect how performance degrades when the system gets busy Note CX Supervisor 1 2 and later do include automatic optimisations for writing array elements that can yield substantial results particularly with serial communications These performance improvements have been excluded from these results rather than distort the true figures 279 280 of 1 0 Performance Write Time ma Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions Read Write Subscription CXS 12 12 CS 1 22 7 Version Write time
285. mally e g MsgBox MyPoint However note that is a reserved character so System Points can be accessed with s prefix instead e g MsgBox s Second for Second system point For up to date information and all help on scripting and the Windows Scripting Host see http www microsoft com scripting What are the syntax differences between VBScript and CX Supervisor script VBScript has some minor syntax differences to CX Supervisor script The most important are e Boolean equality test is only in VBScript e Boolean inequality test is lt gt in VBScript Endif becomes End If in VBScript e Array indexing using uses square brackets in VBScript Note that CX Supervisor interprets and characters as string delimiters even in VBScript so the following code does not work MsgBox Press Enter does not work Instead use the following to replace these characters MsgBox Press chr 123 Enter chr 125 Why are ActiveX events shown differently in the Animation Editor and Property Browser New in CX Supervisor version 1 2 the ActiveX Property Browser has an Events Tab which allows the object s events to be linked to scripts These scripts are defined as VBScript subroutines defined in the Page Initialisation script It is more efficient to load these subroutines once during page initialisation than every time the event occurs as per previous versions using the Animation Editor However this metho
286. may be transparent or filled with a colour or pattern To insert an Arc select the button from the Graphic Object bar Click or click and drag on the page To edit the arc obtain the red grab handles Click and drag to change the angle subtended by the arc To finish editing click elsewhere on the page or press lt Esc gt To insert block text click the button and then click the page Stretch the text object to resize it Standard text tools and the keyboard e g bold italic left justify can be used and their effect applies to the whole content of the object To edit block text double click on it A Text Editing dialog box opens The text can then be changed as can the word wrap and border options Standard Windows cut copy and paste facilities can be used Ellipses may be transparent or filled with a colour or pattern To create a filled ellipse click the gt button To create a transparent ellipse click the button Alternatively select a filled ellipse and click the Transparency Either click the page to create a circle or click and drag to create an ellipse Ellipses cannot be edited but can be re sized To insert a line click the button Click and drag on the page to draw a line of the required length To edit the line obtain the red grab handles Click and drag to change the line To finish editing click elsewhere on the page or press lt Esc gt Polygons may be transparent or filled with a colour
287. means that you don t have to define lots of memory points to hold intermediate values Just link the appropriate action to the object using the Animation Editor and enter the required expression For example using expression TemperatureK 273 rather than creating a new TemperatureCelsius memory point Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions Boolean expressions can easily written to operate on bits within a word e g nFlags amp 0x02 will be TRUE if bit 2 is set or FALSE if it not This eliminates the need for additional memory points and processing Can I use token disks with USB Floppy drives or in high capacity LS120 Disk Drives The token copy protection is no longer supported The software tokens have proven to be incompatible with some USB floppy drives and the high capacity LS120 Disk Drives If you need to remove a software token use the network to conduct the token transfer by sharing a floppy drive from another machine Can print accented characters on alarm printers There is a limitation with Windows such that it is not possible to print accented characters to a line printer a line at a time The only alternatives are e To print using English only characters e To set the printing to page mode which will print a page when a specified number of alarms have occurred This can be set up under Runtime settings Alarm Message printer settings Why do I get installation error 115 Error 115 during installation m
288. med automatically i e without the need for Script functions although a comprehensive set of Database Script functions are available 181 Configuring a Connection SECTION 12 Databases 12 2 Configuring a Connection Connections to existing databases are added to the Workspace by using a right mouse button context sensitive menu option Add Connection which invokes the Add Modify Database connection dialog box They can be modified later by selecting the Edit option from the menu 12 2 1 Add Modify Database connection dialog box 12 2 1 1 Name 12 2 1 2 Data Source 182 Note Note Note The Add Connection dialog box show below is show when the Add Connection menu option is selected from the Database connection editor and the identical Modify Connection dialog box when the Edit menu is selected Add Connection For convenience a unique Connection name is created automatically This can be changed to give a more meaningful description of the connection if required Enter the database file to be used as a Data Source or locate using the Browse button The following data source file types are supported e MS Access Files mdb e MS Excel Files xls e Text Files txt csv e FoxPro Files dbf e Data Source Names dsn A Data Source Name file stores information about a database connection in a file See Creating a Data Source Name file for more information Note Connecting
289. n 192 Configuring Schemas SECTION 12 Databases 12 6 8 Database Schema Types The Database Schema types supported in ADO are Schema Type values Criteria Values Schema Asserts CONSTRAINT CATALOG CONSTRAINT SCHEMA CONSTRAINT NAME schema Catalogs CATALOG_NAME Schema Character Sets CHARACTER_SET CATALOG CHARACTER_SET SCHEMA CHARACTER_SET NAME Schema Check CONSTRAINT CATALOG Constraints CONSTRAINT SCHEMA CONSTRAINT NAME Schema Collations COLLATION CATALOG COLLATION SCHEMA COLLATION NAME Schema Column Domain DOMAIN CATALOG DOMAIN SCHEMA DOMAIN NAME COLUMN_NAME Schema Column TABLE_CATALOG Privileges TABLE_SCHEMA TABLE_NAME COLUMN_ NAME GRANTOR GRANTEE Schema Columns TABLE_CATALOG TABLE SCHEMA TABLE_NAME COLUMN_NAME Schema Constraint TABLE_CATALOG Column Usage TABLE_SCHEMA TABLE_NAME COLUMN_NAME Schema Constraint Table TABLE _CATALOG TABLE SCHEMA TABLE_NAME 193 Configuring Schemas 194 SECTION 12 Databases schema Foreign Keys PK_TABLE_ CATALOG PK_TABLE_SCHEMA PK_TABLE_NAMEFK_TABLE_ CATALOG FK_TABLE_SCHEMA FK_TABLE_NAME Schema Indexes TABLE _ CATALOG TABLE_SCHEMA INDEX_NAME TYPE TABLE_NAME Schema Key Column CONSTRAINT_CATALOG Usage CONSTRAINT_SCHEMA CONSTRAINT_NAME TABLE_CATALOG TABLE_SCHEMA TABLE_NAME COLUMN_NAME Schema Primary Keys PK_TABLE_ CATALOG PK_TABLE_SCHEMA PK_TABLE_NAME Schema Procedure PROCEDURE CATALOG Columns PROCEDURE_SCHEMA PROCEDURE_NAME C
290. n unchecked every time the expression changes a new record is written If a record consists of many fields that may be read or calculated at different times a new record is written every time any one field changes However the desired action may be to change several fields and then log the new values to a single record To achieve this action the Trigger on change of value should be checked for all fields within a record that may be read or calculated at different times Only when all checked fields have been changed is the record logged If however while waiting for remaining fields to change before writing a field is changed for a second time the record is written with all current field values including unchanged fields before the field value is changed for a second time There is a risk when using fields with Trigger on change of value checked that the new value of a field may not actually change its value i e the new value happens to be the same as the old value Because the field has not changed the record is not written until the value is changed again This can produce unexpected results as fields with Trigger on change of value unchecked are written with their current values at the time of writing not the value at the time of initial change This may also occur when a Deadband Is used 179 Data Logging SECTION 11 Data Logging 180 Database Connection Editor SECTION 12 Databases 12 1 SECTION 12 Databases
291. n Range Required Position fields The Maximum Offset specifies the number of pixels upwards from its initial position that the object moves when the result of the expression reaches the Maximum Value The Minimum Offset specifies the number of pixels downwards from its initial position that the object moves when the result of the expression reaches the Minimum Value A value within the maximum and minimum values results in a proportionate movement between the top and bottom positions To abort the Vertical Move definition click the Cancel button By clicking the Browse button a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions When completed click the OK button If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message opens Objects can be animated by shrinking or expanding horizontally This can be specified via the Resize Width dialog box To access the Resize Width dialog box to add an action select Resize Width from the animation list and click the Add Action button To access the Resize Width dialog box to modify an action select Resize Width from the animation list and click the Modify Action button Refer to chapter 9 Object for a list of the objects to which this action is applicable On selection of the Resize Width action the Resize Width dialog box opens Runtime Actions SECTION 9 Animation Resize width Espessor Acie Expression Range Required
292. n the Add New Library dialog box opens Refer to chapter 7 Manipulating Objects for details on dragging objects into the Library 7 2 2 Opening a Library The Graphics Library Editor consists of a number of Libraries which are selected from the drop down list box in the toolbar of the dialog box 109 Manipulating Objects SECTION 7 Graphics Library click the Library name to display its contents in the dialog box The dialog box shows the objects in the selected Library The content of each library is provided for reference in chapter 7 Manipulating Objects 7 2 3 Modify Library The only element of the Library definition which is editable is the Library name To change the name of a Library open the desired Library file and click the w button The Modify Library dialog box opens an example of which is shown below Modify Library Ea Library Name Pumps 17 oe Cancel Type over the current field entry with a new name and click the OK button or cancel the operation by clicking the Cancel button 7 2 4 Delete Library 7 3 7 3 1 110 A Library may be deleted by selecting it from the drop down list to open it and clicking the button on the Graphics Library Editor toolbar CX Supervisor displays a message box to confirm the deletion of the Library Click the Yes button to remove the Library or the No button to cancel the operation and return to the Graphics Library After clicking the Yes button a sec
293. n to abort the operation To remove a user from the Configured Users list 1 Select a user from the Configured Users list and click the Delete button 2 A confirmation dialog box opens Click the Yes button to remove the selected user or the No button to abort the operation When all user amendments are complete click the Close button In the runtime application to make use of the designated privilege the user must log in Login can be accessed in a variety of ways and so is dependent on the setup of the runtime application Some applications may require login as soon as the application is run others may allow login from a context sensitive floating menu Refer chapter 9 Animation for further information The Login User dialog box is as follows To log in enter the login name not the full name in the Login Name field and the associated password in the Password field Any characters typed in the Password field are disguised by a symbol for each character typed Click the OK button to log in or the Cancel button to abort For users without a keyboard to enter login details select the Keyboard button The login name and password can be constructed from the subsequent dialog box by clicking on each button in turn followed by the Enter button to complete 99 Runtime Security SECTION 6 Projects Enter Login Name cial Feo I ce Es Ve ed De a el Es UPA ed Ee fe pe E EAT a JE ES Baa eek A user
294. ng Time applications if these values are too high it would ms indicate the processing required by your application e g scripts is too much and you need to think more about the design of your application Read Time ms This is the time it takes CX Supervisor to read or Write Time ms write a point on the PLC the lower this number the better performance you are getting If you are overloading the network this value will increase Max Write Time ms and the heartbeat interval will also be too high RX Bytes CX The number of bytes received by CX Supervisor Supervisor from CX Server RX Bytes Sec CX The number of bytes per second received by CX Supervisor Supervisor from CX Server this should be well below the bandwidth of the chosen networks capacity Also take into account other bandwidth use such as received data and other unrelated network traffic Max Read Time ms RX Heartbeat Interval If you have an Input point at 1 second this is used ms as a heartbeat If there is no point at this rate there RX Average Heartbeat Will be no monitor of heartbeat interval This is so Interval ms the measure doesn t actually affect the RX Average Heartbeat Performance Deviation ms The average heartbeat should be about 1000 with the deviation as low as possible If this number is much more than 1000 then this would indicate a communications problem Even if you don t notice in normal use CX Supervisor is communicating faster
295. ng on Application Startup 11 2 2 1 Data Set Properties 166 The Data Set Name field enables the Data Set to be referenced with a meaningful description both in the Workspace view and also from the script language It also forms the prefix for the file name A maximum of 26 characters is allowed The Period fields allow a period to be entered in Hours Days or Months and defines the period of data to be grouped into a single file For example if the Period is set to 1 month any data logged for the current month is saved to the same data file even when the system is stopped and restarted When logging spans a Month boundary the data file is closed and a new file started and given sequential file name This allows easy archiving and backup of the logged data The start of a new data file is always synchronised to a natural boundary e g for months the 1st of the month for days 24 00 hours and for hours on the hour The No Of Files to Keep entry determines the maximum number of data files that are to be kept When the number of files kept has reached the value entered as each new file is created the oldest file is deleted For example to Data Log Editor SECTION 11 Data Logging keep process data for 2 years you could keep 24 files of 1 month period The file names are generated automatically based on the Data Set name plus a suffix which is incremented by one as each new file is generated If the Keep all Files option is
296. ng the CFR Test Application to Generate Alarm Error and Event Records 209 13 4 13 Viewing the Alarm Error and Events Data Tables coocccccnnccccnncccnncccnnonononannncnnnonanonnns 210 13 5 Logging Audit Trails to an SQL Database cccccccooonccncnccononcnnnnnonononnnnnonononnnnnnnononnnnnnnononannnnnncnnonnnnos 210 13 5 1 SOL Server Database Prerequisites 0 a ii 211 13 522 Grealing an SQL Server TestiProe tai cs 211 13 5 3 Connection String for an SQL Database cccccccccconccnnnnccnoonnnnnnnnononnnnnnnonnannnnnnnnnnanonnnnnnnnans 212 13 54 R NAMa AN SOL Server Test Pri AAA IA 213 13 5 5 Viewing Audit Trail Records in an SQL Server Test ProjeCt oooccccconcccccnnoncncnnncconnnnnrononnnanos 213 13 6 Further Settings and Configuration cccooocnccccnncconcnncconcnnnonnnnnonnnnononnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnancnonanannnnnns 213 135621 Database File Loc a ea a 214 13 6 2 Microsoft Access Database File Management oc ooonncccoccnccnccnccnncncnnncnconnnnnonncnnnnncnconannnnnnnonos 214 132637 AA Tal Notes si Und doi a 215 19 0 4 SQL Statements cali idol 216 13 7 How to Access Information from a CFR Database ooccccccnonccnccnnoccncnnnnconconnnncnnnnnnronononnnrnncnnanencnonaness 217 18 71 Using GX SUDGIVISOM susurra 217 1372 USING MICrOSOIL EX Cel a decida 218 138 Emain Sna a alate ett hi cle et ete teas fed 221 SECTION 14 Standard Web Pages siii 22 T40 COVES Wenas licua 223 142 e A nn id a ha
297. ng the Colour Change Digital dialog box To access the Colour Change Digital dialog box to add an action select Colour Change Digital from the animation list and click the Add Action button To access Colour Change Digital dialog box to modify an action select Colour Change Digital from the animation list and click the Modify Action button For a list of the objects to which this action is applicable refer to chapter 9 Objects On selection of the Colour Change Digital action the Colour Change Digital dialog box opens Runtime Actions SECTION 9 Animation Colour Change Digital Digtal Expression Carcel Colours cen Browse State D Colour MS g State 1 Colour 0 M Apply changes to abject frame text colou br Apply changes to object background fll colour To specify a change in an object s colour enter a Boolean expression in the Digital Expression field Non Boolean expressions may be entered as long as the result is TRUE or FALSE The colours are specified in the Colour Attributes fields for Boolean State 0 and Boolean State 1 To apply the change to the frame of the object select the Apply colour changes to object frame setting To apply the change to the object background select the Apply colour changes to object background setting On selection of a colour in the Colour Change Digital dialog box the Colour Palette dialog box opens The Colour Palette dialog box is d
298. ngle of the required size Once created rectangles can be edited exactly like polygons To finish editing click elsewhere on the page 4 3 8 Round Rectangle 4 3 9 Text Rounded rectangles can be transparent or filled with a colour or pattern To create a filled rounded rectangle click the 3 button from the Tool Bar To create a rounded rectangle frame click the button Alternatively select a filled round rectangle and click the Transparency button from the Control Bar click the page to draw a rounded square or click and drag to create a rounded rectangle of the required size To edit the rounded rectangle obtain the red grab handles The radius of curvature of the rounding can be adjusted by clicking on the single red grab handle and dragging it To insert text click the A button click the page and type inside the red edit box The cursor is moved round the text using the arrow keys Standard text editing tools and the keyboard can be used and their effect applies to the whole content of the object To edit text double click on it A box opens round the text Press lt Return gt to finish editing and create a new text object on the line below To finish editing click elsewhere on the page 4 4 Creating and Editing Control Objects 4 4 1 Alarm Object Click the amp button then click or click and drag on the page to insert the alarm object 55 Creating and Editing Control Objects SECTION 4 Objects
299. nless you use the optional AS name clause to name the child recordset You can nest the SHAPE command The parent command and or child command can contain another SHAPE statement The parent command and child commang do not have to be SQL SELECT statements They can use whatever syntax is supported by data provider A child recordset will be automatically opened closed whenever its Parent recordset is opened closed A child recordset is effectively a field of its parent recordset therefore whenever a new record is selected in the parent a new child recordset will be generated 1 Create DSN file specifying the required database as the Data Source 2 Configure a Connection to the DSN file In the connection string type Provider MSDataShape FILEDSN lt your file name gt dsn 3 Configure a Recordset as SQL Text and enter the required shape command as the Source See Datashape Source examples 4 After successfully adding a Datashape Recordset it is now possible to add a Child Recordset to the existing Recordset by selecting the right menu option Add Recordset which will now be enabled If the Connection is Live a list of valid child recordset names will be entered in the Source ComboBox 5 Field associations can be added to Child recordsets in the normal manner Child recordsets can be accessed via Script command in a similar manner to normal recordsets bResult DBState DataShape Customers Orders Details Open
300. not checked a popup dialog box performs the edit If it is checked the option is edited on the page with the options in a dropdown listbox To abort the Edit Point Value Digital edit click the Cancel button By clicking the Browse button a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions When completed click the OK button If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message opens During runtime selecting the user input object by clicking the left mouse button results in the digital value being edit either with the runtime User Input Digital dialog box being displayed or the in place listbox based on the contents of the development version Curent State Off Select New State Of COn The user is provided with an instruction based on the Runtime Display Attributes field in this example Select New State and On and Off settings based on the State 0 Text and State 1 Text fields The user clicks the Cancel button to abort the operation 9 3 24 Edit Point Value Analogue The value of a Real or Integer point may be issued to the user for amendment during runtime defined using the User Input Analogue dialog box To access the User Input Analogue dialog box to add an action select Edit Point Value Analogue from the animation list and click the Add Action button To access the User Input Analogue dialog box to modify an action select Edit Point Value
301. not of the same type or you have types mixed between text and general Note This type of querying and updating information in an Excel Spreadsheet does not support multi user concurrent access 12 2 7 Creating a Read Write connection to CSV Text file Connections to CSV or Text files using the Provider installed with ADO version 2 0 like Excel files are also read only hence Records can not be added or amended However CSV and Text files can be updated by converting the data into an Excel spreadsheet and accessing the file via the ODBC DSN driver This is achieved by carrying out the steps as above using the CSV Text file instead Note the Excel provider is still used and a named range in Excel must still be created 12 3 Configuring Recordsets The Recordset is the heart of the Database facility it contains all of the columns and rows returned from a specific action The Recordset is used to navigate a collection of records and update add delete or modify records When a Connection has been added to the Workspace the right menu option Add Recordset will be enabled Selecting this option will invoke the following dialog box Add Recordset i Recordset Properties Table Name C Server Query C SOL Tex Source W Automatically open on connection M Lock Read On C Pessimistic C Optimistic 12 3 1 Name A unique Recordset name will be automatically provided This can be modifie
302. ns AR atlas Hae naa Mo ee 24 A xl A ices lA rT PT NPT N 24 tOo TEXNBO ONO Musicos ia il eee iets 25 tOA MONTA O Na e 25 T3625 TexrUnderine OO Misas seas int oio dao 25 126 6 Nextel AGG G er tc dole e a a cad 25 0 Tex CIVIC A a aed ea cca wma a aca 25 1 6 8 Text Right AlignNeo cccccconncccccconnnncccoccnnnoconnnnnonononnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonanennnnnnnnons 25 GO reia acdc oe ease aires a a A dum naan ncaa oaeeetn eawenen ar eneeeneuretem 25 NOT UNS DAY corsa irsa O A anna damn heaton 25 SECTION 2 A eeA PAP PP e Da 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 creating a AG Cs iris las 27 AMENCINADA Padrino anne as 27 Defining the Properties Of a Page cccccseccecceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeueeeseeeeeseeeeseuueeesaeeeseueeesseeessaneessaeaeeesaes 28 o A 29 ES A In a a Oy eee ee ee eer 29 A PANE Pk OVI WW iota a a a he i a ed Aaah eat 30 ZA EA 30 Saving a Page to a Pro CCl iecs ccs sitentnsasdanifess e 22ssanedonadancidaskeddateuseiadisheades didetyacsseathiqengdshencess 31 20 AVE PAGS AS ana rl eee 32 Table of Contents 2 6 2202 CIOSING a PRADO ii ode ann 32 OA SUBERVISO Preterences asina 32 2 6 1 Startup Preferences ccccccssscccccessececceececcseseececseescecseseceessueeeessaeeessaseeesssageeessegeeessssages 32 2 02 Editing Procter a o 32 209 General PrelevenCes cu tc tl daoc sidas 33 SECTION 3 PONS 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 3 8 3 9 3 10 3 11 3 12 UN A
303. ns settings for the TJ1 The FINS Source Address and FINS Destination Address are not currently used for communication with a TJ1 while the Frame Length and Response Timeout s can normally be left at their default values Network Settings Ethernet Network Driver M FINS Source Address 7 On the second tab enter the IP address of the TJ1 87 Trajexia Devices SECTION 6 Projects 88 Network Settings Ethernet a X Network Driver Workstation Node Number 55 M Auto detect IF Address Fort Number 10 5 5 4 a Cancel Help 8 Click OK to close the Device Type Settings dialog box and then OK to close the Add PLC dialog box 9 Open the point editor 10 Press the button to add a point and enter a point name 11 Change the I O type to Input Output and then press Setup x General Attributes Cancel Advanced Browse Point Hame SamplePoint Group lt Default gt Description Ed Point Attributes Minimum Value 99999999 Masmum Value 99999999 Default Value fo IO Update Rate f Or Change C On Request On Interval Point Type Boolean Integer Real Text LO Type C Memon Input C Output f Input Output 0 Attributes f PLE C OPC Other Setup 12 Fill in the physical address using the format described above We w
304. ns the Server Status Information dialog box for the selected server check the information is correct and click the OK button If the server is not shown in the drop down list the server may not be fully OPC version 2 compliant Check the server documentation Project File This is the name of the current Project file which stores the setup of the OPC items If no name is shown or it is incorrect click the New or Open button as appropriate Clicking the Open button opens the Open Project dialog box from where you can navigate to the project file you wish to open If you want to create a new file click the New button to open the Create Project dialog box In the Create Project dialog box navigate to the directory in which you want to create your new file and enter your File Name Select the appropriate file type Save as type i e File Name opc and click the Save button A Project File name can not be entered from the keyboard File names can only be entered by using the New or Open buttons B GROUPS TAB The groups within the selected project file are listed A Group is made up of one or more items data points that share a common update rate enabling them to be controlled as a single entity For example you could create any number of groups each containing Items that have the same update rate There is no limit to the number of groups you can have in a Project File and each group can contain any number or type of Items dat
305. nsion 1 Use the Look in field to navigate to the appropriate location 2 Select the file from the list offered and click the Open button to return to the Insert Object dialog box 3 On return to the Insert Object dialog box click the OK button to return to the current page and embed the selected object into it at the current insertion point To display the object as an icon follow the procedure detailed in the previous chapter and click the OK button to return to the current page and embed the selected object in icon form into it at the current insertion point It is often more appropriate to link to an object rather than embedding it in the current page By linking to an object rather than embedding it CX Supervisor always has access to the most up to date copy of the object every time the page containing it is opened Placing a check mark in the Link field forges a link between the page and the file containing the object All other activities are carried out in an identical manner to those explained previously Object Packager Appendix F Obsolete Features The following illustrates a Microsoft Excel Chart object which has been inserted in a page Espec Bas cer iia ea i y T HAM A Feq E Epo ora ee ed ee gt d x Unipad F 7 3 Activating an Object To activate an embedded or linked object merely double click using the left mouse button on the object s
306. nt can also be associated with the Scatter Graph Wizard by dragging a point directly from the Point Editor Refer to chapter 3 Points regarding adding a new point and dragging from the Point Editor Change the fonts used for the Scatter Graph via the Font button The font size used by the graph can be automatically calculated for the user by selecting the Auto Size Font field Exit the Scatter Graph Wizard by clicking the OK button to accept the new scatter graph attributes or click the Cancel button to leave the scatter graph unchanged To configure the X axis click the X Axis button To configure the Y axis click the Y Axis button The Axis Scaling dialog box opens 63 Creating and Editing Control Objects SECTION 4 Objects Maximum Scale Value 100 T Style Attributes F Display Minow Ticks Minor Display Units 10 E Display Major Ticks Major Display Unis 20 F Display Minos Units Disolas Majos Units Scale niz Ex Aves ad itch ER ene I Keo Ticks Cn Ant Avis Tick Cou MN F Keep Units On Arcs Scale Lin s Colour MN LI Display Grid Configuration attributes can be altered by typing over the existing field entries The style attributes can be amended by clicking on the settings Exit the Axis Scaling dialog box by clicking the OK button to accept the scaling attributes or click the Cancel button to leave unchanged 4 4 8 Slider Sliders allow values associated with them to increase or decrease between ce
307. nt to the PLC or immediately upon receipt of it from the PLC On completion of the PLC configuration connection click the OK button to continue or the Cancel button to abort Click the Add PLC button to create a new PLC connection Information relating to the selection of this button is described in chapter 6 Projects Device Configuration 3 4 11 Advanced Point Settings Advanced settings can be applied to a new point by clicking the Advanced button in the Add Point dialog box This results in the Advanced Point Settings dialog box being displayed Advanced Point Settings x OLE Access M Head Only Read Write Cancel Non Volatile Validate Point is Within Specified Range In order to access a CX Supervisor point value via OLE2 Automation it must be given OLE Read or OLE Write access The scope of the access can be defined by checking the appropriate setting in the OLE Access 42 3 5 3 6 Amending an Existing Point SECTION 3 Points The point value which is stored to disk may be Volatile or Non volatile by selecting or deselecting the Non Volatile check box A Non volatile point ensures the preservation of the point s value at regular intervals If power is lost or CX Supervisor is shut down for any reason then when the application is restarted the point is initialised to the last saved value These values are saved in a project file with NVP extension To prevent unexpected operation this file is automati
308. nt values before downloading a recipe e Download A recipe is downloaded during runtime This process involves identifying the appropriate recipe and executing the validation code if any exists The download is complete when each ingredient has set its point to the target value 10 3 Viewing Recipes in the Recipe Editor The Recipe Editor allows the creation editing copying and deletion of recipe definitions To use the Recipe Editor CX Supervisor must currently have a project open If no project is currently open select Open from the Project menu to open a previously saved project or select New from the Project menu to create a new project A To open the Recipe Editor dialog box click the button 153 Creating a New Recipe SECTION 10 Recipes Display the Recipe Editor as described in the previous chapter An example of the Recipe Editor dialog box is shown below Recipes are displayed in three columns Recipe Access Level and Validation Script Recipes are usually listed in alphabetical order by recipe name although the ordering can be changed so that the entries are listed according to any of the three column titles For example to see the recipes listed alphabetically by security access level simply click the Access Level field The widths of the recipe fields can be widened or narrowed as required using the mouse to drag the column boundaries Select the Large Icons button to view details with large icons R
309. nts database or the No button to abort the delete operation 43 3 7 44 Note Note Quick creation of many points SECTION 3 Points It is possible to delete more than one point by either selecting points within a range or by selecting individually several points To select a range click on a point to mark the start of the range and click again with the lt SHIFT gt key down to mark the end To individually select more than one point click while holding the lt CTRL gt key down If a point is deleted then any animations or scripts that were using the point become invalid Run the Analyse Application tool to check for References to non existent points Quick creation of many points arial a Marine T rak Earl Miele pk y fret Pisa ook Geta Winder bie OCH BA IBAS STANT Ba om CX Supervisor supports up to 8 000 points which could take much time to create Within the Point Editor you can use Copy Paste which helpfully increments the point name automatically Boilerlemp1 becomes BoilerTlemp2 Boilerlemp3 etc but you still have to edit each point to configure the PLC address and possibly other information Using the Copy and Paste functions Point data can quickly be edited and created for example in grid form using Excel This can prove extremely quick when the design uses contiguous addresses 1 Open the Point Editor 2 Select the points to edit or a single point to act as a template and Copy to the Window
310. number and date stamp Note The Properties button on the Print dialog box gives access to advanced printer configuration functions for the selected printer For details of these functions please consult the Windows User Manual On line Help or the appropriate Manufacturer s handbook 2 5 Saving a Page to a Project When a page has been created it is wise to save it to the project in which it is planned to reside It is good practice to ensure that pages are saved regularly for example to minimise the loss of work in the event of a power failure To save a page click the E button lf this is the first time the page has been saved the Save As dialog box opens This is a standard Windows dialog box and usage depends on your operating system Please consult your Microsoft documentation 1 2 3 To save a page to a project 1 Move to the location where the page file is to be stored 2 Ensure that the Save as Type control is set to CX Supervisor Pages PAG 3 Enter a name in the File Name field 31 CX Supervisor Preferences SECTION 2 Pages 2 5 1 2 5 2 2 6 1 2 6 2 32 4 Click the Save button to save the file Subsequent saves do not cause the Save As dialog box to be displayed After clicking the Save button if the page is currently not assigned to a project a confirmation dialog box opens Alternatively select Save Page from the File menu or use the short cut key combination of lt Ctrl gt S Save
311. number of buttons used to execute scripting actions for the following functions e Login Designer e Logout e Start Audit Trail e Stop Audit Trail e Increment Point e Generate Alarm e Clear Alarm e Generate Event e Generate Error The screen shot below shows a test page with the buttons required to demonstrate the basic functions A CFR Audit Trail Test Login Designer Start Audit Trail Generate Event Logout Stop Audit Trail Clear Alarm Generate Error To demonstrate the basic function of Audit trail logging for a point value then the following edits to the test project should be applied 1 Create an Integer memory point Audit 2 Create a Real Array memory point array size 3 called rAuditArray 202 Creating Running a CFR Application Microsoft Access SECTION 13 CFR Title 21 3 Add a left click script to the Increment Point button Audit Audit 1 rAuditArray 0 rAuditArray 0 0 5 rAuditArray 1 rAuditArray 1 1 0 rAuditArray 2 rAuditArray 2 2 5 4 Add left click scripts to Login Designer and Logout to the buttons shown 5 Add left click scripts to the Start and Stop Audit trail buttons StartAuditTrail and StopAuditTrail NOTE The new scripting functions for StartAuditTrail and StopAuditTrail can be found in the script editor menu under Special Datalogging 13 4 2 Configuring Points for Audit The advanced settings dialog for the point contains
312. number of scripts on a page There is no theoretical limit to the number of scripts associated with a page but performance of the application will be reduced the more scripts there are What is the maximum limit of number of recipes There is no theoretical limit to the number of recipes except limits imposed by the size of memory of the PC In practice no more than 10 000 should be created on a standard PC configuration What is the maximum limit of number of event error log entries The maximum number of entries in the event error log is 500 What is the maximum limit of number of Users The maximum number of Users that can be configured is 500 Why do get the Failed to Install MSVCRT DLL Access Denied error message During installation the following error can occur Failed to install MSVCRT DLL Access Denied This file is locked by the system so must be configured to install on the next reboot However the current user priviledges prevent access to the system registry to do this This problem has only been seen on Windows NT To correct this problem and allow full installation you must log on to your computer with administrator rights Either log onto your network as the network Administrator or log on to your local domain as Administrator or user with local administrator privileges See your Systems Administrator for further details Why do get the message ODBC DriveError The query is not update
313. o add or edit the items To Add Modify or Delete an Item click the Info button Selecting the Add or Modify option will open the Items Attributes window from where the item details can be added or updated Array Size Enter the number of array elements in the CX Supervisor point that this item should have If not an array enter 1 OPC COMMUNICATIONS CONTROL PROPERTIES A SERVER TAB The options in this window allow you to select the correct name of the computer with the OPC Server and select the appropriate server Using CX Supervisor with OPC Servers SECTION 17 Using CX Supervisor as an OPC Note Note Server Groupe beers OPC Communicatons Control Settings OPC Communication Control Settings Name This is the name of the selected communications control The default name for the first control IS OMRONCXOPCCommunicationsControl For each additional control added the number increments by one Computer Name This shows the system name for the computer with the OPC server lf the server is on the same computer as CX Supervisor set to Local If the OPC server is on a remote computer click the Show All button and select the correct name from the list If you cannot identify the PC in the list contact your system administrator Server Name This shows the names of the OPC Version 2 compliant servers installed on the specified computer Make your selection from the drop down list Clicking the Info button ope
314. o fill pattern selection is made the object retains the default of no pattern To apply a fill pattern to a previously created object select the object on the page and click in the appropriate square in the Fill Pattern Palette Fill patterns may only be applied to solid graphic objects They cannot be applied to unfilled graphic objects text objects embedded objects controls or bitmap graphics 1 3 Graphic Object bar 1 4 Control Bar The Graphic Object bar contains the tools to create the graphic objects which can be placed on pages within CX Supervisor RAANM SMROCSOHAIO FeoOAey Misa Selection Graphics Objects In general terms the operation of the Graphic Object bar is simple With a page active the Graphic Object bar is active and operation involves merely clicking on the desired tool to select it and then clicking and dragging to the appropriate point in the page This is not the case with the text polygon or polyline tools however the operation of these tools is fully discussed in chapter 4 Objects Moving the mouse pointer over any of the tools causes CX Supervisor to display a tooltip to describe the tool By default the cursor returns to Selection mode an arrow after drawing an object If you would prefer it to remain in its current state clear the Return to select mode checkbox in the Editing Preferences dialog box which is found on the CX Supervisor file menu For further details concerning the tools
315. occncccccccnncccoconnccnancnnconancnnnonaness 199 SECTION 13 CFR Title 21 Part 11 Functionality ccocncccnccononinnnnonarenanonn 20 A e a PP e E E E E ee vee ee eee een eee 201 ee sollppomed Das ls eo e 201 13 3 CX Supervisor Runtime User and Audit Trail UserlD oocccccccncccccnnccnnnncconcnononnnnncanonononeninonos 201 13 4 Creating Running a CFR Application Microsoft CCESS ooccccconcncccnnnnononnnnnncnnononnnonnanoconannnnnnons 202 13 41 GER TESTA DPIC a ON as AA A eae 202 134 2 Contiguring Points fOr AUA lso alan 203 13 4 3 Default Audit Trail Configuration oocccccoccccconcnoconnncconnnconnnnnnoncnnnonnnnnnnnnnonannnonnnnnonanonenanens 203 13 44 Default Connection SMN deta 204 13 4 5 Logged IN USE sonene a E a E e eE EENEG 205 13 4 6 Starting and Stopping an Audit Trail cccooccccoccncconnncconcninonancnnnanononanononanonnnanenonaness 205 13 4 7 Running the CFR Test Application and Logging to an Access Database cccoccccccncccnnnn 205 13 4 8 Viewing the Audit Trail Database nesca A R 206 13 4 9 Audit Trail Configuration Settings Alarms Errors and Event cc cccccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 207 13 4 10 Configuring Alarms for Audit Trail RecordS oocccccocnccoccnncenncnnoonnnononnncnononnnnncnnnnnnnnonanenes 207 13 4 11 Generating Errors and Events in Audit Trail RecordS ooccccccccnconncncccnnnncoonnncnnnnnnnncnos 209 13 4 12 Runni
316. oduce The first step in troubleshooting is creating steps to reproduce the problem Not only does this help understand the problem but is a requirement so that your potential fixes can be tested with confidence Computers and software are guaranteed to perform the same way with the given data and so there are 303 Information necessary to send to Support Appendix C Troubleshooting always steps to reproduce although sometimes these can be difficult to find It can be timing dependant you have to do this exactly 1 342 seconds later or just very difficult to see a pattern However in most cases problems are quite repeatable When a problem can be reproduced the next step is to refine the steps to determine the exact cause The process should be repeated attempting to leave out one step at a time to confirm if that step is required Where scripts are executed each line should be removed to determine just the required steps to reproduce the problem C 10 Information necessary to send to Support 304 If all these diagnostic suggestions fail and it becomes necessary to contact support please have the following information e Your software licence key e The software version and build number e g 1 2 12 Also state if the project was upgraded from a previous version e The EXACT wording and spelling of any error message e Ifan application is being sent it should be possible to remove unnecessary pages objects scripts points ala
317. oftware application which creates and maintains graphical user interfaces and communicates with PLCs and other I O mechanisms An ingredient must specify a target value for its related point This is the value to which the point will be set in runtime when the recipe is downloaded An integral part of Microsoft Windows which allows Microsoft Windows based applications to be started CX Supervisor is run from the Taskbar In CX Supervisor a text object is a string on a page Attributes such as typeface point size embolden italicise underline left justify flush right and centre can be applied to enhance its presentation A type of point that holds a string A Multi Byte Character Set which not only includes European Characters like DBCS but can also include global support including for Japanese Chinese and Cyrillic fonts However Unicode is not supported on all Windows platforms Recipe validation code is CX Supervisor script language which is used to check point values before downloading a recipe A Visual Basic style scripting language supported by Microsoft s Windows Scripting Host A mode of video display that provides 640 480 pixel resolution with 16 colours and is supported on Video Graphics Adapter systems An integral part of Microsoft Windows which allows Microsoft Windows based applications to be started from icons and for all applications to be organised CX Supervisor can be run from Windows Desktop A
318. og box and then clicking the OK button The re named recipe appears in the available list of entries displayed in the Recipes dialog box and is also available in the development environment using the Recipe Editor To download an existing recipe highlight the recipe from the recipe list and click the l button See chapter 10 Downloading a Recipe for more information To upload an existing recipe highlight the recipe from the recipe list and click the l button See chapter 10 Uploading a Recipe for more information Click the g button to send a copy of the recipe to the printer See chapter 10 Printing Recipes for a typical example of the formatted output A summary of recipe information is available by click the a button The Recipe Information dialog box opens see chapter 10 Viewing Recipes in the Recipe Editor for an example 10 10 2 Downloading a Recipe 162 There are two ways of downloading a recipe definition in runtime The first method is to use a CX Supervisor script function attached to a graphical object on a page such as a push button The function call is DownLoadRecipe lt NameOfRecipe gt The other way to download a recipe is to display the Recipe Viewer as described in the previous chapter Highlight the desired recipe from the recipe list and click the ul button The Download Recipe dialog box opens Downioad Colfer irish Crear frill 50 Yes Wefhkstoene i 100 as The Modify Target button all
319. oint with OLE Read access to be monitored value may be Boolean integer long or string e QueryCount Returns the total number of points in the CX Supervisor database e Queryld stringPointName Returns the WORD id of a given point name The id is an integer in the range between 1 and the total number of points in the CX Supervisor database e QueryOLE wordlD Returns the Read Write access rights of a point as an integer O represents no access type 1 represents Read Only 2 represents Read Write 3 represents an invalid access type e Querylype wordlD Returns the points data type as an integer from a given id O represents a void datatype 1 represents a digital datatype 2 represents an integer datatype 3 represents a real datatype 4 represents a text datatype 5 represents an invalid datatype e QueryName wordlD Returns the points name string from a given identity CX Supervisor provides OLE Automation helper routines and code examples in the OLE2AUTO subdirectory Refer to the file OLE2AUTO WRI in that subdirectory for more information The Microsoft Windows operating environment allows the transfer and sharing of information between applications by using a technique known as Object Linking amp Embedding or OLE pronounced ol Embedding allows drawings sounds or almost any objects to be created within an application and then inserted embedded or linked within another file or document The embedded object can then
320. oject name date and unique number in the project subfolder AuditTrail every time the method StartAuditTrail is called This default functionality can be modified as follows Appending Records To append records to the same access database file each time StartAuditTrail is called ensure the Microsoft Access mdb radio button is Further Settings and Configuration SECTION 13 CFR Title 21 Part 11 Functionality selected and invoke the Audit Database Setup dialog Audit Database Setup Cancel Connection String Provider Microzoft JET OLEDE 40 Build Connection String By un checking the checkbox Create new database when Audit Trail Logging is started audit trail records will be appended to latest database whenever the StartAuditTrail method is called File Size Limit There is a 2GB files size limit on Microsoft Access database files CX Supervisor will monitor the size of the current file as records are appended and when the file size approaches 2GB 1 9GB a new database file will be created automatically 13 6 3 Audit Trail Notes CX Supervisor allows the user to add free format notes to each audit record this is achieved by associating two text points with the Audit Trail To associate text points with the audit trail first add two text points called tAuditld and tAuditNote to the test project invoke the Audit Configuration 215 Further Settings and Configuration SECTION 13 C
321. omatic Login in Windows How do you enable automatic login in Windows The initial Windows security screen can be bypassed which may be useful on systems with no keyboards or systems that should start automatically on boot up Information on how to achieve this is published by Microsoft on its Web site see Q253370 How to Enable Automatic Logon in Windows 2000 and Q315231 How to Enable Automatic Logon in Windows XP Please note the cautions included on registry editing and security What is the functionality of On Condition scripts ON CONDITION scripts will be executed whenever any of the points mentioned in the expression change value or are re evaluated as a result of being input AND the result of the expression is TRUE For example if the expression was Second then the script would be executed 59 times a minute The expression would be evaluated every second when the value changes but when Second was 0 the result of the expression would be FALSE What is the scan time of On Condition scripts There is no scan rate directly associated with the script processing itself In fact the execution is instant as soon as the value has changed The script expression will be checked whenever any of the points are updated a value is input or the value is changed in some way CX Supervisor is an event driven object oriented system meaning is that it is actually the points changing that force the script code to re e
322. ommunications Manager during address validation or the device during a read write request Oxnn09 The CDMPLCCommand function executed is not supported on the selected or open device Oxnn0A The File or filename specified is invalid or could be opened created Oxnn0B The device s operating mode is invalid for the requested operation or the device was opened in an mode not compatible with the requested operation e g attempt to execute CDMGetData when the device was open in Read Only mode Oxnn0C The specified name is invalid it name contains invalid characters 305 Appendix D CX Server Error Codes The operation cannot be performed as the correct access permissions have not be obtained This usually indicates another host currently has the PLC access rights The function or CDMPLCCommand is not supported in this version of CX Server The PLC could not be opened or the operation failed because the PLC is open for communications Check the communication settings and that another application is not currently using the connection method e g Mouse configured and using COM1 port The Point could not be opened or the operation failed because the Point is open for communications Attempt to delete a currently selected User Communications to the device could not be established or the connection has been broken Check the communication settings and connection method to the device An executing command was aborted by the exe
323. on Access Levels from the Runtime Security menu Heng Dpi Access Levels El BB Mens Option Access Level ai Mere Oiption Access Levels General Uniter Comeuncatorn PR F Plc Marcas F Logo Hirune nan rr TA F Setup ler F Dapil Suha A EA Messiaen FF PLC UO Tatie F PirePage F Depi EventEsc Log F PLE Memory Cord F PCE F Part Screen Siles F Depli Parga Vie mE a FPLC Seton fF Det Appkcstion T F Dapp Data Log Visa E Mesi Cogen Tod Ad User F Performance Monitor Tad Fe Piri Hantie As well as a context sensitive floating menu for the development environment there is a floating menu for the runtime environment which is configurable in the development environment It is possible to select the operations to be on the runtime floating menu by clicking the relevant setting across the three tabs General Utilities and Communications It is also possible to assign a level of user privilege to the menu so each level of user sees a different floating menu This is achieved by selecting a user privilege from the relative drop down list The Communications tab permits the activation of CX Server Compiling and Running a Project SECTION 6 Projects 6 11 4 Exit Level components such as the PLC Data Trace and PLC Memory Card components Refer to the CX Server Reference Manual for further information on CX Server components On completion click the OK button to accept changes or the C
324. on can t be found the following error message appears The recipe failed its validation checks Upload aborted Each recipe upload must be completed before another can be started If a recipe upload is already in progress when another is started the following error message appears A recipe Upload or Download is currently in progress The upload may fail at this stage if there are problems communicating with a PLC A communications failure results in the error message Uploading recipe failed A delay in response from the PLC of more than one minute results in the error message Recipe transfer timed out 163 Using Recipes in Runtime SECTION 10 Recipes When the recipe upload is complete all the ingredients are saved and the CX Supervisor runtime environment continues to run in the normal manner An event is logged stating that the recipe was successfully uploaded 164 What is Data Logging SECTION 11 Data Logging SECTION 11 Data Logging This chapter describes the CX Supervisor data logging facilities including how to configure items to be logged the logging of data and the viewing and exporting of recorded data 11 1 What is Data Logging The concept of the Data Logger is the ability to define a number of points and expressions during development which may be recorded while the CX Supervisor project is being executed in runtime These events may be viewed at runtime and recorded for future evaluation They may also be e
325. on is no different Poorly designed applications may run slower provide slower user feedback be difficult to maintain increasing costs and in some cases not fulfil all User Requirements resulting in the application being rewritten Never fall into the trap code first think later 20 1 1 Design your page layouts and navigation flow Traditional design works well for most applications Providing an application with a clear structure can make applications very easy to navigate even if they have many pages e Create a Main overview navigation page This can include basic information like company logo and date time If the application will be using security levels provide buttons to login e Add links from the main page to detailed system areas with either buttons or schematic diagram e g Process 1 Process 2 e Add links from the main page if required to pages dedicated to Alarms Diagnostics Reports Data Logging Statistics etc e If the system has repeated functions e g 5 similar machines instead of creating 5 pages think about creating 1 page that can show data for any machine This can be achieved using indirection and or keeping data in arrays and just setting the index to display the machine you require Minor differences e g a button for Process 1 only can be shown or hidden depending on the index This will soeed up development and also help when the application is maintained Organise the pages sensibly on screen Mak
326. on of SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition systems began meeting at Microsoft s headquarters in Redmond Their interests focused on the use of the Windows operating system within the factory automation environment in particular for the acquisition of real time 243 An Overview of OPC SECTION 17 Using CX Supervisor as an OPC Client data Microsoft at the time were working on the development of OLE 2 0 Object Linking and Embedding and it was apparent that this new technology would replace that of DDE Dynamic Data Exchange which up until that point had been used extensively for data exchange within SCADA systems designed for Windows The new OLE technology was more flexible robust and efficient than DDE OLE provided an opportunity to create a standard interface between the SCADA core and the device drivers responsible for reading and writing data to various automation devices such as PLCs Such a standard interface would benefit both the SCADA vendors and equipment suppliers as the SCADA vendors would not need to invest costly effort in developing software drivers while the equipment manufacturers could provide just one driver that would work with all Windows software in the same way that printer manufacturers already could The first draft of the OPC OLE for Process Control specification v1 0 was released in December 1995 The following year the group of companies involved in the definition of the standard decided that
327. on on the Windows Desktop and select Properties 18 6 Creating a CX Supervisor Client application The client must retrieve the data and process it To create your application e Add any elements required by the Client application e g Graphics Control Logging Alarms etc e Configure DCOM on the client machine to allow access from the server machines See Appendix A for further details e Create points for every data value required by the Client application following these steps ees ae 1 Start CX Supervisor Development and open your application or start a new application 2 Open the Point Editor by selecting the Point Editor option from the Utilities menu or by clicking the 2 button 3 Inthe Point Editor dialog box click the button in the toolbar to open the Add Point dialog box 255 Creating a CX Supervisor Client application SECTION 18 Connecting to a remote CX 256 4 In the Add Point dialog box move to the I O Type options and select the Input Output or Input Output option as appropriate Note that the I O Update Rate and I O Attributes options and displayed Inthe I O Attributes options select OPC Other and click the Setup button This will open the Communications Control Attributes dialog box Inthe Communications Control Attributes dialog box enter the appropriate parameters as follows Commurncahbons Conta Communications Control Attributes Server This shows the name of th
328. ond message box opens to confirm deletion of the library Click the OK button to delete the Library or the Cancel button to the leave the Library unchanged Manipulating Objects Add Object Any object created on a CX Supervisor page can be added to the Library All atiributes assigned to an object that is copied to the Library are stored for example animation information To add an object select it from a page and click the button on the Graphics Library Editor toolbar The Add Object To Library dialog box opens Add Obpect to Libra The name of the object used by the Object Identification control is shown in the Title field Type over this with a new name if required this is the name used by the Library Enter a text description in the Description field and an identifier for the object this is used when it is inserted on a page in the Identifier field Click the OK button to add the object to the Library and place the object in the dialog box Click the Cancel button to abort the operation Further details on the Object Identification control are contained in chapter 1 Graphics Editor Manipulating Objects SECTION 7 Graphics Library Alternatively ensure that the Graphics Library Editor is open click and hold the mouse button on the page object and drag it from the page onto the Graphics Library Editor shown below When the mouse button is released the object is placed in the Library and the Add Object To Lib
329. onfigure an alarm object to filter alarm messages by group name Alarm Reporting In Runtime SECTION 8 Alarms 8 9 1 Alarm Acknowledge Whenever an alarm is raised during a runtime application a confirmation dialog box is optionally displayed requesting acknowledgement of the alarm The dialog box shows the alarm message priority and the date and time the alarm was raised Click the Acknowledge button to close the dialog box AOS No red paint use the reset button Cancel Alarm Decurred at 28 05 38 10 18 25 Priosity Medium Alarm messages are queued so that as each message is acknowledged the next in the queue becomes visible If a new alarm occurs which has higher or equal priority the details are updated to show this newer more important alarm first The dialog box disappears when there are no further alarm messages to be reported Each acknowledgement is logged in the alarm history log with the login name of the current user An unacknowledged alarm does not affect a runtime application 8 9 2 Current Alarms A list of current alarms can be viewed by accessing the Current Alarms dialog box A current alarm is one which has been raised but is not yet cleared and acknowledged The current alarm status viewer can be accessed in a variety of ways and is dependant on the setup of the runtime application Some applications may allow access to the dialog box via the context sensitive floating menu
330. ononnncnncnnononnnononnnnonnnncnnonancnnonnannnnos 272 A 6 Configuring a Server PC running Windows NT or 2000 ooccnccccoccnncccccnoncnonccncononcnnnononcnncnnancnnnnnanons 272 Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions ccccesccceseeeceneecenseecensesenseeeenes 275 Appendix C TROUDIESMOOLING siii 299 C 1 FIOW TO ClaGnOSe Problems seriele tense dacadaesncertaneanadnedtvebstcatiat a A a 299 C 2 E y uate see a Gamal et eG emet Satus 299 C 3 PEC Data MONO qeuadutensasnatdauncseretetwan dd oestesetestone 299 C 4 CX Supervisor Performance MONItOl nassir iiine Ekiden i aeei EEEa a antia drania 299 GAT SOM CN CW eoin ts e ido 300 AZ SUMMA ee a act aes held ea ated ae ele eae Pe ead ied nares ele ee at 300 CAS OP ING tii io liids 300 GAA NGIWGONK it id dl 300 CA A en eon a TO 300 C 5 DIAGNOSTICS dialog DOK siii isla sida 301 Go SCMOUING CM ONS caaea cele beste ce ode ii lala id 302 sn 302 C62 GX SUPERVISO Sta ENOS ida manne 302 O3 RUNIMECENOS iii ai 303 A O A teen hocac rico atid nets orn een dpe a a haa ueeene ta eaamesaatasadaes 303 C 7 PLO Maintenance dialog DOX vts iaa drid 303 C 8 Database Git OFS ariooso cghseeveassantaniaasawdobedgers tosseasene anaE in a a aeaaea ia aaia E aa a aaia aaan iaka 303 C 9 Howto create steps to reproduce AA Been idos 303 C 10 Information necessary to send tO Support ccccoccnnccccnccnccccncnnncnnnccncnonannnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnoss 304 Appendix D GX Serv
331. ontains the option for configuring the system to use Fins Gateway instead of CX Server If the Use Fins Gateway 2003 option is set and Fins Gateway 2003 is present on a computer then the Fins Gateway drivers will automatically be used for runtime communication to CS CJ devices via Ethernet and Controller Link CX Server will still be used for any non CS CJ devices and for any devices that don t use either Ethernet or Controller Link CX Server is always used for configuring the point data Setup Devices Device List l Close Test PLC CJ1G lx Add Modify Delete ddad Runtime Default Settings tor Device Access Security Level fan Users py e Open Device This is an advanced option For most applications communications via the standard Omron CX Server communications drivers is ideal but in some cases performance may be better or more consistent using the Omron Fins Gateway 2003 drivers This option allows the user to choose between the two sets of drivers 85 Trajexia Devices SECTION 6 Projects 6 9 86 Connect a TJ1 motion controller to an Ethernet network For further information about Fins Gateway including instructions on configuring Fins Gateway refer to the online Help system that is installed with Fins Gateway Fins Gateway is provided on the CX Supervisor CD Trajexia Devices Trajexia devices are part of Omron s range of Motion Controllers Points are address
332. ontal Mirror The bd button allows graphical and bitmap objects to be mirrored in the horizontal plane With an object selected clicking the button once flips the object producing a vertical mirror image The following example illustrates the state of an object before and after clicking the Mirror Horizontal button with the object selected 1 4 6 Vertical Mirror The button allows graphical and bitmap objects to be mirrored in the vertical plane With an object selected clicking the button once flips the object producing a vertical mirror image The following example illustrates the state of an object before and after clicking the Mirror Vertical button with the object selected 1 4 7 Transparency On Off The T button changes an object from solid to outline and from outline to solid With an object selected click the button and the object toggles from solid to outline or vice versa The following example illustrates the state of an object before and after clicking the Transparency button with the object selected 1 4 7 1 Set Transparent Colour The Fa button allows the optional transparent colour of picture objects with omp and gif file types to be set By clicking the Set Transparent Colour button and then clicking on a colour on the image you can select the colour that will appear transparent The following example illustrates the effect of using the transparency colour in conjunction with the transparency mode to remove the
333. op Debug Monitor C a Upload Program Download Program Communication Settings Description Point Communication Attributes Enabled Points Disabled Points 4 Enable Digable gt Filter Options All Points Input Points C Output Points C Input Output Points Selection of the Communication Settings option opens the Communication Settings dialog box showing the current settings for the PLC 84 Fins Gateway Option SECTION 6 Projects PLC Communications Settings Network SYS WAY Port COM1 BaudRate 3600 Data Bits P Stop Bits 2 Parity Even It is possible to configure default settings for the runtime via the PLC Runtime Default Settings fields in the Setup PLCs dialog box Communications to the PLC can be enabled on startup via the Open PLC option 6 8 Fins Gateway Option Note CX Supervisor normally uses the Omron CX Server Communications software for both device and point configuration and also for runtime communications reading and writing values from a PLC Another Omron product Fins Gateway 2003 also provides communications drivers that can be used for interfacing to Omron devices Some users may already have this software installed on their computers and may prefer to use it In addition a suitable Fins Gateway 2003 installer is supplied on the CX Supervisor CD The Setup Devices dialog box shown below c
334. or Greek support it has been noted Thai language also needs to be selected Microsoft does not document the reason for this 5 Add all the required languages in the Input Locales tab and set the preferred default These affect how the keyboard is mapped for typing letters and can be changed as CX Supervisor is running by the box in the task bar 6 OK all dialogs and install new OS files from CD if requested Reboot if required 231 Configuring Windows for Language Support SECTION 15 Multilingual Features 15 6 3 Loading Old Projects 232 Note Note Note Note Projects and pages created in CX Supervisor 1 25 and earlier use Microsoft s Double Byte Character Sets known as DBCS or sometimes MBCS for multilingual features The formatting of character tables in MBCS is not the Same as Unicode However old projects and pages are automatically converted to Unicode when they are loaded and will then be saved in Unicode This works without problem if the project is English or contains no extended characters However there can be problems converting old MBCS that use extended German Spanish Finnish and especially MBCS Russian characters Follow this section to load and convert these types of projects properly As always when updating the format of the project file to a new file version always keep a copy of the old project for backup purposes For the conversion process to work properly and all extended characters to be
335. or HMI for example but could have no graphical element which is termed a Blind Server It has direct access to the Devices or Device network and is responsible for collecting the data from the devices Other applications may connect to the Server to read and even control values in the Server These applications are called Client applications or Slaves Clients are often used remotely and therefore are often configured display only applications transferring the data from the Server using the corporate PC network The Clients do not talk directly to the devices and often only connect when required Dewice Hritwror k Several applications are written to share data with each other Actually an application is written as a Server to connect directly to a device but is also a Client using other Servers to connect to other devices through the corporate network 253 Distributed Server SECTION 18 Connecting to a remote CX Supervisor application FE Hmi E 18 3 Distributed Server Several applications are configured as Servers for direct connection so the data for the system is distributed across several machines One or more Client applications collect the data from the distributed servers This can be useful to help performance by distributing the communication on the device connections and server processing It can also provide different security for different clients and offers limited protect against failures as rem
336. or pattern To create a polygon click the amp button click the page to draw vertices To finish creating the polygon either click the right mouse button press lt Esc gt or double click the left mouse button To edit the polygon obtain the red grab handles Click on an edge to add a vertex or click and drag a vertex to move it To finish editing either click elsewhere on the page or press lt Esc gt Creating and Editing Control Objects SECTION 4 Objects 4 3 6 Polyline 4 3 7 Rectangle To split a straight line into two click at the point on the line where the split is required then drag the mouse CX Supervisor creates a new handle which may be moved to the desired point To remove a red handle and the vertex on which it rests click on it with the delete key held down on the keyboard To create a polyline click the button click the page to draw vertices To finish creating the polyline click the right mouse button To edit a polyline obtain the red grab handles Click on an edge to add a vertex Press the lt Delete gt key whilst moving a vertex to delete it To finish editing click elsewhere on the page Rectangles can be transparent or filled with a colour or pattern To create a filled rectangle click the button To create a rectangle frame click the Gi button Alternatively select a filled rectangle and click the Transparency button click the page to draw a square or click and drag to create a recta
337. or warnings Find results show the location including page name alarm name recipe script name object line number and animation as relevant followed by the occurrence itself Double clicking on any line opens the appropriate editor The output can be printed by selecting Print from the right mouse context menu 6 20 Navigating Projects with the Workspace The Workspace is activated by clicking the button The Workspace dialog box opens n Wok Space Project Se mts f Sy Pages BARERY PAG EF IntervalScnptl 105 Project Editor SECTION 6 Projects Selecting the Pages Alarms Recipes Data Logging or Databases tab displays a list of the associated components that form part of the project The Workspace can be docked to any side of the screen or floated above other windows To enforce floating press lt Ctrl gt while moving the window or right click the window title and uncheck Allow Docking 6 21 Project Editor The Project Editor is activated by clicking the Hh button When activated the Project Editor may be displayed minimised at the bottom of the main CX Supervisor window Double click to view the contents of the Project Editor 6 21 1 About the Project Editor The Project Editor provides a window into the contents of a project It lists all the pages currently comprising a project and allows for pages to be moved into or out of projects An example of the Project Editor dialog box is shown as fol
338. ort is a query that is stored in the actual Database They are pre defined and added by the database designer which means they are fixed for the duration of a project Server Queries may have pre defined Parameters which allow criteria to be passed to the query at runtime e g values to filter allowing one query to be used to produce different results Each pre defined parameter must have a Parameter Association defined Because these queries are stored in a compiled and tested form they are more efficient and therefore preferential to running a SQL Query Database SQL Query DBCS DCOM DDE Development Environment DLL Download Executable Expressions Appendix G Glossary of Terms A Database SQL Query or SQL Query for short is interpreted dynamically at runtime The SQL Text can be modified at runtime enabling different Queries to be run for varying situations however the SQL Text has to be compiled on the fly every time it is executed and consequently is less efficient than a Server Query DBCS stands for Double Byte Character Set and is a Microsoft extension of ASCII which uses 2 bytes 16 bits to define character codes With this larger range it can include accented characters extended ASCII characters Nordic characters and symbols DCOM is a distributed version of COM that allows components on different PCs to interact over a network Dynamic Data Exchange A channel through which correctly prepare
339. otate 9 3 19 Visibility 144 When completed click the OK button To abort the Enable Disable operation click the Cancel button If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message opens By clicking the Browse button a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions An object can be rotated about its centre Specify this using the Rotate dialog box To access the Rotate dialog box to add an action select Rotate from the animation list and click the Add Action button To access the Rotate dialog box to modify an action select Rotate from the animation list and click the Modify Action button For a list of the objects to which this action is applicable refer to chapter 9 Objects On selection of the Rotate action the Rotate dialog box opens Rotate E4 Expression Active Expression Range Reguired Rotator Minimum Value 0 Minimum Angle O Maximum Value 100 Maximum Angle 360 f Top Left Top Centre C Top Right C Centre Lett C Centre Centre Right C BottomLeft Bottom Centre Bottom Right C SpeciiedCoOids 3 735 Fix point on screen Enter an arithmetic expression in the Expression field The constraints of the rotation animation are specified in the Active Expression Range Required Rotation fields Rotation is clockwise and the angle is specified in degrees Enabling the Fix point on screen option ensures that the rotation point remains at the
340. ours and l patterns from the tools palette When they are created solid objects are filled with the colour already selected on the palette Further details on transparency are contained in chapter 1 Graphics Editor When there are a number of objects together they can be moved around in a group keeping their relative position To group a number of objects select them activate the Edit menu and click on Group The selection is now regarded as one group with eight grab handles for the group rather than eight for each object the objects can now be moved together When objects have been grouped they can be ungrouped by selecting the object activating the Edit menu and clicking on Ungroup 4 5 12 Raise and Lower 4 5 13 Alignment 70 Each new object inserted on a page is placed on top of the al e previous one Although they may appear to be on the same level objects can overlap so it may be necessary to raise an object so that it appears over the top of another object For further details on raising and lowering objects refer to chapter 1 Graphics Editor Objects inserted on a page can look messy unless they are aligned relative to each other CX Supervisor helps by allowing the contents of a page to align on a grid The grid can be turned on and off as required Manipulating Objects SECTION 4 Objects There are a number of different grid sizes available 4 8 16 32 and 64 pixels The Snap To Grid function snap
341. over a network drive What is the limit of points in a group There is no imposed limit but it is recommended to limit about 1000 points per group There are two main reasons for this e There is a physical limit on how many lines of text the actual list can display This is dependent on the height of the text With large text you may even find that 1000 is too many e When a group is selected the point list is refreshed and re sorted The sort algorithm takes longer if it has a large list to sort This is normally quick but if the list is large and the points are already in the correctly sorted order in the database then it can take a while because of the way the sorting algorithm works Why does setting slider value result in erratic movement of slider action The movement of the slider bar can appear to return to its previous setting once it has been re set After setting the slider to a value it will read the actual value from the PLC this value is then shown in the slider resulting in the slider moving from the re set value to the old value the slider then starts to move towards the re set value This actually better reflects the current value in the PLC but can be undesirable In this case de select the Immediate update on slide move option in the slider wizard to prevent it How do optimise my use of animations Animation actions from the Animation Editor can be applied directly to the objects being animated This
342. own list Pages Tab The Page tab provides information specific to the selected page Where more than one page is configured each page can be selected independently from a drop down list 16 1 1 Data Analysed This following information explains what data will be analysed when the Analyse Application feature is run Always Updating The total number of points that are always updating whether they are on display or not this should be kept to a minimum to reduce bandwidth use only use this if the point value is required by scripts or other actions on pages where this point is not otherwise used Always Updating The percentage of points that are always updating this should be reduced in favour of update on display Always Updating Bytes This is a count of points that are set to Always Sec update at the specified rate It is best to have a small number of different update rates as this helps CX Server to optimise Whilst good to have a low number of different update rates it is also worth remembering that the more updates per second the more bandwidth is used Inputs On Request The total number of inputs that are on request These are potentially less efficient than an on interval a single point being requested is not optimised by CX Server when sending to a PLC many points at the same interval can be sent in the same message with negligible overheads 236 Application Analysis SECTION 16 Application An
343. ows the target value for an ingredient to be modified by means of the Modify Ingredient dialog box shown above An ingredient must already be selected from the list of ingredients for this recipe Any change to the target value is of a temporary nature and is not permanently changed in the recipe definition Any number of ingredients may be modified in this way before the recipe is downloaded Selecting the OK button attempts to download the recipe If for some reason the recipe definition can t be found the following error message appears Unable to find recipe One recipe download must be completed before another recipe download is started If a recipe download is already in progress when another is started the following error message appears A recipe download is currently in progress If any validation code has been entered for this recipe the validation is conducted first If the validation is successful the recipe is downloaded If the validation fails the recipe is not downloaded and the following error message appears Unable to download selected recipe Using Recipes in Runtime SECTION 10 Recipes If there is no validation code to execute the recipe is downloaded anyway The download process consists of setting each ingredient to its specified target value The download may fail at this stage if there are problems communicating with a PLC A communications failure results in the error message Downloading recipe faile
344. palette Each colour in the colour palette is numbered from 0 to 65 number O located in the top left position of the palette with numbers reading consecutively across then down with colour number 65 in the bottom right position of the palette Additionally colour numbers 0 to 19 are named for instance colour number 0 is named black Colours 0 to 15 inclusive are system colours and cannot be mixed Although it is possible to mix new colours using the scroll bars it is not possible to save such changes from this palette To ensure new colours are saved use General Settings from the Project menu Using a 16 colour based screen resolution consult the Microsoft Windows documentation for further information colours 16 to 65 are dithered from the sixteen base colours Higher colour based resolutions are not dithered What is a Recipe SECTION 10 Recipes SECTION 10 Recipes This chapter describes CX Supervisor recipes and the procedures associated with the creation amendment and removal of recipes using the Recipe Editing facility The use of recipes during the running of a project is also described 10 1 What is a Recipe A recipe is a means of preparing a sequence of steps which can be repeated verbatim as and when required A typical use for a recipe is to initialise some point data values prior to the commencement of a particular operation under the control of a CX Supervisor project A CX Supervisor recipe consists of on
345. part of an overlapping group of objects to be moved nearer the top of the group one layer at a time With an object selected clicking the button once moves the object up one layer This continues until the object is at the top Clicking the button with the object at the top of a group has no effect The following example illustrates the state of a group of two objects before and after clicking the Raise Up One button with the black round rectangle selected CE los 1 4 3 Lower Down One 1 4 4 Rotate The button allows an object which forms part of an overlapping group of objects to be moved nearer the bottom of the group one layer at a time With an object selected clicking the button once moves the object down one layer This continues until the object is at the bottom Clicking the button with the object at the bottom of a group has no effect The following example illustrates the state of a group of two objects before and after clicking the Lower Down One button with the grey polygon selected The E button allows graphical and bitmap objects to be rotated With an object selected clicking the button once opens the Rotate dialog box Set the desired angle and click the OK button to rotate the object The following example illustrates the state of an object before and after clicking the Rotate button and defining a 10 rotation with the object selected 21 Control Bar SECTION 1 Graphics Editor 1 4 5 Horiz
346. peration of the controls on the Control Bar is described in the following paragraphs 1 4 1 Object Identification When an object is created CX Supervisor gives it a unique identifier This identifier consists of the object type and a sequential number starting at 1 For example a text object could have an identifier of TEXT_1 a polygon object could have an identifier of POLYGON_3 etc The Object Identification field displays a list of all current objects on a page The identification of an object can be changed by clicking on the entry in the Object Identification control typing over the entry and pressing lt Return gt A confirmation box is provided to double check the operation click the OK button to proceed with the name change or the Cancel button to abort the operation It can at times be difficult to select a particular object if it is mostly obscured by other graphic objects The Object Identification control allows an object to be selected by simply selecting its name from the presented list click the arrow button to display the list and select the desired object On selection the object is highlighted The following illustration shows the Object Identification control in de selected state Polygon_1 The following illustration shows the Object Identification control in selected state 20 Control Bar SECTION 1 Graphics Editor 1 4 2 Raise Up One The 4 button allows an object which forms
347. point can originate be input from and is destined is Output to to the internal computer memory or PLC Pictorial representations of computer resources and functions The CX Supervisor development environment and run time environment are run from icons Each recipe consists of at least one ingredient Each ingredient must be related to an existing point A type of point where the value of the point can only be a whole positive or negative number Within the CX Supervisor script language Item is a generic term for a point OPC item or Temperature Controller item A Java style scripting language supported by Microsoft s Windows Scripting Host Java Virtual Machine A spreadsheet application A windowing environment that is noted for its GUI and for features such as multiple typefaces desk accessories such as a clock calculator calendar and notepad and the capability of moving text and graphics from one application to another via a clipboard CX Supervisor will run only under Microsoft Windows DDE functions communicating with other applications supported by CX Supervisor use Microsoft Windows as a basis A word processing application Nesting Network Non Volatile NOT Object OLE DB Operand Operator OR Pages Appendix G Glossary of Terms To incorporate one or more IF THEN ELSE ELSEIF ENDIF statements inside a structure of the same kind 1 Part of the PLC configuration based on the devi
348. r a Event Log dialog box to be continually updated when subsequent errors or events are added The Clear Event Error Log button clears all entries from the log The Display All Errors Events button lists all events and errors irrespective of priority The list is sorted according to the Date Time Reported by Pri Event or Message field merely not visible The Medium Priority button lists all errors designated as a medium H priority only Other errors and events are not deleted from the log The Low Priority button lists all errors designated as a low priority H only Other errors and events are not deleted from the log they are they are merely not visible The High Priority button lists all errors designated as a high priority ar only Other errors and events are not deleted from the log they are merely not visible 95 Settings SECTION 6 Projects The Events button lists all events Errors of all priorities are not a deleted from the log they are merely not visible Examples of events are system startup system shutdown and user security notices amp The Print button prints the current contents of the error and event log Ensure that the printer is correctly set up before printing The Display Result Code Converter launches the CX Server error code converter and if a CX Server error is currently selected displays further details about possible causes The Error Information Dialog button displays
349. r discarded as required If there are any pending transactions when a connection is closed the user will be prompted to either commit or rollback these outstanding transactions A DBExecute command TransCount is available which returns the number of pending transactions Not all Providers support use of Transactions 12 8 Saving Recordsets as XML 196 Using the DBExecute Save command any Recordset may be saved as an XML file to be imported in to another application XML resembles and complements HTML XML describes data such as city name temperature and barometric pressure and HTML defines tags that describe how the data should be displayed such as with a bulleted list or a table XML however allows developers to define an unlimited set of tags bringing great flexibility to authors who can decide which data to use and determine its appropriate standard or custom tags Example XML is used to describe an Employees phone list lt EmployeeList gt Ere ry gt lt Employee gt John Jones lt Employee gt lt Phone gt 555 1213 lt Phone gt lt Type gt Mobile lt Type gt lt EOEry gt SE Ry lt Employee gt Sally Mae lt Employee gt lt Phone gt 555 1217 lt Phone gt lt Type gt Business Fax lt Type gt lt ROLY gt lt EmployeeList gt You can use an application with a built in XML parser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 to view XML documents in the browser just as you would view HTML pages Datashap
350. r 250 NULL Errors Table CREATE TABLE dbo Errors Errorld int IDENTITY NOT NULL PRIMARY KEY Date varchar 15 NOT NULL Time varchar 10 NOT NULL Priority varchar 10 NOT NULL Message varchar 250 NOT NULL Userld varchar 250 NOT NULL Auditld varchar 250 NULL AuditNote varchar 250 NULL 13 7 Howto Access Information from a CFR Database The following sections provide instructions on how to read the information from a CFR database that was generated by CX Supervisor 13 7 1 Using CX Supervisor When configuring the Data Source information in the Add Connection dialog the following Connection String is required to connect to the password protected CFR database files Connection String Format Driver Microsoft Access Driver mdb DBQ lt project folder gt AuditTrail lt database filename mdb gt SystemDB lt project folder gt lt system database mdw gt Uid Guest The first two lines of the connection string are generated by default The following two lines must be added by the user A path must be given to the System Database file CXSupervisorAudit mdw which is located in the 217 How to Access Information from a CFR Database SECTION 13 CFR Title 21 Part 11 application folder this is where the Guest user is stored and has Read access to the CFR database tables It should then be possible to connect to the database Example Connection String Driv
351. r Comenunrcations Control Clicking the OK button in the Communications Controls dialog box will open the Communications Control Properties dialog box from where the details can be added or updated To edit these properties later select Modify from the Info menu OMRON CX IC Communications Control Properties a Project M IC Communication Control Settings OMRONCA E Communicator Control CX IC COMMUNICATIONS CONTROL PROPERTIES Name This is the name of the selected communications control The default name for the first control is OMRONCXICCommunicationsContro For each additional control added the number increments by one Project File This is the name of the current Project file that stores the setup of the items If no name is shown or it is incorrect click the Info button and select Create or Open as appropriate To open a project click the 15 button If you want to create a new file click the Create option to open the Create Project dialog box In the Create Project dialog box navigate to the directory in which you want to create your new file and enter your File Name Select the appropriate file type Save as type i e File Name msc and click the Save button Adding a Point Linked to a Parameter SECTION 19 Connecting to Omron Industrial Note that a Project File name can not be entered from the keyboard files names can only be entered by using the Create or Open options Device
352. r renaming of Data Set groups follows the windows convention New Groups are added by selecting the Data Set to which the group is to be added and then selecting the Add Group option from the popup menu The new Group is automatically placed in the correct position in the Data Set and given a default group number New or existing Groups can be renamed by first high lighting the current group name and then selecting the Edit option from the popup menu When the edit box opens the name can then be edited in the normal way A maximum of 26 characters is allowed Data Logging at Runtime SECTION 11 Data Logging Unwanted groups can only be Deleted they can not be cut or pasted 11 3 Data Logging at Runtime All data logging is performed on Items which are stored in a Data Set The System can contain many Data Sets and each Data Set can contain many ltems Each Data Set will have its own set of files when the System is run see the chapter 11 File Management The amount of data that is stored in a single Data Set file is determined by the specified period when the Data Set is created 11 3 1 File Management 11 3 1 1 Data Logging Directory All data log files are stored in the directory Data Logging separate from the CX Supervisor files This directory is created automatically when the project runs for the first time A sub directory is used as a safeguard against the accidental deletion of important files by the automatic purge mechanism and to
353. race with intermediate scales e A cursor allows data to be read off the graph Pressing Ctrl and cursor keys allows moving between logged data e A Zoom In and Zoom Out facility Time and Range plus X amp Y axis scrolling are available Previous 44 and Next FF buttons load data files for the previous and next time period e The Refresh button reloads the file from disk e A Live option is used to show the latest data and keep it up to date e Data can be exported to CSV files or to text e The current screen can be printed or print previewed in colour Remote Data Log Viewer SECTION 11 Data Logging e The traces shown using trace selection dialog box as shown initially can be changed using the Select item facility 11 5 Remote Data Log Viewer Data log files are not restricted to a machine that has CX Supervisor installed on it CX Supervisor is supplied with a Data Log Viewer application that enables all the View and Export facilities with the exception of Live updates to be carried out on dlv files that have been transferred to a stand alone machine 11 6 Data Log Export Facilities 11 6 1 Exporting Data via the Export Dialog All the export facilities described in the ExportLog function can be carried out from the Export dialog box which can be invoked from the CX Supervisor right menu script or the Data Log Viewer Options include the following USE GENERATED FILES If this option is c
354. rary dialog box opens Copying an object to a page from a Library is the reverse of the click and drag procedure Objects can also be cut or copied and pasted into the Library refer to chapter 4 Objects When the object is pasted with the Graphics Library Editor open the Add Object To Library dialog box is shown 7 3 2 Modify Library Element To change the name of a Library object click the object in the Library the object name is highlighted in the Graphics Library Editor and click the button The Modify Library Element dialog box opens Modily Library Element Tile Pump TU Sere low pressure cold water ceniiugal pump Iderien Group Enter the new object title text description and identifier Click the OK button to add the new object description to the Library or the Cancel button to cancel the operation 7 3 3 Delete Object To delete an object from the Library select the object the grab handles are not shown however the object name is highlighted in the Graphics Library Editor and click the button A message box opens with the associated object name to remove click the Yes button to delete the object or the No button to cancel the operation 7 3 4 Using a Graphic Library Object in the Graphics Editor A library object can be added to the Graphics Editor in the same way that the Graphics Editor is used to build libraries by dragging from one dialog box to another When a library objec
355. rca Iciar Catena e 00 Eii Et 01 E ti Eat 07 E Est E Eat tr Onn eer ing e PLE porta Porirua hj rondar af PLE boinas Liberar der Low puntos del PLE se roniborican a a parade of pscorad pus maj gund meres 25 Parkde mi sis Abisi won oppaissa 000 un Dick pa Saud ecuaci n de 7 segundo CA aperos Cubpul caer ee RSet D puio pera Couey cor Arte Pins Les puntos de tikdi eC Seti ee io be sort bo fhe PLE tor al senda des ll PLOT miria at es PS general SOP Grae ll LC W D pori det This Tk pol Sei Des Coupon Pd cs Dis Gria de Ser eri td pat ls abs s rreacird lo 00 Bai pul pr gr atan MO Pur E perlas veto m R S cormctado al Pe per k eri ba a E rt FAO FO FOTOS ene P70 oor Ro eri ELO ROOTS RO en FAO ROOTS FONTI y RO Los PCa Tre ited pants are FOOL nod paihere FOTO Cis EngabePunids pnl puntos de entrada pon FOO FOTOS a a ROTOS in re Parl EO07D2 og ADOFOS i Rh Fudd Rie PORO FOTOS y RO077G enel PLE Ur PLC A change nde sabs 01 e PLCien En sena baba ph 35 Gre Dala On Cae en el dardo de FO ne PLE Thi paa ee al Pucon Miren tage iy in de SS eerie FR en a PLC El iioi erculer la Oc art TACOS ES Salen er Hebrid ti Eur und Hiro el rerburdien el barr y el reido est n Seas a 115 sn nal pol n A sn rea A ot Pout pur ed H en Ergas Park sd prer asu punt de rebasa Ge Udo de Deer dara riera pal A mural A ada eon T arde actuibrac n de euro EAE FLG muji be m Progr pe MOTE PLE encia vere Progra MOTE e SPG rus p
356. rd rules for defining their Properties Methods and Events Properties are like settings for example a control s colour would be a property Methods are like functions or actions that can be called for example a control might support a Redraw method Events are actions the control may create like OnLeftClick Following these standard rules allows any ActiveX control from any manufacturer to work in any container 5 2 Inserting a new object A new ActiveX control may be inserted on the page as follows 1 ee fee 1 Click the page in which the object is to be inserted 2 Turn on the ActiveX toolbar from the View Toolbars menu 3 If the control you require already exists on the ActiveX toolbar a Select the required control or if the required control is not on the toolbar b Click button and select the required component from the dialog box Customize ToolBox ICSSEdP TitleBar PCT reeview Control l Curent MICH Class CX GaugeCtl Class Data Command Control Data Range Footer Control Data Range Header Control JDatarPormalizardb cth izard IDEGrid Control 4 Draw a rectangle in the desired position 5 3 Editing Properties at Design Time The properties of ActiveX objects can be edited during the design stage using the following procedure 1 2 3 1 Open the ActiveX Property Browser by clicking the button in the toolbar or by selecting the ActiveX Property Browser option from the Utilities m
357. rgument is the object of the verb An example of an argument in CX Supervisor is DDETerminate channel where DDETerminate IS a command within the script language and channel is the argument upon which the command will act An old standard defining a set of characters Officially using only 7 bits allows definitions for only 127 characters and does not include any accented characters The representation of an image stored in a computer s memory Each picture element pixel is represented by bits stored in the memory In CX Supervisor a bitmap image can be installed as a single object A type of point where the value of the point can be one of two states Essentially the two states are 0 and 1 but these states can be assigned a meaningful designation Examples are State Example Example Example Example 0 OFF FALSE OUT CLOSED 1 ON TRUE IN OPEN COM is a Microsoft technology that allows components used to interact 323 324 Communications Driver Constant Control Object CX Server Database connection Database Connection Level Database Recordset Database Schema Database Server Query Appendix G Glossary of Terms The relevant communications management system for OMRON PLCs in conjunction with Microsoft Windows providing facilities for other SYSMAC software to maintain PLC device and address information and to communicate with OMRON PLCs and their supported network types Within CX Supervisor
358. rk dialog box refer to the Microsoft Windows User Guide An image can be selected and resized just like many other graphical objects Picture objects with gif and bmp file types support optional transparency By clicking the Set Transparent Colour button on the Control toolbar and then clicking on a colour on the image you can select the colour that will appear transparent The Transparency button on the same toolbar toggles transparency on and off The Resample Pictures options available from the Edit menu can be used to reduce the file size of the CX Supervisor project and pages by intelligently re saving picture objects It is most efficient when a large source image has been resized on the page to be much smaller than the original Resizing a previously resampled picture to much larger dimensions may cause the image to become blocky In this case it is recommended to reload the Original image file and then resize resample as required 4 4 3 3 Metafile Conversion to CX Supervisor Objects Note Picture objects with metafiles can be converted into CX Supervisor page objects This allows you to break apart the image and animate its sub parts Both Windows Metafiles wmf and Enhanced Metafiles emf can be loaded into a picture object and then converted to CX Supervisor objects To start the conversion select a picture object containing a metafile image and choose Convert to CX Supervisor Objects from the Edit menu The pic
359. rms recipes datalogging and database connections e Clear description of the function that the Manual says the software should provide e Clear precise repeatable steps to recreate the issue on a new application Note Appendix D CX Server Error Codes Appendix D CX Server Error Codes When errors occur in the communication package CX Server an error code may be displayed in the CX Supervisor Error Log To explain the cause of this error e Inthe CX Supervisor Error log press the Display Code Converter button to launch the Error converter and show further details See Chapter 6 Projects Events Error messages for more details e Launch the Error Code converter from the Start menu under the CX Supervisor menu and type in the code displayed Alternatively the full list of causes is below The cause is only the last 2 digits of the error code for example if the error shown is 0x8aib then ignore the 8a and just look up Oxnn1b Oxnn03 The executing function was stopped in the applications callback handler Oxnn04 The return specified buffer is not large enough to hold all the data requested The specified name is not unique within the open project file Oxnn06 An unspecified error occurred in CX Server that is not handled by any other error code CX Server has not been initialised by the application Oxnn08 The specified address is invalid for the selected or open device This error may be generated by the C
360. roject menu to create a new project Facilities exist to add an alarm modify an existing alarm copy an alarm remove an existing alarm following confirmation and display the alarm list in name type or description order 8 2 Alarm Settings To open the Alarm Settings dialog box select the G button from the Alarm Editor toolbar The dialog box opens 115 Viewing the Contents of the Alarm Database SECTION 8 Alarms Alarm Settings On Alarm Automatically Display Alam Stabu Viewer Cancel Alam History Log Masamum entres in Staus Viewer o Maximum entes in History Log 200 Log system start stop messages Alam Status Messages C Use Language File Text Flaiced Text Alarm Cleared Text exa AcknowledgedText Acknowledged Auto Acknowdedged Text automaticaly Acknowedged In the On Alarm Automatically Display area set the Alarm Status Viewer and Alarm History Log settings as required When these options are set the Current Alarms dialog box or Alarm History dialog box respectively displays automatically in runtime when an alarm occurs Set the Maximum entries in Status and Maximum entries in History Log fields to the desired values The numbers specify how many messages are displayed in the respective viewer dialog boxs in runtime Select the Log system start stop messages setting to ON if required Note If more messages exist than are requested to be displayed the most recent messages are displayed
361. rosoft Excel Sub RequestingArrayValues Dim chan As Integer Chan DDE LNItiare SECS Poin If chan lt gt 0 Then Request Arrayl from CX Supervisor and store in 316 a row starting at Range Cells 1 1 Arrayl Reguest Array2 a column starting Range Cells 2 1 Array GOT Request elements store in R3Cl EZ R1C1 Cells 1 3 DDERequest chan from CX Supervisor and store in al RACI Cells 4 1 DDERequest chan 2 a a 3 from Array2 ana OLE Automation Appendix F Obsolete Features The or format can be used to delimit the array index Cells 3 1 DDERequest chan Array2 2 Cells 3 2 DDERequest chan Array2 3 EMO LE End Sub F 5 OLE Automation Note F 6 OLE Overview OLE Automation provides a mechanism whereby one application can control another In order to access a CX Supervisor points value via OLE Automation it must be given either OLE Read or OLE Write access This can be achieved by checking the appropriate box in the Advanced Point Settings dialog box when the point is created or modified All CX Supervisor System points are given OLE2 read access by default CX Supervisor exposes the following Runtime functions via OLE2 Automation e SetValue stringPointName Value Enables any point with OLE Read Write access to be modified value may be Boolean integer long or string e GetValue stringPointName amp Value Enables any p
362. roughput or high logging speed Also unlike the standard Datalog files there is no standalone viewer for instant viewing The ADO interface used to access Data Sources does not provide any mechanism for creating Databases or Tables therefore it is not possible to automatically create a data source Unpopulated data sources for use in Database Logging must first be created using the specific software for your choice of data source e g MS Access To configure CX Supervisor to log to a database e Create an unpopulated data source or template for use in Database logging e Create a Database connection in the Workspace Database editor to the database created above Add a recordset with a read write lock and fields with Field Property configured as Add so records can be added e Create a Database Link in the Workspace Logging editor by selecting Add Db Link from the popup menu to show the Add Database Link dialog box e Create Field Links for each field to log by selecting Add Db Field from the popup menu to show the Add Field Link dialog box 11 7 1 Add Database Link Dialog 11 7 1 1 Link Name The Add Database Link dialog box show below is show when the Add Db Link menu option is selected from the Data Log editor and the identical Modify Database Link dialog box when the Edit menu is selected Database Link Link Name DBLink2 Cancel Connection csv E Recocdset Dataset Sample Aa
363. rrent actions by clicking the Modify Action button in the toolbar The short cut keyboard combinations for Cut Copy and Paste operations are valid within the Animation Editor dialog boxs Highlight part or all of a field and type lt Ctrl gt X to cut the text or lt Ctrl gt C to copy the text insert the cursor at the desired dialog box field and type lt Ctrl gt V to paste the text Since the cut and copy operations store the information in the Windows Clipboard it may be pasted to another dialog box or application The list of runtime actions can be viewed in a number of ways providing simple or comprehensive details as follows Click the 24 button to view details with large icons Click the button to view details with normal icons button to view details as a list Click the button to view details as a list including name type expression priority and description information The details can be sorted in ascending order by clicking once or in descending order by clicking twice in the appropriate field Graphical objects have no relevance at Project level as they cannot be referenced Scripts can be applied to a project to manipulate points These scripts are associated with events that occur throughout the operating session A script is made up of one or more simple statements that together make script code Refer to the Script Language Manual for explicit details regarding the construction and syntax of scrip
364. rs od unitprice X od quantity as ExtendedPrice from customers inner JOLN orders on customers customerid orders customerid inner join order details as od on orders orderid od orderid AS rsDetail COMPUTE ANY rsDetail contactname AS Contact SUM rsDetail ExtendedPrice AS CustTotal rsDetail BY customerid AS rsCustSummary COMPUTE SUM rsCustSummary CustTotal As GrandTotal rsCustSummary Note The missing BY clause in the outer summary This defines the Grand Total because the parent rowset contains a single record with the grand total and a pointer to the child recordset 12 10 8 Grouped Parent Related to Grouped Child example SHAPE SHAPE select from customers APPEND SHAPE select orders year orderdate as OrderYear month orderdate as OrderMonth from orders AS rsOrders COMPUTE rsOrders BY customeria OrderYear OrderMonth RELATE customerid TO customerid AS rsordByMonth AS rsCustomers COMPUTE rsCustomers BY region 199 Examples SECTION 12 Databases 200 Overview 13 1 Overview SECTION 13 CFR Title 21 Part 11 Functionality SECTION 13 CFR Title 21 Part 11 Functionality This chapter describes CX Supervisor CFR functionality Part 11 of Title 21 of the Code of Federal Regulations CFR specifies guidelines for the keeping of electronic records and the use of electronic signatures CX Supervisor provides features that can assist customers to comply with the validation requirements of Part 11
365. rs and on site maintenance engineers native language is different to the end customers The system can be switched to a comfortable language during work and easily switched back to the customer s requirement prior to hand over All translations for all system text like dialogs menus and errors etc are installed automatically User defined text entered at development time like button captions static text like Value graph titles etc can be exported to a text file for easy translation into as many additional languages as required At runtime the user can then change languages dynamically i e without having to exit and restart the application The translated system text and user defined text is automatically loaded and displayed 15 3 1 Changing Language at Runtime The user if permitted by security settings may change the language at runtime The user may right click the application and select the Language Settings option see Chapter 6 Projects Menu Option Access Levels for details of the right click menu and setting access permissions 227 Translating User Defined Text with the Translation Tool SECTION 15 Multilingual Fea Note Language Settings E4 Default Espa Cancel Detaulk Language for User Defined Text Deutsch English Espa ol Finnish French Italiano Nederlands Belgie Norwegian Be In this context lt Default gt means the language selected as the Default startup
366. rtain limits They can also ensure that values do not exceed previously set limits Click the button then click or click and drag on the page to insert a slider To edit the Slider double click on it The Slider Wizard dialog box opens Slider Wizard ua my my Proporcional Sider Windows 3 x style sider Integer Real Point Minimum Slider Value O Maxinum Sbder Vale 100 2 Miranum Value al Left Bottom I Immrecdate update on gide move The Wizard allows entry of in the Slider Style Style Attributes and Configuration Attributes fields To select a style click on an option from the list box The Style Attributes can be either Display Vertical or Display Horizontal To select a Boolean point click the Browse button and select a point from the displayed list Click the OK button to accept the point or click the Cancel button to leave the point unselected Clicking the Add Point button allows a new point to be created prior to association with the Wizard An existing point can also be associated with the Wizard by dragging a point directly from the Point Editor Refer to chapter 3 Points regarding adding a new point and dragging from the Point Editor Enter the maximum and minimum slider values and check the box to display the minimum value at the left or bottom of the page 64 Creating and Editing Control Objects SECTION 4 Objects Exit the Wizard by clicking on the OK button to ac
367. ry and Overview page 299 CX Supervisor Performance monitor Appendix C Troubleshooting C 4 1 Overview C 4 2 Summary C 4 3 CPU Time C 4 4 Network C 4 5 PLC 300 Shows an overview of the headline performance of all other components Provides a Summary view totalising and averaging property values from all PLCs on all networks Lists specific CPU and process information including processing times for all scripts and all callbacks Totalises properties for all PLCs on each network The PLC Average Latency ms field shows the physical delay of the network and PLC response time Depending on the PLC setup and network this should be 9 30ms If this is drastically higher it could be the cause of performance problems Try some of the following steps to reduce it The PLC Average Latency ms field shows the physical delay of the network and PLC response time Depending on the PLC setup and network this should be 9 30ms If this is drastically higher it could be the cause of performance problems Try some of the following steps to reduce it e Test on a dedicated network or if not possible with other nodes disabled This is to ensure it is not due to network loading or other external factors e Try with the PLC in STOP mode If this has an impact double check the PLC settings This can vary depending on PLC type but some require a longer scan rate so more free CPU time is available to service the communications w
368. s The Standard Web Pages offer the choice of 5 languages English French German Italian and Spanish The selected language can be dynamically changed from the Seitings page within the web browser 15 9 Adding Unsupported Runtime Languages 12 Bek Although an impressive number of runtime languages are supported you may require a language not listed A developer can easily add support for further languages to the CX Supervisor runtime To add additional runtime languages follow these steps 1 Copy the file English Ing in the installed application folder default is C Program Files Omron CX Supervisor and rename the copy with the language name e g American Ing 2 Translate the text between quotes Note that formatting characters like s or d indicate a position for inserted text or numbers so should be left in the relevant place Also the amp character used in menus signifies the keyboard shortcut for the item so select an appropriate character in the translated language 3 The Runtime will now automatically show any new files with LNG extension in the Language Settings dialog 4 Repeat steps 1 and 2 above for the same file with the LND extension This provides the translations for the Data Log Viewer 5 Create a new language file for the user defined text as described in the section User Defined Text above To deploy this language to a new machine just install CX Supervisor as normal and then copy th
369. s Launch and Configuration lists by clicking the Edit Default button in each case The user added should have Administrator rights on the local PC If not it may be necessary to add user groups INTERACTIVE and NETWORK as well From the Applications tab configure the properties for required applications e g SCS OpenDataServer and OpcEnum On the Security tab add the required users to each of the Custom Permissions The users added should have Administrator rights on the local PC If not it may be necessary to add user groups INTERACTIVE and NETWORK as well 273 Configuring a Server PC running Windows NT or 2000 Appendix A Configuring a PC 274 Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions This appendix lists some FAQs and of course their answers What is the maximum limit of number of points For Machine Edition projects it is possible to create an application with up to 500 user defined points In theory each of these could be an array of 1024 elements totalling 512 000 addresses For PLUS edition there is a limit of 8000 user defined points totalling over 8 million addresses if using arrays In practice the communications medium number of active points and their frequency of updates determine the maximum limit See What is the maximum limit of communication updates What is the maximum limit of communication updates The charts below show the number of simultaneous re
370. s Clipboard 3 Start Excel 4 Position the cursor in column A and paste the CX Supervisor Points into Excel The worksheet should resemble the following eS pea ox 2 ER 5 4 qu tare Each row is a single point and each column is a setting of that point Some settings may be hidden on the right Use the scrollbar to view 5 Edit the point details as required To quickly create new points with the same settings select the whole row by clicking the row number on the left A range can now be drawn to be filled by dragging the black square box on the bottom left of the range selection Excel automatically increments any data ending in a number This can be very useful for Names and PLC Addresses columns A and F but take care with other columns If other columns are wrongly incremented like PLC Name Array size and Data Range columns E G and K these can quickly be copied by selecting the correct value e g G1 then using the square box to highlight the column of data to fill To see the fill options hold down the right mouse button before draging the square box Repeat for each column 6 When editing is completed select the row s to required and select Copy Runtime Point Maintenance SECTION 3 Points 7 Switch back to the Point Editor and select Paste Note If the pasted point names already exist CX Supervisor will automatically add or increment a number on the end to prevent overwriting If you wish to
371. s an Array point the whole array will be processed i e multiple fields will be read written or added This concept is called Paging Paging is supported by the Database script functions enabling you to manipulate and navigate the database a page at a time CX Supervisor determines the page size by using the number of elements in the Array point used in Field Associations i e if an array point with 10 elements is used then a page size of 10 will be used In order for paging to work sensibly you should ensure that all array points used in multiple field associations for a particular Recordset are of the same size If arrays of differing length are used the smallest array size will be adopted as the page size Paging only operates on Field Associations that have the Property Type Value selected this enables you to have Field Associations with a Property Type of Name or Add associated with single points in the same Recordset without effecting the page size determined by the array points Paging is designed to operate at the Recordset level the concept of levels is explained in the chapter on DB Script functions If you perform a Read operation on a recordset that has paging in force then a page of records will be read into all the Field Associations connected to the Recordset In contrast to performing a read operation at the Field level which will override the page size and use the individual fields length 12 5 Configuring Paramet
372. s and font families are printer dependent therefore changing the printer within the Printer Setup dialog box accessed from the File menu changes the fonts which are available within the Font Name field The Font Size field contains a list of point sizes available on the host version of Windows for the selected font The list is presented in numerical order The following illustration shows the control in de selected state ei The following illustration shows the control in selected state Either click the cursor into the editable area of the control and enter a new point size or click the down arrow and select a new point size from the presented list Grid SECTION 1 Graphics Editor 1 6 3 1 6 4 1 6 5 1 6 6 1 6 7 1 6 8 1 7 1 8 The control displays the current point size for the selected block of text If more than one block of text is selected having different point sizes the edit part of the control is empty However selecting a font from the supplied list or typing in a new point size still sets the point size for all the selected blocks of text Text Bold On Off The B button allows any selected text objects to be set to bold when the Text Bold button is pushed in or normal when the Text Bold button is released Text Bold only applies to text block text and to text on buttons other controls and graphics cannot be emboldened Text Italic On Off The Z button allows any selected text obje
373. s described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions When completed click the OK button If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message opens 9 3 20 Display Value Digital Note The state of a Boolean point may be displayed using the Display Value Digital dialog box To access the Display Value Digital dialog box to add an action select Display Status Text from the animation list and click the Add Action button To access the Display Value Digital dialog box to modify an action select Display Status Text from the animation list and click the Modify Action button For a list of the objects to which this action is applicable refer to chapter 9 Objects On selection of the Display Value Digital action the Display Value Digital dialog box opens Display Value Digital bud ora motor a Cancel Displayed Test Browse mator is pet to H State 0 Text FALSE State Tex TRUE An expression based on Boolean point must be entered This expression is typed into the Digital Expression field A text string to coincide with the display of a Boolean value can be entered in the Displayed Text field The position of the displayed value within the text field is specified by entering a character into the Displayed Text field To include a character as part of the text insert it as an escape character For example to display Box 1 type Box W Only hashes to
374. s the Generate Alarm button 5 Acknowledge the Alarm 6 Press the Clear Alarm button 7 Press the Generate Event button 8 Press the Generate Error button 9 Press the Stop Audit trail Button 10 Exit Runtime 13 5 5 Viewing Audit Trail Records in an SQL Server Test Project Launch the SQL Server Management Studio and view the four new tables that have been created and updated with Audit Trail information The screen shot below shows the SQL Server Points table as created using the test application E Microrolt SOL Server Management Studio Ple Edt ew Project QueryDesgner ook Window Community Help I Hew Query L t ch ca LA ad ibi 1 MAA Dx Table dboPoints rra Connect gt 4 Pontid Date Tiree ame prema 50 Server 01 A HE oreo scx ee aa PA 194 OJO DIO MAn rra 3 irie Daae a Y Database Snapshots T aii lg OOOO 15 35 19 mAy 1 sy Databarso Diagrama 117 TG Sere Mud J Tables rte Tats dbo Alarma ir WOD TS AJAT i Z dbo Error 2 BOZO 19 73 16 ery a TD dbo Events SF 20 Ses ree OOO 15 16 ALAN ALEI Wi MA i dbo Ports kE dj Ver i de P hh Cel ts Bead ny NOTE Subsequent Audit Trail records will always be appended to the existing tables There is no option to create new database file on each StartAuditTrail event This option applies only when using the Microsoft Access database 13 6 Further Settings and Configuration Further Settings and Configuration for consi
375. s to object background fill colour Enter an expression in the Analogue Expression field which results in a real or integer value Only when the result of the expression reaches a value identified as a threshold does the object change colour The object can have one of five colours depending on the value of the expression lt changes between these colours at the thresholds For example choose the colour blue for the first colour and the value 20 for the first threshold The object then changes to blue until the value reaches 20 at which point it changes to the second colour To apply the change to the frame of the object select the Apply colour changes to object frame setting To apply the change to the object background select the Apply colour changes to object background setting On selection of a colour in the Colour Change Analogue dialog box the Colour Palette dialog box opens The Colour Palette dialog box is described in chapter 9 Common Colour Palette Click the Clear button to reset all colours and re start To abort the Colour Change Analogue edit click the Cancel button By clicking the Browse button a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions When completed click the OK button If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message opens 9 3 16 Colour Change Digital 142 Objects can be animated so they change between two colours This is achieved usi
376. s to the nearest grid To align page objects and view a grid select Grid from the View menu Select the required grid size or click on Snap to Grid to align the most recently entered objects on the chosen grid The grid can be turned off by selecting Off An example of the use of the grid is shown below J Le In this example the selected polyline is in the process of being moved down The presence of the grid governs the movement of the object in all directions As the object is moved its position snaps an equal distance from the original position of the object against the grid Currently the object has been moved five grid steps down shown by the bracket 4 5 13 1 Alignment Toolbox Objects on a page can be aligned in a variety of ways using the Alignment toolbar It is possible to E fect E peranane 71 Point Substitution SECTION 4 Objects 1 25 Secs 4 5 14 Zoom 4 6 4 6 1 72 When performing alignment operations the Master Object determines how the other objects are aligned The Master Object i e the last object clicked on has green sizing handles To align objects 1 Select the objects to be aligned 2 Ensure the correct master object is selected 3 Choose the appropriate tool from the Alignment toolbar The alignment operations available at any one time vary according to the number of objects selected It is often useful to be able to view an object in more detail The Zoom opt
377. s which is stored in Order Total 12 10 4 Group Hierarchy example SHAPE select customers customerid AS CUST TO OLE Su from customers inner JOT orders on customers customerid orders customerid AS rsOrders COMPUTE rsOrders BY cust_id 12 10 5 Group Hierarchy with Aggregate example SHAPE SHAPE select CUSCOMErS orders orderid orders orderdate fromc ustomers inner join orders on customers customerid orders customerid APPEND select od orderid od unitprice od quantity as ExtendedPrice from order details las od AS rsDetails RELATE orderid TO orderid SUM rsDetails ExtendedPrice AS OrderTotal AS rsOrders 198 Examples SECTION 12 Databases COMPUTE rsOrders SUM rsOrders Orderlotal AS Custiotal ANY rsOrders contactname AS Contact BY customerid Note The inner SHAPE clause in this example is identical to the statement used in the Hierarchy with Aggregate example 12 10 6 Multiple Groupings example SHAPE SHAPE select customers lt 4 Od Unitprice od quantity as ExtendedPrice from customers inner join orders on customers customerid orders customerid inner join order details as od on orders orderid od orderid AS rsDetail COMPUTE ANY rsDetail contactname AS Contact ANY rsDetail region AS Region SUM rsDetail ExtendedPrice AS CustTotal rsDetail BY customerid AS rsCustSummary COMPUTE rsCusctoummary BY Region 12 10 7 Grand Total example SHAPE SHAPE select Custome
378. ses Software Tokens Hardlock parallel port dongles or USB Dongles from older versions Only USB Dongles for this version will active the Runtime Creating a Project To create a new project within CX Supervisor select New followed by either Machine Edition project or CX Supervisor PLUS project Choose a name and location Click OK to create the project Amending a Project T 2 3 To amend an existing project it must first be opened assuming it is not already open To open a project select Open from the Project menu CX Supervisor displays the Open dialog box This is a standard Windows dialog box and usage depends on your operating system Please consult your Microsoft documentation 1 Locate the drive and directory where the desired project is stored 2 Select the desired project from the list presented 3 Click the Open button to load the project When the project is loaded the various editing tasks required may be carried out such as editing page or graphics formats as described in the other chapters of this manual Saving a Project 1 2 dao Note When a project has been created it is wise to save it It is good practice to ensure that projects are saved regularly in case of an event such as a power failure To save a project select Save from the Project menu If this is the first time the project has been saved the Save As dialog box opens 1 Move to the location where the project is to be stored 2 En
379. sible to import points from the CDM file of another CX Supervisor project but this is not recommended as only the name type and address are imported A better method is to copy the points from one application to the clipboard and paste them in the required application This way all point information is copied Steps to import from another CDM file 1 Open the Import PLC Points From Another CX Server Project dialog box Click the Open Project button and find the project to import from Select the tab depending upon the I O type required Click the Add button and select the symbols required Add these to the CX Supervisor project by clicking the Add button Press OK to return Repeat for other 1 O types Press OK to finish CON OO Bb Y PY 3 11 System Points 3 11 1 Time Points 46 System Points are those points that are pre defined within CX Supervisor They cannot be edited or deleted but their attributes can be viewed All system points can be selected from the System Point dialog box System points are listed in the points list and are denoted by a symbol preceding the point name To view system points only select System Points from the Group field When listed the Boolean Points Integer Points Real Points Text Points and All Points buttons on the toolbar are unavailable for selection To view other points select All Groups from the Group field The following table describes system points for us
380. size Height dialog box to add an action select Resize Height from the animation list and click the Add Action button To access the Resize Height dialog box to modify an action select Resize Height from the animation list and click the Modify Action button Refer to chapter 9 Objects for a list of the objects to which this action is applicable On selection of the Resize Height action the Resize Height dialog box opens Henze Herghi Actee Expression Range Requied Height Minimum Value 0 Minimum Heaght O Maimu Value 100 Maximum Height 135 Bottom Cente Top To define the animation an expression consisting of a number of operators and operands which may be based on the status of a point must be entered in the Expression field 137 Runtime Actions SECTION 9 Animation The boundaries in which the object moves are inserted into the Active Expression Range Required Height fields The Maximum Height specifies the required height in pixels of the object when the result of the expression reaches the Maximum Value The Minimum Height specifies the required height in pixels of the object when the result of the expression reaches the Minimum Value A value within the maximum and minimum values results in a proportionate height between the minimum and maximum heights The resizing also requires an anchor and direction in which to stretch or shrink This can be specified as the top of the object bottom
381. ss to process data ease of plug and play operation and efficient utilization of development resources are the main benefits of OPC technology OPC brings the value that comes with the use of standards including reduced training costs reduced custom development costs and lower long term maintenance costs By design OPC compliant products work seamlessly with one another With this plug and play approach off the shelf components can be brought together efficiently to solve immediate requirements In addition long term maintenance and upgrading can be achieved by removing and replacing individual components in a system without any work needed to wire up the new pieces To illustrate the savings imagine the increase in cost if every household appliance had its own type of wall plug Eliminating customisation drastically reduces the cost of an automation system by saving money during acquisition installation and maintenance 17 1 3 3 Freedom of choice With the introduction of OPC compliant manufacturing automation products users are provided their due right to select and implement systems comprised of best in class components without the pain of custom interfaces This user benefit is sometimes referred to as freedom of choice For example both Netscape and Internet Explorer can browse the web equally well but people use the browser they like best As a result of this freedom of choice vendors will need to become more competitive and offer
382. structions for using these tools and controls and is supported with suitable screen displays About the Graphics Editor Palette Bar The Graphics Editor enables a variety of objects to be created on a page Supported objects are e Graphical objects e Control objects e ActiveX objects Graphical objects are geometric shapes for example ellipses and polygons but also include Text objects Control objects allow information to be displayed and entered in clear way through the use of Wizards Examples of control objects include buttons and Trend Graphs ActiveX objects or controls are from sources external to CX Supervisor Refer to chapter 4 Objects for further information regarding control objects and bitmap objects Refer to chapter 5 for further information on ActiveX Objects The tools are contained on the Control Bar and the Palette Bar The palettes allow all similar types of tool to be kept together The various tools and tool bars are discussed in the following chapters Status and help information is presented in a Status Bar located at the bottom of the main CX Supervisor window The Palette Bar contains the tools to apply colour and style options to the graphic objects placed on CX Supervisor pages Foreground Colour Line Style Palette E a Background Colour Fill Pattern The Palette can be removed or re displayed at any time by selecting Palette from the View menu A tick next to the name
383. support the Criteria constraints listed above for those schema queries 12 7 Using Transactions Modifications of data in the database e adding modifying and deleting records can be grouped so that all modifications take place at the same time This group of modifications is called a Transaction A Transaction includes any 195 Saving Recordsets as XML SECTION 12 Databases modifications to data in a connection regardless of the Recordset A transaction is started by calling DBExecute with the BeginTrans command From that point any request to add modify or delete records are stored instead of being immediately processed The Transaction is completed either by calling DBExecute with the CommitTrans command which processes all the stored requests in one go or by calling DBExecute with the RollbackTrans command which discards all the stored requests leaving the database as it was when the Transaction started 12 7 1 Nested Transactions Note Note Transactions may be nested that is a new transaction may be started before the preceding transaction has been completed In this case any CommitTrans or RollbackTrans commands relate to the most recently started transaction and any further Commitlrans or RollbackTrans commands relate to the transaction begun before it Care should be taken to ensure that each Begin Trans is matched with a CommitTrans or RollbackTrans to ensure that your work is saved o
384. sure that the Save as Type field is set to CX Supervisor Projects SCS 3 Enter a name for the project The name under which the project was created is offered as a default 4 Click the Save button to save the project Subsequent saves do not cause the Save Project As dialog box to be displayed Printing a Project 1 2 3 All of the printable views of the project can be printed together including page layouts and all scripts This can be useful as a development aid for maintenance and for project documentation 1 Start CX Supervisor and load the project to be printed 2 From the options dialog box select the items to print and click OK 3 Select the printer to print to and click OK Device Configuration SECTION 6 Projects 6 7 Device Configuration To amend the device configuration or create connections to a PLC or temperature controller click the m button This results in the Setup Devices dialog box being displayed Setup Devices Device List E E Delete Runtime Default Settings for Device Access Security Level Au Users e Open Device aaa 6 7 1 Creating a PLC Connection A new device can be added by clicking on the Add button on the Setup Devices dialog box Note CX Supervisor calls an external application to change PLC information The functions described in the following paragraphs may differ slightly depending upon which application and version has been invoke
385. system and correctly configured on both the server and client machine To check start the Control Panel and view the Network settings In the list of network components look for Microsoft Remote Registry If it does not exist follow these steps to add it 1 In the Network settings ensure User level access control is selected on the Access Control tab 2 From the Configuration tab click Add to add a Network component Choose Service from the type list and click Add 3 Click Have Disk and browse your Windows CD Select the path Admin Nettods remotReg for Win95 CD or Tools Reskit NetAdmin RemotReg for Win98 and select regsrv inf 4 Follow the screen prompts to complete installation and reboot if necessary 5 On the server machine select Passwords from the Control Panel 6 Ensure the Enable remote administration of this server option is checked 7 Add all required user ids to the Administrators list by clicking Add Windows ME no longer includes the Microsoft Remote Registry network service on the product CD but this can still be installed and used from any Windows 95 or Windows 98 CD ROM using the above steps 309 Configuring a DCOM OPC Server PC running Windows 98 or MeAppendix F Obsolete F 3 Configuring a DCOM OPC Server PC running Windows 98 or Me 2 3a 1 2 3 Note F 3 1 Windows 95 310 Ensure File and Printer sharing is enabled by selecting Network from the Control Panel Add a ser
386. t the above DDE Client array transactions are initiated by means of script in the same way as single DDE Client points The CX Supervisor script below gives examples of the facilities available with DDE Client array points 313 DDE Appendix F Obsolete Features Example CX Supervisor Script demonstrating client array points chan DDERInitiate Excel Bookd souls IF chan gt O THEN Establish data transfers between point DDEArray and Excel the initial values of DDEArray is sent to Excel DDEOpenLinks chan The array 1S initialised with the value 5 and sent to Excel in one operation Eiaitarra V DDE Array 01 The contents of MemoryArray are copied into DDEArray and the array are sent to Excel in one operation MemoryArray 0 100 MemoryArray 1 34 MemoryArray 2 89 6 CopyArray MemoryArray DDEArray Sets element 2 of the array to 6 and sends the whole array to Excel Note Use On Request option and OutputPoint to send the array after setting several elements of a large array DDEArray 2 6 ENDIF F 4 3 2 DDE Script Functions The existing DDE Script functions DDEPoke and DDERequest can be used with any array points as the following example CX Supervisor Scripts show Example CX Supervisor Script demonstrating DDEPoke with arrays chan DDEInitiate Excel Book1l Sheet2 IF chan gt 0 THEN Send element 1 of RealArray to Excel DDEPoke chan R16C1 RealArray 1
387. t being added to the recipe Enter the name of a point which is initialised by this ingredient in the Link to Point field The adjacent Browse button may be used to display the Select Required Item dialog box which provides a list of points from which the selection may be made The Select Required Item dialog box also provides an Add Point button which allows a new point to be added See also chapter 3 Points The Quantity Expression field is used to define the value which is assigned to the point by this ingredient This may be a fixed value such as 50 as in the above expression or it may be any valid CX Supervisor script language expression featuring one or more point names Select Required litem All Groups Point Names hctvedlams 4lanmCount 4yalableMemory IHD 3 0 dont items Di sD apOfvear m ems Displayed Demoblode C Aliases 130 ickSpace S GDlResources Points SH ighAlarmes golear HighE nors 2 Descrpbior iY Real Ted The Editable Value at Runtime setting determines whether the target expression may be changed at runtime when the recipe is downloaded Only expressions featuring a fixed value may be edited in this way expressions featuring point names may not be edited at runtime Select the OK button to add the ingredient to the recipe or the Cancel button to abort this part of the operation 10 4 3 Recipe Validation 156 Recipe validation is an optional safety
388. t code Chapter 10 Runtime Actions describes the creation of script code using the Script Editor The script is defined using the Execute Script entry in the Animation Editor list Page scripts are concerned with manipulating points and graphical objects that are used or included within that page Actions cannot refer to graphical objects that appear in other pages In other words page scripts are used to drive a number of actions on the occurrence of a particular event An example of page script code is as follows REM move the car and transport IF start THEN Position position speed ENF IF REM if the car is at the start then reset the REM position and reset the car colour IF position lt OTHEN position 800 POLYGON_11 colour dark_grey 127 Animation Editor SECTION 9 Animation 9 2 4 Objects 128 ENDIF REM setup the paint spray colour IF position lt 300 position gt 400 amp amp changepaint THEN IF paintblue THEN POLYGON 34 colour dark blue ENDIF IF paint green THEN POLYGON_34 colour Dark_green ENDIF IF paintred THEN POLYGON_34 colour red ENDIF IF paintpurple THEN POLYGON_34 colour purple ENDIF IF paintyellow THEN POLYGON_34 colour yellow ENDIF IF paintwhite THEN POLYGON_34 colour white ENDIF ENDIF Refer to the Script Language Manual for explicit details regarding the construction and syntax of script code 10 3 Runtime Actions describes t
389. t defined a duplicate PLC Total Points The total number of points in the project Obviously for simplicity and performance this should be kept to the minimum you require Regular interval scripts indicate poor design decisions Running a script on a regular interval can be inefficient and cause a significant increase on local CPU usage If regular interval scripts also update points on devices this can lead to increased bandwidth use Consider using an on condition script instead Total Regular Interval Scripts 238 Performance Monitor SECTION 16 Application Analysis Performance Monitor Total Sleep commands The sleep command has been shown to cause problems with applications due to the necessity to have the containing script in a separate thread It is highly recommended that this command is not used and an alternative method is used such as On Condition scripts which can be triggered when something completes There is almost always a better more efficient alternative to a Sleep see the User Manual FAQ How Does Sleep work Update on Display The percentage of points that only update when you can see them Update on Display Bytes If a point value is not required unless you can see it this is a more efficient way of getting its value frequently The same recommendations apply as with Always Updating but these points will only update when you can see them the page opens Updating When Displayed T
390. t is added to the Graphics Editor it can be further modified since each library object is simply a group of objects As an example a page can be enhanced by using one of the gauges provided in the Gauges_1 default graphic library 111 Printing the Graphics Library SECTION 7 Graphics Library 7 3 5 7 3 6 1 3 7 7 3 8 7 4 7 4 1 112 Graphics Library Rectangle 1 The gauge object can be stretched to suit the needs of the page and other objects can be applied on top of or in addition to the gauge A library object can also be ungrouped by selecting Ungroup from the Edit menu The SEAL buttons on the toolbar can be used as an alternative to dragging Point Substitution If the library object includes animation actions the Point Substitution dialog box will be automatically displayed This allows the points associated with the object to be quickly updated for use in the current project For full details on Point Substitution refer to Chapter 4 Objects Default Graphic Library Objects CX Supervisor contains default ready to use libraries They cannot be added to this is denoted by the READ ONLY statement at the bottom of the Graphics Library Editor although they can be applied to a page and tailored in the usual way Conversion to Individual Page Objects The majority of items in the default CX Supervisor Graphics Libraries are metafiles and so support conversion into CX Supervisor objects This allows you
391. tabases 12 2 6 Creating a Read Write connection to an Excel file 186 Note Connections to Excel files may result in the error Operation must use an updateable query This is because the Provider installed with ADO version 2 0 is read only by default hence Records can not be added or amended To override this function you must manually change the Read Only property in the Connection String On the Modify Connection dialog box click Advanced and set the connection property as shown in the last line below Driver Microsort Excel Driver x1s gt DBQ C WorkBook xls ReadOnly False Excel files can also be updated by accessing the file via the ODBC DSN driver This is achieved by carrying out the following steps e Create a File DSN for the required Excel file with the following options see Chapter 12 Creating a Data Source Name file e Select the Microsoft Excel Driver xls If this option does not exist you will need to install the Microsoft ODBC driver for Excel from the Excel setup e Ensure that the Read Only check box is clear e Load the Excel spreadsheet and create a table to access the data by creating a Named Range as follows e Highlight the row s and column s area where your data resides including the header row e On the Insert menu point to Name click Define and enter a name for your range e Create a connection in the CX Supervisor Workspace specifying the File DSN as its source
392. tarted To adjust this value select Runtime Settings from the Projects menu and select Non Volatile Rate from the sub menu CX Supervisor displays the following dialog box Non olatile Rate Save to Disk Every I seconds Cancel Enter a new value for the Non Volatile Rate in the Seconds field and click the OK button To open the Screen Size dialog box select Screen Size from the Runtime Settings menu Screen Size Screen widik Screen Height 1024 Rescale run time to screen size Type valid values into the Screen Width and Screen Height fields These values are used to define the screen size of the runtime application but do not affect Maximise and Minimise dialog box states By enabling the Rescale run time to screen size option the screen rescales itself to take into account the resolution of the runtime system Click the OK button to accept the setting or the Cancel button to abort Settings SECTION 6 Projects 6 10 2 5 Alarm Settings Note To open the Alarm Settings dialog box select Alarm Settings from the Runtime Settings menu Alarm Settings On Alam Automatically Display lam Status Viewer 1 Cancel Alam History Log 0 J Alarm Sourd Maxum entries m Status Viewer 20 Maximum entries inHistoy Log 200 Log system start stop messages Alarm Status Messages C Use Language File Text Raised Text Alarm Cleaned Text Cleaned Acknowl
393. te Change Interval 20 Seconds M Stat Logging on Application Startup For convenience a unique Database Link name is created automatically This can be changed to give a more meaningful description if required 177 Data Logging SECTION 11 Data Logging 11 7 1 2 Connection Select the Database Connection to link to from the list showing configured Database connections 11 7 1 3 Recordset Select the Recordset to create a link to from the list showing Recordsets configured in the selected Connection 11 7 1 4 Sample Rate Select whether field links defined within this Database Link are logged when their expression changes or on a regular interval for example every 30 seconds 11 7 1 5 Start Logging on Application Startup When unchecked logging must be started and stopped using script commands When checked the logging of all associated fields starts automatically when the application is started 11 7 2 Add Field Link Dialog The Add Field Link dialog box show below is show when the Add Field Link menu option is selected from the Data Log editor and the identical Modify Field Link dialog box when the Edit menu is selected Add Field Link Field Properties Hare Fietelt Field Link Order E Expression E A Dala Tppe C Bool C Intege Real C Ted Dead Band fo pa FY Trigger on change of value 11 7 2 1 Name For convenience a unique Field Link name is created automatically This can be changed to
394. tep 1 above 3 Install any ActiveX controls used by the application This includes any use of Microsoft Forms FORMS20 DLL which is not included on the DyaloX IPC by default 4 lf you are running a Machine Edition project you will not need a USB Dongle However if you are running a PLUS project install the USB Dongle copy protection 5 Copy the desired runtime application Remember that drive C is for the operating system and space may become limited Consider installing other software to other drives like additional flash cards or USB keys However note that typically all software automatically installs some files to Windows system folders or Common folders on the C drive even if the program is installed to another drive 307 General Use Appendix E Using with the Omron DyaloX E 1 2 Communication Settings The USB port can be used to communicate with compatible Omron hardware The CX Server USB drivers for the USB PLC must be installed manually if required and can be found in the CX Server installation directory Note At runtime the DyaloX IPC can only use the COM ports that are configured in the operating system The Development platform therefore must have the same COM ports available so they can be selected at development time and the same port available for use at runtime If required it is possible to reconfigure the COM port for a configured device once the application is compiled if the Embed CX Server Project wi
395. th Max Points Sec can give an idea of how many points are actually array points Outputs On Change The total number of points that are output to the device whenever the value has changed Outputs On Request The total number of points that are only output to the device when request this can be more efficient if the value changes frequently but the device doesn t need to be notified of this frequently References to non This indicates a big problem you are using a existent points point in a script or in some other action which doesn t exist this will fail if this script or action ever runs Theoretical Max This is a measure of all the points updating all the Bandwidth Bytes Sec time and all points on display for the worst case page in the project This figure should be kept as low as possible and within the bandwidth of your network 237 Application Analysis SECTION 16 Application Analysis Performance Monitor Total ActiveX Objects This is a count of the total number of ActiveX objects used in the project this includes objects which are used more than once Using ActiveX is a great way of adding advanced functionality to your application but it carries the risk that the component used may not be as reliable as required Total Alarms A count of the total defined alarms on the system this is limited in ME so this gives an idea of if the limit is being approached Many alarms also make an application harder to man
396. than the network bandwidth or infrastructure can cope with and performance is suffering Theoretical Max CPS An assumed maximum CPS possible for the particular network this is a rough calculation and is only used as a guide It does not take into account other network traffic or differences between throughput of different PC network cards Performance Monitor SECTION 16 Application Analysis Performance Monitor Total Active Elements The number of active memory addresses on a PLC the Active points could be in arrays of many elements so the Elements is a better guide to how much memory on the PLC you are addressing This number should not be a surprise if this number looks large you need to consider if you are using and updating too many points at once and affecting performance TX Bytes CX Server RX The bytes transmitted or received to the PLC from Bytes CX Server CX Server TX Bytes CX Supervisor The number of bytes transmitted from CX Supervisor to CX Server TX Bytes Sec CX The current number of bytes per second being Supervisor transmitted from CX Supervisor to CX Server this should be kept well below the bandwidth capacity of the network being used Also take into account other bandwidth use such as received data and other unrelated network traffic 241 Performance Monitor SECTION 16 Application Analysis Performance Monitor 242 An Overview of OPC SECTION 17 Using CX Supervisor as an OPC Client
397. the Display Value Text dialog box 146 Runtime Actions SECTION 9 Animation To access the Display Value Text dialog box to add an action select Display Text Point from the animation list and click the Add Action button To access the Display Value Text dialog box to modify an action select Display Text Point from the animation list and click the Modify Action button For a list of the objects to which this action is applicable refer to chapter 9 Objects On selection of the Display Text Point action the Display Value Text dialog box opens Display Value Text Text Point PaeekDayName r Displayed Text Browse T oda 15 Bie An expression based on a text point must be entered This expression is typed into the Text Point field A text string to be displayed can be entered in the Displayed Text field this field can be updated using the Graphics Editor The position of the displayed text within the text field is specified by entering a character into the Displayed Text field Note To include a character as part of the text insert it as an escape character For example to display Box 1 type Box Only hashes typed to the left of the required for value display need escape characters since the first hash without an escape character is taken to be the point at which the value should be displayed To abort the Display Text Value edit click the Cancel button By clicking the Browse b
398. the current point may be inserted in the Description field The point type can be Boolean Integer Real or Text The default type is Boolean 3 4 3 Point Attributes 38 The attributes for a point vary according to the point type For a Boolean point the following attributes are displayed Creating a Point SECTION 3 Points 3 4 4 I O Type Point Attributes Default State Default Text f State 0 or Point Type f Boolean Integer C Real Text C State 1 On The default state of the point is defined by selecting either the State 0 or State 1 setting Associative text such as OFF or FALSE for state 0 can be applied in the related Default Text fields The default text is associated with Toggle buttons and object animations such as Display Value and Edit Point Value when they are configured to use the point For an Integer point the following attributes are displayed Point Attributes Minimum Y alue assasass Masmum ale 99999999 Default Value o The minimum threshold for the point is inserted into the Minimum Value field The maximum threshold for the point is inserted into the Maximum Value field The default value is inserted in the Default Value field Note Integer points are limited to 2 147 483 648 to 2147483647 For a Real point the following attributes are displayed Point Type C Boolean Point Attributes Minimum Y alue 99999999 Masimum alue 5999
399. the data tables The Audit Trail can be started and stopped at any time during runtime execution by using the scripting commands Each time the Audit Trail is started any new records generated will either be a appended to the existing database file or b a new database file will be created This action is controlled by the checkbox setting on the Audit Database Setup shown above For further details of this function refer to the section Microsoft Access Database File Management below 13 4 7 Running the CFR Test Application and Logging to an Access Database The project is now ready to generate an audit trail on the selected Points The default option will create a Microsoft Access database file in a subdirectory of the project Compile and run the project the runtime will appear similar to the screen shot shown below EA CFR Audit Trail Test Login Designer start Audit Trail Increment Point Generale Alarm Generate Event Execute the following actions to log records into the default Access database e Press the Login Designer button e Press the Start Audit Trail button This action will cause a new subfolder to be created under the project folder called AuditT rail NOTE In this folder will be a file named lt Project Name gt _ lt ddmmyyyy gt _1 mdb where lt Project Name gt is the name of the CX Supervisor project and lt ddmmyyyy gt is today s date 205 Creating Running a CFR Applica
400. the relevant Wizard in the graphics editor See chapter 4 Objects 89 Settings SECTION 6 Projects 6 10 2 Runtime Settings The Runtime Settings option is selected from the Project menu The settings discussed in the following paragraphs help to configure runtime environment applications and have no effect in the development environment Settings that affect the development environment are discussed in chapter 2 Pages 6 10 2 1 Startup Conditions To open the Startup Conditions dialog box select Startup Conditions from the Runtime Settings menu Sia London General Startup Conditions E EnociE vert Legging Enabled Coe F Display Mar Window Married ESA E Display Man wrd Tide Bar E Los All Pages reo Mery MT Dyrare Hand Cuetos Enabled E Keyboard Control Enabled f Une Flat Toolbars FT Use Lage Touch Dialogs Communication Startup Conditions T PLC Links Enabled FT ODE Links Ende r OLE Links Enabled Click the settings to enable disable General Startup Conditions and Communication Startup Conditions Click the OK button to accept the settings or the Cancel button to abort When Keyboard Control is enabled a focus rectangle becomes visible around the currently selected object The cursor keys and lt Tab gt key can then be used to navigate around the selectable objects on a page When an object is selected certain actions can then be applied depending on the object s type The most common action is to simulat
401. the run time environment SCADA applications are run using the run time environment of CX Supervisor following creation of the application in the CX Supervisor development environment Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition A Server is the central processing point of a Network that is accessible to all computers Networks affect CX Supervisor in that further associated options are available if the computer Network is connected An application that can be used to view or interact with whilst currently within CX Supervisor Statement String SVGA mode CX Supervisor Target Value Taskbar Text Object Text Type Unicode Validation Code VBScript VGA mode Windows Desktop Windows Scripting Host Appendix G Glossary of Terms Within the CX Supervisor script language a statement is a command understood by the run time environment Statements are constructed of commands and arguments which when combined help to formulate a finished application to be used in the run time environment The contents of a Text type point that can only contain literal alohanumeric characters A string starts following an opening quotation mark and ends before a closing question mark in the example name spot the point name holds the string spot A mode of video display that provides 800 600 pixel resolution or higher with 16 or more colours and is supported on Super Video Graphics Adapter systems A SCADA s
402. the tab order obj1 obj2 obj3 Changing Between Pages The lt Ctrl gt lt Tab gt key can be used to change between pages Simulating a Left Mouse Button Click Objects that have scripts attached such as a button or objects that perform a particular action when clicked such as toggle buttons can be executed by using the lt Enter gt key Slider Operation When a slider object is selected the plus and minus keys can be used to increment or decrement its value respectively This also applies to the sliders on trend graphs Obtaining the Runtime Floating Menu To display the Runtime Floating menu use either the lt Shift gt lt F10 gt key combination or use the Windows right mouse button key which is next to the lt Ctrl gt key on the right hand side of the keyboard Standard Windows Keys Some standard Windows key combinations are as follows lt Alt gt lt gt hyphen Used to access the child window control box at the top left hand side of the dialog box lt Alt gt lt Spacebar gt Used to access the main window control box at the top left hand side of the dialog box lt Alt gt lt F4 gt Used to close down the current application Using Runtime Alarm Error and Recipe Viewer These can be invoked from the Runtime Floating menu see above To access their functionality use the lt Tab gt key to move from button to button and lt Enter gt to press a button The up and down cursor keys can be used
403. thin CX Supervisor SR2 file setting is turned off so the devices settings can be editing on the target platform 308 Windows 98 Windows ME Windows NT Appendix F Obsolete Features Appendix F Obsolete Features This appendix provides a summary of features that are obsolete and have been removed from the standard documentation Details are included here to assist maintaining old projects still using these features These features should not be used in development of new solutions as it is likely support for the following features may and will be removed from the next or future releases F 1 Windows 98 Windows ME Windows NT This product no longer installs on Windows 98 ME or NT It is recommended to upgrade to Windows 2000 or Windows XP Professional F 2 Configuring a OPC DCOM Client PC running Windows 98 or Me 1 2 3 l 23 Note 1 Ensure File and Printer sharing is enabled by selecting Network from the Control Panel Add a service and click either File and print sharing for Microsoft Networks or File and print sharing for Netware Networks as appropriate 2 Start DCOMCNFG EXE e g by selecting RUN from the Start button The default location is CAWINDOWSISYSTEM 3 View the Default Properties tab Ensure that the Enable Distributed COM on this computer is checked A CX Supervisor Client running on Windows 98 or ME also requires the Microsoft Remote Registry network service to be installed with the operating
404. tion Microsoft Access SECTION 13 CFR Title 21 NOTE There will also be a file with the same name but with extension Idb this is a temporary locking file which will be removed when StopAuditTrail is executed e Press the Increment Point button several times to log some audit point evenis e Then press Stop Audit Trail button to stop the audit trail and close the mdb database file e Exit Runtime 13 4 8 Viewing the Audit Trail Database amp Points Table ot ee em ee 2 11 08 2010 J 11072010 d 110872010 5 11 08 2010 6 11 08 2010 r 11 08 2010 a 11 08 2010 9 11 08 2010 10 11 09 2010 11 1110582010 12 11 08 2010 2 PA 206 Open the lt Project Name gt _ lt ddmmyyyy gt _1 mdb file When the database opens a Security Warning dialog may appear press the Open button and you will be presented with a login dialog Enter the username Guest no password is required and then press the OK button The Access database will contain four tables named Alarms Errors Events and Points as shown below des CFR Tutorial 201006811 1 Databa Create table in Design view Create table by using wizard Create table by entering data Alarms Forms Errors Reports Events Groups Open the Points table to show the Audit Trail that was generated by pressing the Increment Point button Pf CA CO CEE 12 53 47 12 53 47 12 53 47 12 53 47 12 53 47 12 53 47
405. tion Network Settings dialog box select the Modem tab CX Server uses standard TAPI build into the OS The modem must be installed properly to be shown in the Modem list What is the CX Supervisor and SYSMAC SCS Tokens compatibility CX Supervisor 2 0 and above does not operate with old software tokens from older versions You need to purchase a USB Dongle What is the CX Supervisor and SYSMAC SCS Dongles compatibility CX Supervisor 2 0 and above does not operate with USB Dongles from version 1 3 or old parallel port dongles from older versions You need to purchase a USB Dongle What is the maximum limit of number of PLCs or Devices Machine edition projects are capable of communication with up to 15 devices through CX Server and the PLUS projects with up to 256 devices What is the maximum limit of size of array points Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions Each array point may contain up to 1024 elemenis What is the maximum limit of number of pages Machine edition projects can configure up to 100 pages and the PLUS projects with up to 500 What is the maximum limit of number of objects on a page There is no theoretical limit to the number of objects on a page but 1 000 should be considered the limit for normal PC configurations Since each object consumes resources Operating Systems like Windows NT Windows 2000 and Windows XP will support larger applications than Win98 or ME What is the maximum limit of
406. tions Functions Special Execubion Alnibutes Senpt Name IntervatS cript2 Tigger Event On Regular Interval Interval Time 100 Miliseconds Scrpot Code O WEB Script 5 Supervisor Script L Stretchable i Balloon Demonstration A Fish jumping seript if FishJump then if Fishingle 0 0 then RinglSize 1 Ringl visible TRUE ano or J nor endif Fishangle FishAngle 3 14 20 if Fishingle gt 3 14 then i FishJump FALSE Fish visible FALSE Ringesize 1 Ea CJi Ringe visible TRUE else LJ Fish rotate Fishingle 360 6 28 The script editor is colour coded to help show correct syntax with keywords and different object types are shown in different colours When creating the script choosing an action function etc from the menu may require further information This subsequent information is provided using some common dialog boxs the Select Required Item dialog box the Simple Expression Entry dialog box and the Object Selection dialog box Use the Select Required Item dialog box to pick a point to associate with the current action It is accessed by clicking the Browse button from the current dialog box This results in the Select Required ltem dialog box being displayed Select Required ltem TA wallablellemory 10 ayOthonth 0 ayO fear 0 emobd ocke iDiskSpace GDlResources 4 ighAlarns TH ighE mors 131 Runtime Actions SECTION 9 Animation Only relevant points
407. to abort the delete operation Note A PLC cannot be renamed deleted or edited if it is currently open for communications 83 Device Configuration SECTION 6 Projects 6 7 4 Accessing PLC Connection in Runtime lt is possible to reconfigure PLCs at runtime via the right mouse button floating menu option PLC Maintenance List The list of currently configured PLCs opens via the PLCs in Project dialog box On selection of a PLC the PLC Information dialog box opens which allows the user to change the PLC configuration dynamically during runtime The Open PLC option provides the capability to toggle the communications status of the PLC The PLC Mode options switch the current mode of operation of the PLC between Stop Debug Monitor and Run e Stop mode halts the PLC program execution allowing the PLC to be programmed e Debug mode allows for the single stepping of program execution This mode is reserved for CV series PLCs only e Monitor mode operation allows normal PLC program execution and modification of data e Run mode operation allows normal PLC program execution No data in any of the PLC memory areas can be changed It is possible to individually enable disable point communications from the PLC Maintenance dialog box PLC Maintenance i k i X PL Status Information PLE Mame CS1H PLE Type CS1H CPU Type CPUBY Error Status No Errors PLE Communication Statue e Open PLE PLE Mode aaa E St
408. to scroll the displayed list To close them or to move or resize them use the standard lt Alt gt lt gt hyphen key combination to access their menus Other Notes In Project level scripts it is possible to define OnKeyPress scripts which are attached to the cursor keys If Keyboard Only operation is set then it is not possible to execute a script attached to one of the cursor keys since they are being used for navigating around the selectable objects on the page Alternative additional keys have been added to compensate for this They are the number pad cursor keys i e 2 4 6 and 8 However these can only be used when the lt Num Lock gt key is on The project target can be changed between Machine Edition and PLUS with this dialog box 91 Settings SECTION 6 Projects Runtime Target Settings SELES alse ss CX Supervisor Plus Cancel Project Information Total Max PLCs 0 256 Points 20 000 Pages 4 BOO Alarms 0 S000 Interval Scripts 4 100 Supported Databases Target Type Conversion Notes No lssues Found Any conversion problems are reported in the Notes at the bottom and conversion is prevented if it is not allowed 6 10 2 3 Non Volatile Rate 6 10 2 4 Screen Size 92 The Non Volatile rate specifies how often the value of points flagged as non volatile are saved to disk in seconds The latest disk values are used to re initialise the point values when CX Supervisor is res
409. tom title using a static text object added which does support automatic translation Any text that includes a quote character cannot be stored so is automatically converted to single quote character Translations must also include single quote characters Any newline characters will be converted to n so that each translation always appears on one line in the file Translations should also include the n characters and never include carriage returns part way through the translation Configuring Windows for Language Support SECTION 15 Multilingual Features 15 6 Configuring Windows for Language Support 15 6 1 Windows XP Note Note Being the most modern operating system language support provided by Windows XP is the best If you are considering a Multilingual application this operating system offers the best solution It is possible to install language support for multiple languages multiple character sets and fonts multiple keyboard layouts for input and to switch between them To achieve this follow these steps 1 Start Windows in the normal way 2 Open Control Panel and select Regional and Language options 3 The Regional Options tab settings do not affect the language support but can be set as required 4 On the Languages tab click Details 5 Add all the Input Locales required and set the preferred default These affect how the keyboard is mapped for typing letters and can be changed as CX Supervisor is running b
410. ton to leave unchanged An example of a trend graph is shown below Databar Databar Value Balloon Altitude 09 10 39 TimeCiate Stamp 4 4 11 Web Browser Object The Web Browser object allows web files like HTML JPG or AVI files al to be added to a CX Supervisor page These files may be stored locally on a File Server or be distributed from any Web Server The Web Browser object includes a Java Virtual Machine JVM allowing execution of Java Script and Java Applets Double click the object to show the property page and enter the file to be displayed either as a filename or a fully qualified URL for example with http prefix 4 5 Manipulating Objects Objects can be manipulated to give the required results An object must be selected before it can be manipulated 4 5 1 Select To select an object either click on it with the left mouse button or select it from the object identification control for further details on this control refer to chapter 1 Graphics Editor Eight grab handles are displayed around the object To select several objects within a rectangular area use a rubber band by clicking the left mouse button and dragging over an area 68 Manipulating Objects 4 5 2 4 5 3 4 5 4 4 5 5 4 5 6 4 5 7 Move Cut Copy Paste Delete Undo SECTION 4 Objects It is also possible to select all the objects a rubber band intersects by holding down the lt Ctrl gt key whilst rubber banding
411. trait to landscape click the Landscape setting or vice versa 3 To change the paper size click the Size field and select the desired paper size from the list presented 4 To change the paper source click the Source field and select the desired paper source from the list presented 5 Click the OK button to exit from the Print Setup dialog box when the settings are correct Note The Properties button gives access to advanced printer configuration functions for the selected printer For details of these functions refer to the Windows User Manual On line Help or the appropriate Manufacturer s handbook 2 4 2 Print Preview To preview the page before printing select Print Preview from the File menu This results in a screen display similar to the following Balloon Page 1 2 3 To print the page Click the g button CX Supervisor displays the Print dialog box To display the next page click the Next Page button To display the previous page click the Prev Page button To display the current page side by side with the next page click the Two Page button To return to a single page view click the same button again which now carries the legend One Page 5 Click the Zoom In button Click it a second time to zoom in to the second level This does not zoom into a specific area of the page 6 To zoom out from a zoomed in view click the Zoom Out button Click a second time to zoom right out
412. tries The Style Attributes fields can be amended by clicking on the settings Exit the Axis Scaling dialog box by clicking the OK button to accept the scaling attributes or click the Cancel button to leave them unchanged Pictures and graphics can be inserted on a page in the form of bitmaps bmp Windows metafiles wmf Enhanced metafiles emf JPEG jpeg jpg and GIF files gif Click the 28 button then click or click and drag on the page to insert a picture placeholder To insert a picture double click the placeholder The Picture Wizard dialog box opens Creating and Editing Control Objects 1 2 3 4 4 3 1 Transparency 4 4 3 2 Resampling Note SECTION 4 Objects Picture Wizard Fie Name bnp wend eS OMRON a 7 E Lele ae LA SUDEP C cdm scsv20 j List Fiss of Type Picture Files bmp E Melwork Display picture at original size 1 Locate the drive and directory where the desired picture is stored using the Directories and Drives controls 2 Select the file type and then the picture from the list presented 3 Use the Display picture at original size setting to specify whether the picture is to be displayed at original size or scaled 4 Click the OK button to load the page Note lf the PC installation of CX Supervisor is on a networked machine a Network button is added to the dialog box For further information on the function of the Netwo
413. trol Attributes dialog box enter the appropriate parameters as follows Commuricabons Conti x Communications Control Attributes 247 248 Note Using CX Supervisor with OPC Servers SECTION 17 Using CX Supervisor as an OPC Server This shows the name of the communications object to connect to the server i e OMRONCXOPCCommunicationsControl If you wish to use a different object make your selection from the drop down list To Add Modify or Delete an object click the Info button You will only need 1 communications object per OPC server but note you can connect to more 1 server at a time if desired using this setting This field is initially blank and an OPC control should be added Select the Add option which will open the Communications Control dialog box From the list of control objects select the one to be added and click the OK button Communications Controls E xj unete OMRON CH Communications Control i OMRON CIC Cormmuricabon Control OMRON Cx OFC Comemurecabons Control OMROMN E Superior Commurecabons Control On adding the Communication Control Properties dialog box is automatically shown as detailed below To edit these properties later select Modify from the Info menu Group Select the Group containing the required item from the dropdown list To Add Modify or Delete a Group click the Info button Items The Items within the selected Group are listed The Item Attributes dialog box can be used t
414. tton unchanged 4 4 10 Trend Graph Trend graphs allow the display of data over time Click the t button then click or click and drag on the page to insert the graph To edit the Trend Graph double click on it The Trend Graph Wizard dialog box opens 66 Creating and Editing Control Objects SECTION 4 Objects 1 2 3 Trend Graph Wizard Conbgurabon Minbir Trend Graph Tae EE Sample Fate 5 Second Visible Time Span I0 Mirutes Total Time Span i0 Minutes y Time Label E very o Samples Backgrour Color MN Display Tene Labels M Side W Value Ba Traces 1toS Traces 6 to 10 Trace Expresion and Colour Brome Brows Erose The Wizard allows entry of Configuration Attributes and assignment of line colours and expressions l 2 Enter a title for the graph in the Trend Graph Title field Enter the frequency of data sampling in the Sample Rate field in this example it is every five seconds Enter the period displayed by the graph at any one time in the Visible Time Span field Enter the size of buffer for stored data of samples in the Total Time Span field Enter the number of samples on the X axis in the Time Label Every field Click the background colour and select the required colour from the palette Toggle the Display Time Labels Display Slider and Value Bar settings as desired Enabling the Value Bar allows the graph to be clicked during runt
415. ture object will then be replaced with the corresponding CX Supervisor objects For more complex metafiles this may take a few moments 99 Creating and Editing Control Objects SECTION 4 Objects 4 4 4 Linear Gauge 60 Arrow sign wmf CA SUP ervis or from the object group with a Graphics Libary rotate animation applied to the arrow Limitations Metafiles contain a number of types of records for example Poly and Line some of the less common metafiles or those that simply have no suitable representation in CX Supervisor are skipped during the conversion The result of this is that the CX Supervisor object group created may not look identical to the source metafile image A Gauge provides a display of operational values Click the button then click or click and drag on the page to insert the gauge To edit a Linear Gauge object double click on it The Gauge Wizard dialog box opens Soe Sl Browee Cx Supervisor Gauge Title Font Expression Minium Gauge Value 0 Haamun Bauge Wakas 100 Mince Display Urie fio Majos Display Liras 20 Banica Colour Ef Auto See Fonts i T Dipa Hino Unite Side Specie Altibutes gt e Display Major Units Display Horizontal FF Display Mince Ticks Display Major Ticks E 3 D Frame The Gauge Wizard dialog box allows entry of the Gauge Style Configuration Attributes Style Attributes and Style Specific Attributes fields To select a style click
416. udit ID Note Overview SECTION 14 Standard Web Pages 14 1 Overview 14 2 Access 14 3 Pages SECTION 14 Standard Web Pages This chapter introduces CX Supervisor s Standard Web Pages and explains their function configuration and limitations The standard web pages provide a web interface to a running CX Supervisor application similar to that of a network router or office printer The pages provide the ability to monitor the state of the application and view current point values alarm state and history event error log and perform basic maintenance operations 3 Cx Superrizor Points Microsoft Internet Explorer a aj xj File Ei View Favorites Joos Help i Que O 2 D ea ipro E 2 2 a JO O Address http flocalhost 4140 Points aspxc Edo uns Supervisor Alarms Alarm Log Event Error Log Application Settings Log Out Altitude 0 Edit Remove Fuel 91 1099999999999 Edit Remove Lift 0 ETA Score O Edit Remove Add Remove All To access the standard web pages navigate to http IPADDRESS 4140 Where IPADDRESS is the IP address of the PC running the CX Supervisor runtime application Example http 10 0 0 1 4140 A number of pages are included in the standard set see the table below for a summary of their usage Home Summary Shows the number of active alarms and the status of all configured devices Monitor and edit point values View and acknowledge current alarms Alarm Log
417. under increasing load C Supeniso 1 0 Supervisor 1 1 a CASuperisar 12 12 E Capena 122 7 No of Active Points Note lower write time indicates greater performance See gt How does upgrading CX Server affect communications performance How does upgrading CX Server affect communications performance The graphs below should show that this does not have a significant impact The graphs show Time to perform instantaneous read and writes are slightly slower on average although this is in the order of a few milliseconds so is not ordinarily visible Maximum number of Subscription points remains the same across all versions This is confirmed with a variety of protocols see gt How does my PC specification affect communications performance E a 5 Y e 2 E w oO ja E L o T D a h E O gt hija 2 CA Server 1 6 Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions See gt What is the maximum number of communication updates CA Sarvear 22 How does my PC specification affect communications performance The graphs below show that processor speed has a significant impact on performance especially for large systems with high quantities of On Interval Subscription points The graphs show Upgrading from a 450Mhz system to a 2 4Ghz can quadruple the maximum number of Subscriptions that can be processed See gt What is the maximum number of communication updates Read Wr
418. unwanted parts of the image 22 Status Bar SECTION 1 Graphics Editor FA Untitled 1 5 Status Bar CX Supervisor provides help and status information in a Status Bar located at the bottom of the main window The Status Bar has two main active areas the Help Message area and the Cursor Co ordinates area The Help Message area is used by CX Supervisor to display helpful information concerning menu selections and controls It is located at the left hand end of the Status Bar and can display messages similar to the following Choose fill pattern from palette The Cursor Co ordinates area provides position information for the current location of the mouse pointer as it tracks around the active page within the CX Supervisor window If an object on a page is selected the status area displays the co ordinates of the location of that object An example of the system status area is shown below The first two display panels show the current x and y co ordinates of the mouse pointer within the currently active page As the mouse pointer leaves the confines of a page and moves into the client area of the main CX Supervisor window the last recorded co ordinates are held in these panels If an object is clicked on all four panels are used by CX Supervisor to display the co ordinates of that object as follows m fa 159 133 fes ras x y Width Height The first two panels contain the distance of the top left corn
419. user selections as they are made 1 Select the name of the alarm group by which alarm messages are to be filtered using the Group field to display the list of available groups The default selection is lt All Groups gt which displays all alarm messages To display more than one group use the wildcard character e g Group1 will include all groups starting Group1 2 From the Acknowledge On Click options select the level of security that is required for acknowledgement The default is All Users 3 From the Display Alarms from Selected Priorities options select the range of alarms that are to be displayed The default selections are from the Lowest to the Highest Note that the range From must be the same or lower than the range To Use the check box Highest Priority at Top to reverse the alarm order 4 In Alarm Status Colours the colour codes for each of the three alarm states and blinking colours may be specified by clicking the appropriate colour box and selecting a new colour from the resultant Colour dialog box Creating and Editing Control Objects SECTION 4 Objects 5 The Alarm Window Colours options allow you to select the colours for the Alarms Windows Background Title text and the Frame 6 f Display Date Display Time Display Alarm Status Display Column Titles 3 D Frame Highest Priority at Top Display Group Display Priority Date Width Time Width Group Width Status Select th
420. ust always be specified if an individual array element is required CX Supervisor supports Hot DDE links if Microsoft Excel has the link option automatic set then the value in Microsoft Excel are updated whenever ddearray index changes The above example is the simplest way to access read single elements of an array from Microsoft Excel to read write whole arrays it is necessary to use macros Microsoft Excel Visual Basic scripts The example scripts that follow have all been created using Microsoft Excel and are working examples They contain the minimum amount of information required to demonstrate the particular facility being described i e they do not contain any error checking code F 4 3 4 Sending Arrays to CX Supervisor via DDEPoke In order to write to an CX Supervisor array point using the DDEPoke function it must first be given DDE Read Write access via the Advanced Point Settings dialog box when adding or modifying the point The following script shows how to send arrays of values from Microsoft Excel to CX Supervisor via DDEPoke Example sending array values from Microsoft Excel to CX Supervisor Sub SendArrayValues Dim chan As Integer chan DDE In tiate SCST Point If chan lt gt 0 Then Send a row of data to an array point named Arrayl DDEPoke chan AEE ASL y Range Cells 1 1 Cells h De 315 DDE Appendix F Obsolete Features Send a column of data to an array point named
421. utton a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions When completed click the OK button If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message opens 9 3 23 Edit Point Value Digital The value of a Boolean point may be issued to the user for amendment during runtime defined using the User Input Digital dialog box To access the User Input Digital dialog box to add an action select Edit Point Value Digital from the animation list and click the Add Action button To access the User Input Digital dialog box to modify an action select Edit Point Value Digital from the animation list and click the Modify Action button For a list of the objects to which this action is applicable refer to chapter 9 Objects On selection of the Edit Point Value Digital action the dialog box opens Edit Point Yalue Digital Boolean Point Cancel Runtime Display Attributes Cancel Browse Caption Select ON or OFF State 0 Text OFF State 1 Text or In Place Edit 147 Runtime Actions SECTION 9 Animation A Boolean point must be entered This is typed into the Boolean Point field A text string to use as the caption of a user dialog box can be entered in the Caption field The range of input for the value and the representations of Boolean State 0 and Boolean State 1 are specified in the State O Text field and State 1 Text field If In Place Edit is
422. valuate the expression They do this whenever a point changes value or is re evaluated e g a value is received from the PLC at the point s usual scan rate This removes any sampling error associated with polling and also makes CX Supervisor very efficient How do display Real Numbers and Decimal Places 287 288 Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions In graphics editor select text tool from palette and type text e g Temperature C The after the decimal point indicate the precision of the real number display e g to 3 decimal places Finally select animation editor and animate with Display Value Analogue and assign the point name e g TEMP Which Operating System should use Windows XP Professional Windows NT Windows 2000 and Windows XP Professional all offer the best stability reliability multitasking security and DCOM support On the same spec machine Windows NT is actually up to 10 faster probably as it has the least developed code although Windows 2000 and XP are faster on their appropriate minimum specification machines Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows ME are no longer supported How do optimise the use of Files When closing a file using the CloseFile script function if TRUE is passed as a parameter e g CloseFile T RUE then the blank spaces at the end of each line will be removed thus reducing the size of the file Care should be taken if the file is being used by multiple systems
423. ve these settings Audit Trail Configuration Database e Microsoft Access mdb C SOL Server Setup Cancel Logging Options Specify the destination folder for the Audit Trail database files Folder Additional information Audit Trail D Point Browse Audit Trail Note Point Browse fe All Alarnns C Selected Alarms using Generate Audit Trail setting Log Erors Events into the Audit Trail database files 13 4 10 Configuring Alarms for Audit Trail Records To demonstrate logging Alarms to the Audit Trail the CFR Test Project can be modified as follows 207 208 Creating Running a CFR Application Microsoft Access SECTION 13 CFR Title 21 To generate an Alarm events take the following steps e Create a Boolean memory point called oSimpleAlarm which will be used to trigger the Alarm condition e Launch the Add Alarm dialog and create a simple alarm as follows Add Alarm General Attributes Alarm Name 5 impled lar Group Default i Priority Medium Acknowledge Box Play Sound Auto Acknowledge Print Messages Description Alarm Type Alarm Attributes E Simple Expression beba bSimple larm O Rate of Change Alarm Messages Browse Raised Alarm F aized Normal Alan Cleared NOTES 1 The Generate Audit Trail check box is shown enabled because the have checked the Log Alarm function in the Audit Trail conf
424. verted to Unicode temporarily for the duration of the runtime For this conversion to succeed the operating system must be configured to support displaying and converting the original language To permanently convert a USL translation file to a Unicode format UDT file simply open the USL file in Notepad select Save As and choose Encoding Unicode and change the extension to UDT If both a UDT and old style USL file are present the Runtime will load and use translations from the newer UDT file 15 4 Translating User Defined Text with the Translation Tool 228 At any time during development select Translation Tool from the Tools menu A dialog similar to below will be shown Translating User Defined Text with the Translation Tool SECTION 15 Multilingual Fea CX Supervisor Tranibaifon Tool C Program Files MimronWX Superviasr Demos Ceenmaldelaglt wit Ele Edit yem piep eo BA tH O iopen Tea 5 IO SE E i Tiir TROT rd EMT Theia ae WT TAL cep DEIT ee pte TR TL aes eee Pe Tea Del y 200 Esa a ab _ Jar torreciad tn MET ar Portree Bl PO pr ma ADO arden conciso al O Fi pba ee m Ta These rt inp og eee pe ne ne ad pee ea eel ea y rr Evico panig pon s se ales Corsa La purser er ged tortardel H Punta praj bend pig wer tauren mE an conectados a a o A id die ina i Sader ur dels brnk iri Sele Cee Carian en Sabena Wel be cad ho a bona Aids Cu vi bike senal Ml ala Ss CUR werden tJegeben aut se ver PETC en el rea Ses Ce
425. vice and click either File and print sharing for Microsoft Networks or File and print sharing for Netware Networks as appropriate Start DCOMCNFG EXE e g by selecting RUN from the Start button The default location is CAWINDOWSISYSTEM View the Default Properties tab Ensure that the Enable Distributed COM on this computer is checked View the Default Security tab and check the Enable remote connection check box From the Default Properties tab configure the Default Authentication Level to Connect and the Default Impersonation Level to Identify Setup the access permissions by either e On the Default Security tab adding the user to the Access list by clicking the Edit Default button in each case The user added should have Administrator rights on the local PC If not it may be necessary to add user groups INTERACTIVE and NETWORK as well e From the Applications tab configure the properties for OPC Server and OPC ServerList Class On the Security tab add the required users to each of the Custom Permissions The users added should have Administrator rights on the local PC If not it may be necessary to add user groups INTERACTIVE and NETWORK as well Third party servers and clients running on Windows 98 or ME may require the Microsoft Remote Registry network service to be installed with the operating system and correctly configured on both the server and client machine To check start the Control Pan
426. wer may also be displayed using the floating menu The floating menu needs to be configured to display the Recipes option This is done in the development environment and explained in chapter 6 Projects The Recipes dialog box opens t Recipes uu e Colhes ari Coltas Enich Coffee Enmopeari Colles inah The Recipe Viewer is similar to the Recipe Editor however there are some differences in functionality and appearance To remove an existing recipe highlight the recipe from the recipe list and click the button A confirmation dialog box opens Click the Yes button to remove the definition or the No button to abort the delete operation Note that recipes created in the development environment may not be deleted in the runtime environment The delete operation only affects recipes copied and saved in the runtime environment To modify an existing recipe highlight the recipe from the recipe list and click the button The Modify Recipe dialog box opens Using Recipes in Runtime SECTION 10 Recipes Note ay Modify Recipe Configuration Attibutes Black Coflee Mody Taget This runtime version of the dialog box is rather more limited in the power it offers than the equivalent dialog box in the development environment this is so that recipes which have been painstakingly created in the development environment cannot be
427. werage callback interval Masaru callback duration Average callback duration Enabled Regetened wth CX Server Synchronized Registered Joint Send Data Pending C Server PLC Co Server Address PomntT ype Humbes of Elements Registration Required Regutered By Page Script etc f y 0 0 0 0 00 1 1 1 0 The most useful readings on this screen are e Auto Update refreshes the data twice a second e Total Active Points Number of CX Server points both input and output currently active e Average Active Pts Sec Measured number of CX Server Inputs per second since application started or since Clear pressed With Input On Change optimisation this can be very small Also lnputsActual System Point e Calculated Peak Pts Sec Calculated number of CX Server Input points currently active multiplied by update rate 301 Scripting errors C 6 Scripting errors The scripting engines are very complex which provides many opportunities for errors This can be categorised as follows Appendix C Troubleshooting Elements Same as above except multiplied by number of array elements per point Ratio between Total Active Points and Total Active Points Elements shows how well optimised or badly like above with use of arrays Read Callbacks Number of data postings from CX Server MSecs since last callback Milliseconds waited since last data Min Max Average Callback interval Cal
428. when the OK button is clicked The normal message may be changed at any time simply by entering the desired message in the text field 8 5 8 6 Updating an Existing Alarm SECTION 8 Alarms Both alarm messages can include embedded point names via the Browse button which is replaced at runtime with the value of the point Example Boiler temp high BoilerTemp shows the point value in the alarm message Example Flow exceeded Pressure Press Temperature 2 2f temp Updating an Existing Alarm Open the Alarm Editor dialog box as described in chapter 8 Viewing the Contents of the Alarm Database To modify an existing alarm highlight the alarm entry from the alarm list and select the button This results in the Modify Alarm dialog box being displayed a dialog box based on the Add Alarm dialog box as shown below Modify Alarm General Attributes Alam Heme OvenTemplow Cancel Group Deut Browse Priority Medum Acknowedge Box Play Sound ls Auto Acknowledge Prt Mezeages Diescrplion Alsa Type Alarma Altribubes Simple Expresson Browse Alsam Messager Fated Waning Oven temperature it boo bow The selected alarm can be redefined as described in chapter 8 Creating a New Alarm When all the information has been provided for the updated alarm clicking the OK button commits the alarm to the alarms database while the Cancel button aborts this modify operation
429. xported to other programs such as Microsoft Excel The recorded events are stored in one or more Data Sets which can then be viewed using the Data Log Viewer The events to be recorded are defined by the developer and any number of Data Sets may be used to record specific areas or types of events either automatically at runtime or as specified by the developer As an aid to viewing a number of particular events in isolation Data Sets can be subdivided into data Groups Specific areas of related data can then be stored in these groups which can then be viewed either singly or with other groups within a Data Set The main elements of the CX Supervisor Data Logger are e Data Logger Editor used to configure items to be logged e Data Logging at Runtime the actual logging of the data e Data Log Viewer used to view the logged data e Remote Data Viewer enables viewing separately from the runtime system e Data Log Export facility enables export to other programs e g MS Excel e Script Functions gives full control over the logging process 11 2 Data Log Editor 11 2 1 Configuring Data Sets and Logging Settings The Data Sets data Groups and Items to log are configured from the Logging Tab at the bottom of the Development Workspace editor Items are edited using a right mouse button context sensitive menu The option available from the menu are e Edit enable the parameters of the selected Data Set Group or Item to be edited e Cut Copy an
430. y the box in the task bar 6 OK all dialogs and install new OS files from CD if requested Reboot if required If some extended characters in standard Windows controls like listboxes editboxes etc appear as solid boxes it may be necessary to select the required language on the Advanced tab for Language for non Unicode programs Microsoft does not document the reason for this In some circumstances like Russian or Greek support it has been noted Install files for complex script needs to be selected on the Languages tab Microsoft does not document the reason for this 15 6 2 Windows 2000 Note Note Windows 2000 language support is reasonable It is possible to install language support for multiple languages multiple character sets and fonts multiple keyboard layouts for input and to switch between them To achieve this follow these steps 1 Start Windows in the normal way 2 Open Control Panel and select Regional Options 3 The Numbers Currency Time and Date tabs settings do not affect the language support but can be set as required 4 On the General tab select ALL the languages that may be required in the Language settings for the system section If some extended characters in standard Windows controls like listboxes editboxes etc appear as solid boxes it may be necessary to change the default System Locale Click the Set Default button and select the required language In some circumstances like Russian
431. z3 Stop 1D 0 OF th me te E ml a a El El m E E E a m 13 6 4 SQL Statements If you do not want to give CX Supervisor the privileges to create tables in your chosen database you can create the tables in the required format using the SQL statements provided below 216 How to Access Information from a CFR Database SECTION 13 CFR Title 21 Part 11 The following SQL statements create the tables required for Audit Trail logging Points Table CREATE TABLE dbo Points Pointld int IDENTITY NOT NULL PRIMARY KEY Date varchar 15 NOT NULL Time varchar 10 NOT NULL Name varchar 50 NOT NULL Index int NOT NULL PreviousValue varchar 250 NOT NULL NewValue varchar 250 NOT NULL Userld varchar 250 NOT NULL Auditld varchar 250 NULL AuditNote varchar 250 NULL Alarms Table CREATE TABLE dbo Alarms Alarmld int IDENTITY NOT NULL PRIMARY KEY Date varchar 15 NOT NULL Time varchar 10 NOT NULL Name varchar 50 NOT NULL Priority varchar 15 NOT NULL PreviousState varchar 20 NOT NULL NewState varchar 20 NOT NULL Userld varchar 250 NOT NULL Auditld varchar 250 NULL AuditNote varchar 250 NULL Events Table CREATE TABLE dbo Events Eventld int IDENTITY NOT NULL PRIMARY KEY Date varchar 15 NOT NULL Time varchar 10 NOT NULL Message varchar 250 NOT NULL Userld varchar 250 NOT NULL Auditld varchar 250 NULL AuditNote varcha

User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents